Final 470

3Scope of Work
Procurement & Construction of 491 Villas and 3 Duplex Villas for Imam and Muazzin
REVIEWED BY:
Review Sequence 161 Reviewer 161 Reviewer Approved by

Name Padraic Leonard Mohammed Safwani Saleh Agala
Date and Signature
TABLE OF CONTENTS Page

1. OVERVIEW ……………………………………………………………………………………. 4
2. DESCRIPTION OF THE AREA …………………………………………………………. 4
3. SCOPE OF WORK …………………………………………………………………………. 5
3.1 General ……………………………………………………………………………… 5
3.2 Mobilization and Temporary works ………………………………… 8
3.3 Temporary water, electricity, firefighting and sewage ...….. 9
3.4 Engineering ………………………………………………………………………… 10
3.4. 1 Civil and site preparation work …………………………… 10
3.4. 2 Architectural work ……………………………………………….. 11
3.4. 3 Structural Work …………………………………………………… 12
3.4. 4 Mechanical Work (HVAC, Plumbing and Fire Protection 12
System) …………………………………………………….
3.4. 5 Electrical Work …………………………………………………….. 23
3.4. 6 Telecommunication Work ……………………………………. 25
3.4. 7 OA/ QC Plan …………………………………………………………. 28
3.4. 8 Reporting …………………………………………………………….. 28
4. PROJECT SCHDULE AND COORDINATIONPC CONTRACT …………….. 28
4. 1 Project Schedule ……………………………………………………………. 28
4. 2 Activation of Optional Scope ……………………………………….. 29
4. 3 Project Duration ……………………………………………………………. 29
4. 4 Mockup Sample …………………………………………………………….. 30
5. PERMITS ………………………………………………………………………………………. 30
6. PROJECT CLOSEOUT …………………………………………………………………….. 30
7. OPTIONAL SCOPE OF WORK …………………………………………………………. 31
8. LIST OF SPECIFICATIONS ……………………………………………………………….. 32
9. ATTACHMENTS …………………………………………………………………………….. 33
1. OVERVIEW:
This project, B1-28-10012, provides for the Home Ownership Lot Development, Phase I, at Al- Mutrafiah, Jubail
Industrial City in the Eastem Province of the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia.
This Contract will accommodate 491 house units, in total, with varying lot sizes for sectors F1-1, F1-2 and F1-3
and the construction of three (3) Duplex type houses for the Imam & Muzzain to be built on three (3) lots to be
selected by Saudi Aramco, in addition to three (3) Local day mosques.
2. DESCRIPTION OF THE AREA:
The site is located in the Mutrafiah District of the Jubail Industnal City residential area.
Mutraflah District is a new development within the Jubail Industrial City residential area SAUDI ARAMCO has
been granted a total of 491 villas.
The infrastructure (Initial Development) to the Saudi Aramco is completed by another Contractor. The final
development shall be completed once the houses are constructed.
3. SCOPE OF WORE:
3. 1 GENERAL:
3.1. 1 The scope of work comprises the complete procurement and construction (PC) including
site adaptation for 491 Villa units plus (3 duplex) to be constructed for Imam and Muazzin.
3.1. 2 There are 3 different villa types for employee houses to be constructed, namely Type B (90
units, Type C (279 units), Type D (122 units) and 1 type for which 3 duplex are to be
constructed for Imam and Muazzin Houses.
3.1. 3 The villas shall be constructed using isolated footings with framed superstructure infill
with conventional wall (CMU) cladding. These units shall be all two stories structures with
additional maid’s quarter and laundry area at the roof deck. Each lot has a carport area. The
typical ground floor has areas for men ’s majlis, women’s majlis, family sitting, dining room,
men’s wash and toilet, family wash and toilet, kitchen and dirty kitchen.
3.1. 4 Description of the Villas:
Type Style Option Built- up No. of Others

Area Rooms
B- Single family Combination of 531.36 m2 5 bedrooms Has a driver’s
medium villa. Moroccan and with 5 T&B at room area.
Spanish Style. the first floor.
C- Single family small 3- Style options- 430.90 m2 3 bedrooms Has a provision
villa. Moroccan, modern with 3 T&B at for future
and Spanish. First floor. extension (two
bedrooms) at
frist floor.
D- Single family large 3- Style options- 424.07 m2 3 bedrooms Has a provision
villa. Moroccan, modern with 3 T&B at for future
and Spanish. First floor. extension (two
bedrooms) at
frist floor.
Imam & Muazzin Villa. Modern Style. Combined total 3 bedrooms.
lot area of 500+
m2 with each
Villa has a
built- up area
of 250 m2.
3.1. 5 PC Contractor’s Responsibilities:

The PC contractor shall be responsible:
I) To be aware, well versed and complying with Royal commissions requirement.
II) To supply all agricultural soil required in green areas (planting works is excluded
and only optional) with in the lot for each of the aforementioned villa types
including all associated boundary walls.
III) To coordinated with the statutory Authorities i.e. Marafiq. SEC and STC on the
basic requirements for tie- ins and other interfaces with existing and/ or future
facilities at lot boundaries, are to be coordinated with the statutory Authorities i.e.
Marafiq, SEC and STC. Permanent connection fees for power and water will be
paid by SAUDI ARAMCO.
IV) TO obtain all approvals from the related utility authorities to abtain the necessary
building permit for temporary facilities and permanent buildings.
V) For all the necessary coordination and support in the supply and installation of
watt- hour meter by SCECO.
VI) For all the necessary coordination and support in the supply and installation of
water meters by marafiq.
VII) To provide provision for the future expansion shown in the drawing provide the
best practice for future expansion installation without any impairment with the
original Utilities.
VIII) To have investigated and acquainted itself with all general, local, climatic, physical,
geological, and sub- surface conditions at the site and assumes full responsibility for
all matters relating to works arising out of the bid documents.
IX) To provide all temporary facilities on site without any cost to SAUDI ARAMCO
including but not limited to site offices, storage area, safety, security, water, power,
telephone, office & pantry consumables, office cleaning and maintenance, toilet
consumables, scaffolding etc. as well as facilities for all domestic subcontractors and
SAUDI ARAMCO/Project Management Consultant Office.
X) To provide trash bins and skips to manage waste items; location and distribution of
skips will be as per Royal Commission approval.
XI) To keep the construction site clean and tidy by providing sufficient trash bins and
skips that meet Royal Commission requirements and will dispose of the waste to a
designated landfill area by Royal Commission. SAUDI ARAMCO will not accept
any uncleanness and untidiness within the construction site, if so, SAUDI
ARAMCO will require the PC Contractor to provide additional bins at their cost.
XII) To provide perimeter fence during the construction period Materials to be used
shall be as per the approved specification from Royal Commission, otherwise the
PC Contractor have to comply with Royal Commission Material Specification
without any cost to SAUDI ARAMCO.
XIII) For all builders work in connection with any works related to the civil, electrical,
mechanical (HVAC), plumbing/sanitary/sewage included in the scope of work and
shall be included in the lump sum price. This includes but not limited to:
a) Concrete equipment bases/pads.
b) Pipe supports, plinths including embedment as necessary.
c) Hollow core slabs, support beams, columns and the like, together
with necessary waterproofing (membrane, elastomeric, integral
type)/damp proofing/vapor barriers.
d) Roof access ladder.
e) Access panels in the false ceiling or shaft (If applicable).
XIV) To coordinate the requirements for all builders' work. No holes or fixings shall be
cut or formed without the prior approval of SAUDI ARAMCO/Project
Management Consultant. No claim will be entertained for any abortive work
executed due to lack of coordination. Any changes made in the field verbally will be
followed by written agreement between Client's representative and that of PC
Contractor's representative duly signed by agreeing parties.
XV) To submit complete set of as-built drawings for each type of villa (three hard copies
+ two soft copies) and refer to Item 6 3 1 of this document.
XVI) Upon completion of all fields testing, The PC Contractor to submit to SAUDI
ARAMCO/Project Management Consultant not limited to three (3) copies of
Operation and Maintenance Manuals in accordance to a pre-approved manual
structure and refer to Item 6.3.1 of this document.
XVII) To furnish all necessary labor, materials. tools and equipment to complete the
work.
XVIII) To provide sufficient technical manpower and workforce to deliver the project as
per schedule.
XIX) In case the PC Contractor doesn't meet the project schedule of delivery, SAUDI
ARAMCO has the right to oblige the PC Contractor to provide additional
technical manpower and workforce to meet the schedule without any cost to
SAUDI ARAMCO.
XX) To provide a house keeping pad for all floor mounted equipment. Pad shall be 100
mm minimum in height from finished floor/roof level.
3. 2 MOBILIZATION, TEMPORARY WORKS & PERMANENT WORKS: (DIVISIONI -

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS):
3.2. 1 The PC Contractor shall be deemed to have allowed for any necessary mobilization and
relocation of such temporary works dunng the construction period as may be required In order
to complete the permanent works. Any proposed change in location or relocation of any
temporary works must be preceded by the submission of drawing(s), indicating such change to
SAUDI ARAMCO/Project Management Consultant for his approval.
3.2. 2 All temporary works shall be constructed with the standard for similar permanent facilities
and shall comply with the applicable rules, regulations and requirements of local authorities
having jurisdiction.
3.2. 3 Temporary facility shall be designed and constructed as per SAUDI ARAMCO's Space
requirement. See attached Scope of Work for Temporary Facility in Attachment I.
3.2. 4 The mobilization should commence in line with the General Conditions of Contract
(GCC) after the Notice to Proceed (NTP), letter of acceptance or date of signing the contract
and upon its issuance.
3.2. 5 Within seven (7) calendar days of the date of commencement of the mobilization period,
PC Contractor shall submit for approval fully dimensioned plans and details showing the
proposed location and layout on the site of all necessary temporary buildings Including SAUDI
ARAMCO/Project Management Consultant office accommodations (located apart from PC
Contractor's offices), materials stores, messing facilities etc., as such. Plans and execution shall
also Include (but not limited to) the following without any cost to SAUDI ARAMCO:
a) PC Contractor shall provide temporary access routes to, from, and upon the site
Access should be well paved and passable at all times with proper markings and signs
for safety and convenience In identification especially by suppliers/vendors and other
entities that have business the project.
b) PC Contractor shall provide temporary fencing. gates, and other security
requirements. The materials for the temporary fencing shall be approved by Royal
Commission.
c) PC Contractor shall provide covered or open areas designated for materials storage
with proper markings and signage whether for Informative or warning.
d) PC Contractor shall provide area for Equipment and for construction light & heavy
vehicles parking (like: bobcat, dump trucks, bulldozer, backhoes and etc).
e) PC Contractor shall provide vehicle parking for PC Contractors' personnel, covered
parking area for SAUDI ARAMCO/Project Management Consultant staff.
f) PC Contractor shall provide refuse storage and collection points during the execution
of temporary and permanent works Distribution of trash bins shall be as per Royal
Commission requirement.
g) PC Contractor shall provide project sign boards, safety signs, and accesses signs.
Signage shall be placed at strategic locations only, designated and approved by SAUDI
ARAMCO.
h) PC Contractor shall provide security services. The Contractor Security group shall be
duly responsible of safe keeping and preventing any trespassing within the entire
project and should have a close coordination SAUDI ARAMCO.
i) All the above mentioned services shall be provided and undertaken by PC Contractor
3. 3 TEMPORARY WATER, ELECTRICITY, FIREFIGHTING AND SEWAGE
The Contractor shall:
3.3. 1 Provide fresh water supply, showing location of potable drinking water storage tanks,
tanker fill points.
3.3. 2 Provide temporary water Iines of distribution within the project for the temporary facility
during the project execution.
3.3. 3 Provide temporary water supply for execution of permanent works until the temporary or
permanent water supply from Marafiq is acquired.
3.3. 4 Provide temporary power generation, temporary switch boards etc. for all temporary
facilities as required until the temporary or permanent power supply form SEC is acquired.
3.3. 5 Provide temporary power generation, temporary switch boards etc. for all execution of
permanent works as required until the temporary or permanent power supply form SEC is
acquired.
3.3. 6 Provide temporary fire protection facilities, showing location of the firefighting water
storage tanks, tanker fill points, pumping and fire hose stations plus fire extinguisher as per Royal
Commission requirement, within the project for the execution of permanent works.
3.3. 7 Pay all the bills of temporary electricity and water bills during the execution of works.
3.3. 8 Provide sewage disposal and surface water drainage for the temporary facility during the
project execution.
3.3. 9 Provide Telephone services & full IT Equipment in the temporary facility. (Not limited to
Computers, printers, scanners & Projector in the meeting room).
3.3. 10 Provide the garbage collection and disposal services, this shall include collecting and
dumping of the bins from the site to RC land fill area as required.
3.3. 11 All the above mentioned services shall be provided and undertaken by the Contractor
3.3. 12 PC contractor shall provide smoking area for workers.
3. 4 ENGINEERING (DIV.1-GENERAL REQUIREMENTS)
The Contractor shall be deemed to have scrutinized, and satisfied Itself as to the completeness, accuracy
and sufficiency of the engineering deliverables for the purposes of carrying out and completing the work
requirements and passing the tests at completion. Any data or information received by the Contractor
from SAUDI ARAMCO/Project Management Consultant or otherwise, shall not relieve the Contractor
from its responsibility for the execution of the works.
3.4. 1 Civil and Site Preparation Work (Div. 1 - General Requirements and Div. 2 -
Site Works):
3.4.4.4.1 The Contractor shall supply and construct all necessary works such as but not
limited to:
a) All surveying and setting out including provision and protection of local
reference survey stations. Survey monuments and survey control monuments
and/or benchmarks for setting out of the works are to be established on the
work site and described in the drawings, The Contractor shall carefully preserve
all monuments. benchmarks and reference points, The Contractor will be
charged with the expense of replacement of any such items destroyed and shall
be responsible for any mistake or loss of time that may be caused. Permanent
monuments or benchmarks which must be removed or disturbed shall be
protected until they can be properly referenced for relocation. The Contractor
shall furnish materials and assistance for the proper replacement of such
monuments or benchmarks. Any approved changed that have been made to all
the referential markings should be reflected in the drawings and revised
drawings should be immediately and properly disseminated/coordinated to the
builders in the field to avoid costly mistake.
3.4.4.4.2 The PC Contractor shall protect all existing infrastructure at all times and shall
be responsible for any or all damage to other contractors work already on site or any
adjoining properly.
a) Soil replacement- The PC Contractor's attention is directed to the soil
replacement required as indicated on the design drawings and associated
structural notes. Existing soil may have to be replaced with appropriate fill
material in accordance with the Contract Specification.
b) Testing of all materials as specified.
c) Clearing and grubbing for not less than 200 mm from the natural existing level.
d) Removal of stripped vegetation, debris, surplus and unsuitable material from site
to a nominated off-site dip or disposal facility.
e) Site preparation including excavation in any kind of materials by whatever
means necessary, filling and compaction, rough grading and drainage.
f) Supply of selected material or fill.
g) Finished grading.
h) Interlock paving tiles including all consumables to complete the work.
i) Alterations to footpaths and sidewalks including modifications to ramp
entrances.
j) Temporary work, including removal and reinstatement at completion.
k) Onsite underground services and utilities, including potable water, sanitary
sewer lines, telecom and power complete with testing. Whilst the bid documents
show a typical site utilities coordination layout for each house type, The PC
Contractor is responsible to make the necessary allowances for each specific
house and submit the associated shop drawings.
l) Utility tie-ins to existing off-site services. The PC Contractor shall liaise with the
statutory authorities to agree on the location/details of tie-ins.
m) Trenching for electrical and telecommunication cables.
n) Chambers to underground services, including manholes, draw pits and valve
boxes, ducl banks, catch basin and the Like.
o) Underground storage tanks and their accessories.
p)
3.4 2 Architectural Work:
The PC Contractor shall supply and construct all necessary works such as but
not limited to:
a) Preparation of shop drawings for buildings based on architectural system and details
shown on drawings, The PC Contractor shall submit shop drawings when required
for SAUDI ARAMCO/Project Management Consultant review and approval.
b) Masonry, including ancillaries for service conduits for boundary walls, (Diy 4 -
Masonry).
c) Architectural concrete, including lintels, coping stones and sills. (Dlv.3- Concrete).
d) Floor screeds. (Div.9- Finishes).
e) Roofing, including drainage, insulation, screed, membrane, protection and flood test
of flat roofs (Dlv.7- Thermal and Moisture Protection).
f) Rainwater system, Including scupper drains, (Diy.15 Mechanical).
g) Doors and ironmongery. (Diy.8- Doors and Windows).
h) Windows, glazing and privacy screens, (Diy.8 Doors and Windows).
i) Plastering and painting. (Div. 9- Finishes).
j) Floor and wall finishes, including ceramic tiles and skirtings' Spare tiles shall be
provided. (Div 9- Finishes).
k) Suspended ceilings. (Div.9- Finishes).
l) Sanitary system, including fittings, plumbing, cleaning and testing. (Div. 15-
Mechanical).
m) Fixtures and fittings, including toilet facilities, handrails and louvers (Div.5 - Metals,
Div 6 - Wood & Plastics, Div. 10 – Specialties and Div. 11- Equipment).
n) Residential equipment, range hoods (Div.11-Equipment).
o) Kitchen Cabinet, nooks and counter tops shall be KAFCO Brand.
p) All toilet doors shall have 25 mm undercut doors.
q) Any other works shown on the drawings or described in the specifications or
necessary to complete the work.
3.4 3 Structural Work (Div. 3 - Concrete: Reinforced and Pre-cast Concrete):
a) All concreting works such as slabs, columns, beams, footings and stairs among others
shall be cast-in-situ using ready-mix concrete.
b) The PC Contractor to prepare submittal forms and submit all necessary materials,
technical submittals including but not limited to proposed suppliers, subcontractors,
method statements, mix design data, among others; for approval of SAUDI
ARAMCO/Project Management Consultant prior to installation and fabrication. Any
materials installed on the buildings without any approval will be removed when it
does not conform to the drawings, plans and specification and other contractual
documents.
c) The PC Contractor shall prepare shop drawings for buildings based on structural
system and details shown on drawings. The PC Contractor shall submit additional
shop drawings when required for SAUDI ARAMCO/Project Management Consultant
review and approval. The PC Contractor also to submit bar bending schedule prior to
start any work.
d) The PC Contractor shall supply and execute all structural members shown on the
drawings including but not limited to foundations, beams, walls, columns and
grade/suspended slabs. This will include the reinforcement and shuttering and any
other works related to structure shown on the drawings or stated in the specifications
e) The PC Contractor will execute all the Civil and Structural related works Including
all foundations, steel frames or pedestals for the mechanical and electrical works
whenever and wherever it is necessary under the Contract as shown in the Drawings
or specifications required as common practice.
f) The PC Contractor shall ensure compliance with Structural Design Drawings
Including all the associated (Structural Design) Notes included in Structural Design
package.
g) Metal works for Monkey ladder shall be but not limited to G.I pipe 25 mm diameter
and painted with same color with the external paint PC contractor to consider
standard.
3.4 4 Mechanical Work (HVAC, Plumbing and Fire Protection System):
3.4.5. 1 HVAC Primary Scope Of Works (Div. 15- Mechanical):
3.4.4.2.1 Supply, install, test and commission the following as shown on drawings and in
accordance with technical specifications.
a. Mini split and concealed type air conditioning equipment and accessories.
b. Refrigerant pipework including pipe fittings, supports and thermal
insulation.
c. Ceiling mounted exhaust fans for toilet & bath rooms.
d. Inline exhaust fan for kitchen.
e. Kitchen hood extract air duct work.
3.4.4.2.2 The PC Contractor shall supply and construct all necessary works such as but
not limited to tile following unless otherwise directed by the SAUDI ARAMCO/Project
Management Consultant:
a. Heating ventilating and air conditioning system shall be installed in accordance
with latest guidelines, specifications and standards and as per manufacturer’s
manual and other approved submittal data.
b. All heating ventilating and air conditioning drawings shall be read in
conjunction with general notes, specifications, miscellaneous details; including
architectural, electrical, structural, piping and instrumentation drawings.
c. All duct work and accessories shall be designed and fabricated in accordance
with the latest edition of sheet metal and air conditioning contractor national
association (SMACNA) duct construction standards.
d. Access to all HVAC equipment and accessories shall be provided.
e. All duct sizes indicated are inside dimension.
f. All rotating and sliding components of equipment shall be guarded in
accordance With OSHA requirements.
g. The PC Contractor shall be responsible for preparing shop drawings, technical
calculation data sheet, verification of heat load calculations, static pressure
calculations and verification of equipment proposed prior to ordering the
equipment.
h. Ductwork seams and joints shall be sealed with specified sealant (if applicable).
i. All ceiling access panel shall not be less than 500 x 500 mm.
j. All dimensions must be verified, any discrepancies shown in the drawing must
be immediately reported to the engineer in charge.
k. Mini split unit condensate drain pipes shall be connected to the nearest floor
drain with proper slope according to the standards.
l. The nominated subcontractor is to identify and coordinate all openings thru roof
with architectural, structural and electrical drawings before the roof
construction.
m. All pressure drops indicated In the schedules are for reference only. The PC
Contractor is to check and calculate the pressure drops against equipment.
Fittings, accessories and unit installed as per the shop drawing submitted for
approval.
n. All duct wall penetrations shall have no less than 20 gauge sheet metal angles
flashing at both sides of the wall and the space between the duct and wall shall
be filled With 48 kg/m3 density fiber glass insulation.
o. All duct roof penetration cavities shall be filled With 48 kg/m3 density fiber
glass insulation and have no less than 20 gauge sheet metal angles flashing
secured to the roof slab.
p. The PC Contractor shall submit the sectional view drawings of areas where
anticipated congestion might occur to resolve clashes.
q. Provide supports and hangers required for proper Installation of equipment.
r. Refrigerant piping shall be installed as shown in the equipment detailed
drawings.
s. Refrigerant piping Insulation shall be provided as shown in the equipment
detailed drawings.
3.4.5. 2 HVAC TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING (Div. 15-
Mechanical):
3.4.4.2.1 The minimum requirements for testing, adjusting and balancing (TAB) of
heating, ventilating and air conditioning (HVAC) distribution system shall be as follows:
a. The PC Contractor shall carry out the testing, adjusting and balancing
of the HVAC system as per SMACNA or NEBB procedural standards.
b. All necessary test equipment, instruments, materials, and labor required
for performing the entire test described in these specifications shall be
provided as a part of the work of this section.
c. The PC Contractor shall review and be thoroughly familiar with the
basic equipment layout prior to ceiling and wall installation Prior to
any closing-in of ductwork, verify that all fittings. Dampers, control
devices, test devices and valves are properly located and installed.
d. Examine each air distribution system to see that it is free from
obstruction and that the moving equipment is lubricated and
functioning properly and that the required filters are clean and
installed.
e. The PC Contractor shall submit the testing, adjusting and balancing
test procedures to the SAUDI ARAMCO/Project Management
Consultant for approval prior to starting the TAB work.
f. The PC Contractor shall use test instruments that have been calibrated
Within a time period recommended by the manufacturer or in the
SMACNA HVAC systems testing, adjusting and balancing manual and
that they have been checked for accuracy prior to the start of the
testing, adjusting and balancing activity.
g. Verify that all the equipment performs as specified.
h. Adjust kitchen exhaust inline fan to handle and properly distribute the
design air flow within + 10% of specified air flow.
i. Test all condensate drainage piping from air treatment and handling
equipment by plugging outlets and filing to high point of each drain,
Repair or replace all defective materials, and retest until proved tight.
j. The PC Contractor shall document the results of all testing on
SMACNA or NEBB TAB reports forms and submit specified copies for
approval and record.
3.4.5. 3 WARRANTY:
3.4.4.3.1 For product and workmanship related warranties, refer to
Schedule A - General Conditions of Contract:
3.4.5. 4 PLUMBING PRIMARY SCOPE OF WORKS (Div. 15 - Mechanical):
3.4.4.4.1 Supply. install, test and commission the following as shown on the
drawings and in accordance with technical specifications:
a. Central hot water generator and accessories.
b. Unitary water heater for Driver's room.
c. Install sanitary fixtures and brass fixtures for sanitary appliances
including drainage and water supply connections.
d. External cold water pipe work including pipe fittings and supports.
e. Internal cold water pipe work including pipe fittings and supports.
f. Internal hot water pipe work Including pipe fittings. Support and
thermal insulation.
g. Internal drainage pipe work including fittings, supports and
accessories.
h. External drainage pipe work Including fittings, supports and
accessories.
i. Floor drain, floor/wall cleanouts, p-traps, grease trap, ground clean
outs, building clean-outs, vent bowels etc.
3.4.5. 5 Piping - General Notes:
3.4.4.5.1 The plumbing drawings shall be read in conjunction with other related
drawings, general diagrams and miscellaneous details, notes. Specifications
and bill of quantities.
3.4.4.5.2 The PC Contractor shall execute all of the work In accordance with
approved shop and installation drawings as per the provisions of the
specifications and International plumbing code.
3.4.4.5.3 No portion of any plumbing system shall be concealed until inspected
tested and approved.
3.4.4.5.4 Install all piping to allow thermal expansion and contraction without
injury to piping, equipment or structure.
3.4.4.5.5 Conceal all pipe installations in pipe chases, utility spaces below grade
of floors, etc., unless otherwise indicated.
3.4.4.5.6 Install all piping free of sags or bends and with ample space between
piping for proper maintenance.
3.4.4.5.7 Install piping at right angles or parallel to building walls, Diagonal or
bent piping will not be permitted.
3.4.4.5.8 Protect all piping from entrance of dirt or other foreign materials during
the construction period. At the completion of the project, all dirt and foreign
matter in the piping shall be removed completely.
3.4.4.5.9 Piping passing through exterior building walls shall be caulked.
3.4.4.5.10 Provide drain lines from all relief valves and condensate pans
and run drain line full size to the nearest floor or equipment drain.
3.4.4.5.11 Verify existing grades, inverts and topographic conditions
prior to any trenching, excavation, or installations. In the event of existing
conditions prevent installation in accordance with contract documents,
immediately notify the SAUDI ARAMCO/Project Management Consultant.
3.4.4.5.12 Horizontal piping shall slope uniformly without sags or humps
to provide for complete drainage of systems and elimination of air.
3.4.4.5.13 Piping shall be cut accurately to measurements established at
the site, worked into place without springing or forcing, and shall clear all
Windows, doors and other openings. Cutting or other weakening of building
structure to facilitate piping installation is not permitted; install to permit
free expansion and contraction without damage. No pipe should be subjected
to torsion or elongation effect.
3.4.4.5.14 Provide necessary temporary connections, valves, oversize
flushing connections, etc. as required to properly clean and test systems.
3.4.4.5.15 Coordinate piping installations with structure, lighting,
electrical conduit and all other materials and equipment.
3.4.4.5.16 Any leaking joint shall be completely disassembled and
replaced with new materials.
3.4.4.5.17 All sockets and pipe ends of PVC shall be cleaned and solvent
cement applied for full circumferential cover.
3.4.4.5.18 Copper joints shall be made using 95-5 Tin-Antimony solders
ASTM B32.
3.4.4.5.19 Locate all equipment that must be serviced, operated, or
maintained, in fully accessible positions, Deviations from the drawings may
be discussed with the SAUDI ARAMCO/Project Management Consultant
and proceed after approval.
3.4.4.5.20 PC Contractor shall be responsible for all culling, filling, or
patching of his work which may be required to make its several parts come
together properly and fit It to receive, or be received, by work of other
trades. Cutting of structural members shall not be done without approval of
SAUDI ARAMCO/Project Management Consultant.
3.4.4.5.21 Place sleeves through all the walls, floors and ceilings during
the initial construction where it is necessary for piping to go through. When
this IS not done, do all cutting and patching required for the Installation of
the work. Any damage caused to the building by this cutting and patching,
shall be corrected at no additional cost No piping will be allowed to pass
though structural concrete (beams, girders, columns, suspended slabs) unless
otherwise approved and permitted by the SAUDI ARAMCO/ Project
Management Consultant in writing.
3.4.4.5.22 Patching of all openings for new Installations (provision for
future expansion) and all openings resulting from the removal or relocation
of any installations shall be done by craftsmen skilled In the particular trade
affected, with same materials as of adjoining openings.
3.4.4.5.23 Supports, hangers, anchors or guides shall be provided for all
horizontal and vertical piping.
3.4.4.5.24 Plumbing works herein shall be done in accordance with the
provision of RC standards and International Plumbing Codes.
3.4.4.5.25 Before performing any work, The PC Contractor shall
thoroughly examine all existing conditions, point of connections, sizes,
depths, locations, etc.
3.4.4.5.26 Drawings are diagrammatic and do not show all the offsets,
bends, etc. which may be required for proper installations of work, Such
work shall be provided with additional bends and offsets as necessary and
verified at the site.
3.4.4.5.27 Locate floor drain and floor cleanout to suit floor tiles.
3.4.4.5.28 Provide PVC pipe sleeve with caulking for all pipes passing
thru concrete structures.
3.4.4.5.29 The plumbing system shall be designed in accordance with the
local Saudi codes and specifications and in the absence of a Saudi Code, in
accordance with the International Plumbing Codes (IPC - 2009).
3.4.4.5.30 Any conflict or deviation from the above mentioned standards
require a waiver from SAUDI ARAMCO/Project Management Consultant.
3.4.4.5.31 The PC Contractor shall submit shop drawings for the
plumbing systems and plumbing fixtures in compliance with SAUDI
ARAMCO/Project Management Consultant requirement.
3.4.4.5.32 Provision to access all serviceable plumbing equipment and
accessories shall be made, Chipping/demolition of concrete on walls and
floors to bury or to conceal piping/electrical system aside from those
indicated in the drawings will need the written approval from SAUDI
ARAMCO/Project Management Consultant.
3.4.4.5.33 Each piece of equipment and all of the systems shall be
adjusted to ensure proper functioning of all controls, elimination of all noise
and vibration and left in excellent operating condition.
3.4.5. 6 SOIL WASTE AND VENT PIPING SYSTEM:
3.4.4.6.1 Horizontal lines shall be supported by well secured heavy-strap hangers.
Vertical lines shall be secured strongly by hooks to the building frame and a
suitable bracket or chair shall be provided at places where they start.
3.4.4.6.2 All main vertical soil and waste stacks shall be extended full size to and
above the roof line to act as vents, except where otherwise specifically
indicated.
3.4.4.6.3 Vent pipes in roof spaces shall run as close as possible to underside of
roof, with horizontal piping pitched down 10 slacks without forming traps,
Vertical pipes may be connected into one main vent riser above the highest
vented fixtures:
a. Where an end of circuit vent pipe for any fixtures or line of fixture
is connected to vent line serving other fixtures, the connections
shall be at least 1200 mm above the floor on which the fixtures are
located to prevent the use of any vent line as waste.
b. Horizontal waste lines receiving the discharge from two or more
fixtures shall be provided with vents before the last fixture unless
separate venting of fixtures is noted.
3.4.4.6.4 Rough-In for pipes and fixtures shall be carried along With the building
construction. Correctly located openings of proper sizes shall be provided
where required in the walls and floors for the passage of pipes.
3.4.4.6.5 All changes in pipe sizes on soil waste and drain lines shall be made
with reducing fittings or reducers.
a. All changes in direction shall be made by the appropriate use of
forty five degrees wyes, or long sweep bends, except that sanitary
tees may be used on vertical stacks and short quarter bends or
elbows may be used in Soil and waste lines where the change in
direction of floor is from the horizontal to the vertical and on the
dischargeline from the water closet.
3.4.4.6.6 Ail vent pipes passing through the roof shall be flashed as indicated on
the drawing.
3.4.4.6.7 Soil and waste below grade shall be 2% minimum towards flow for 4"
diameter and below and 1% for pipes above 4" diameter unless otherwise
specified. Install immediately after excavation. Lay pipe so that entire length
bears on firm Soil Excavate for hub. Do not backfill until installation has
been observed and approved by SAUDI ARAMCO/Project Management
Consultant. Verify elevations of the sewer line at different point before
installation. Backfilling materials should be suitable selected fill materials free
from harmful objects like woods, timbers or any materials which might be
breeding grounds for termites or harmful insects.
a. Soil and waste above grade shall be as below grade piping, Hang
each entirely to its slope, Support vertical stacks at each floor, both
horizontally and vertically.
b. Vents slope up to high point, connect multiple vents to single vent
before penetrating roof. Hang each length of vent pipe from
structure to grade.
3.4.4.6.8 All vertical piping shall be supported at each floor level with clamps and
spring hangers. The maximum spacing for horizontal pipes of 100 mm
diameter or larger shall not exceed 2,0 meters, For pipes less than 100 mm
diameter the spacing of hangers shall be at a maximum of 1,50 meters on
centers.
3.4.4.6.9 Cast Iron sleeves shall be provided for pipes passing through walls,
partitions or floors and fitted into place at time of construction, Each sleeve
shall extend through its respective wall, floor, and shall be cut flush with
each surface except where clamping flanges are used. All adjoining parts of
the structures should be left In good conditions and finished to the
satisfaction of SAUDI ARAMCO/Project Management Consultant.
3.4.4.6.10 All stacks shall be provided with accessible cleanouts
positioned above the flood level of the highest fixture.
3.4.4.6.11 Drainage, vent and storm systems within the interior of all
villas shall be tested by the PC Contractor and approved by the SAUDI
ARAMCQ/Project Management SAUDI ARAMCO/Project Management
Consultant in accordance with the provisions of the International Plumbing
Codes.
3.4.4.6.12 Combine vent stacks with soil and waste stack before passing
through roof.
3.4.4.6.13 Vent through roof shall be extended through its flashing and
shall terminate vertically not less than 150 mm above the roof nor less than
300 mm from any vertical surface and terminate with vent cap.
3.4.4.6.14 Concrete encase the underground sanitary sewer and waste
pipe, if required by the common practice and to the discretion of the SAUDI
3.4.5. 7 POTABLE WATER PIPING SYSTEM:
3.4.4.7.1 All supplies, hardware, trim traps, etc. to fixtures and equipment shall
be chrome plated if exposed to view.
3.4.4.7.2 No underground or under slab water piping within building shall be
permitted unless specifically approved by SAUDIARAMCO/Project
Management Consultant.
3.4.4.7.3 Water pipes shall not be run or laid In the same trench with building
sewer or drainage piping, The bottom of water pipe at all points shall be at
least 300 mm above the top of sewer line when crossing occur.
3.4.4.7.4 Devices installed in the potable water supply system for protection
against backflow or back siphon age shall be maintained in accessible
position and installed In the direction as specified by the manufacturer.
3.4.4.7.5 Domestic water systems shall be flushed free of ail foreign material prior
to usage. Sterilization shall be performed in accordance with the AWWA
recommendation.
3.4.4.7.6 All domestic hot and cold water piping shall run generally in the space
above false ceiling and in the pipe chases.
3.4.4.7.7 All internal hot and cold water pipes Inside the wails for final
termination to the fixtures shall be copper pipe type L in accordance with
ASTM B88. cold water pipes below ground to be wrapped by DENSO type
and hot water pipe above ground shall be wrapped by insulation.
3.4.4.7.8 The size of all PVC and copper pipes shown are nominal outside
diameter.
3.4.4.7.9 Isolating valve shall be provided to each main branch and chrome plated
brass angle valves shall be provided to each fixture.
3.4.5. 8 Testing and Balancing Procedure:
3.4.4.8.1 The PC Contractor shall completely test all water system as part of
work. The term “water system” shall be understood and intended to mean all
cold and hot water connections and associated equipment connected to the
system Including the building Irrigation system.
3.4.4.8.2 The testing work shall be supervised by certified personnel experienced
in testing procedure.
3.4.4.8.3 Irrigation system shall be provided during the construction; connecting
from the Villa to the Future Expansions or any open area that may be
connected into a usable space.
3.4.4.8.4 All water system piping shall be tested for maximum working pressure
equivalent to 344.5 Kpa (50 PSI) air pressure or 150% of the area working
pressure, valves shall be tested for maximum working pressure equivalent to
230 Kpa air pressure as specified by International Plumbing Code and
Regulation of Saudi Building Code.
3.4.5. 9 TESTING PLUMBING AND WATER SYSTEM:
3.4.4.9.1 Test, Flushing and Stenlization:
a. The plumbing system shall be tested in accordance with the
National Standard Plumbing Code Procedures.
The test requirements shall be as follows:
i. Sewage systems - 3 meter head from the last highest
fixture/fitting for 24 hours duration.
ii. Hot and cold Water supply - 10 bars pressure for 24 hours
duration.
3.4.4.9.2 Defective Work.
a. If inspection or test shows defects, such defective work or material
shall be replaced or repaired as necessary and inspection and test
shall be repeated Repairs to piping shall be made With new
materials, No caulking of screwed joints or holes will be accepted.
3.4.4.9.3 Operational Test.
a. Upon completion of and prior to acceptance of the installation, the
PC Contractor shall subject the plumbing system to operating tests
to demonstrate satisfactory functional and operational efficiency.
Such operating test shall cover a period of not less than 24 hours
for each system and shall include the following Information in a
report with conclusion as to the adequacy of the system.
i. Time, date and duration of test.
ii. Water pressures at the most remote and the highest
fixtures.
iii. Operation of each fixture and fixture trim.
iv. Operational of each valve and faucet.
v. Temperature of each domestic hot- water supply.
vi. Operation of each floor drain by flooding with water.
vii. Operation of each vacuum breaker and backflow
preventer.
3.4.4.9.4 Sterilization of Hot & Cold Water System:
a. After pressure test have been made, the entire domestic
hot and cold water distribution system to be sterilized shall
be thoroughly flushed with water of sufficient velocity
until all entrained dirt and other foreign material have
been removed, before Introducing chlorinating material.
The chlorinating material shall be either liquid chlorine
conforming to A\NWA 8301 or hypochlorite conforming
to A\NWA 8300. Water chlorination procedure shall be in
accordance with A\NWA M20.
3.4.4.9.5 Hot & Cold Water System Flushing:
a. After tests are completed, potable water piping shall be
flushed. In general, sufficient water shall be used to
produce a minimum water velocity of 0.76 MPS through
piping being flushed. Flushing shall be continued until
discharge water shows no discoloration. System shall be
drained at low points. Strainer screens shall be removed,
cleaned and replaced in line. After flushing and cleaning,
systems shall be prepared for service by immediately filling
water piping with clean, fresh potable water. Any
stoppage, discoloration, or other damage to finish,
furnishings, or parts of the building, due to the PC
Contractor's failure to properly clean tI1e piping system,
shall be repaired by the PC Contractor. When the work is
complete, the hot-water system shall be adjusted for
uniform circulation, Flush valves and automatic control
devices shall be adjusted for proper operation.
3.4.5. 10 WARRANTY:
For product and workmanship related warranties, refer to Schedule A.
 General Conditions of Contract.
3.4.5. 11 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM PRIMARY SCOPE OF WORKS:
3.4.4.12.1 Supply, install, test and commission the following as
shown on drawings and in accordance with technical
specifications.
a. Portable fire extinguishers and specified accessories.
b. Fire blanket.
3.4.4.12.2 The PC Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials,

tools, equipment, transportation and services necessary to
install and test a complete functional fire protection system.
a. Portable Fire Extinguisher:
i. All firefighting equipment’s shall be ULI
FM approved.
3.4.4.12.3 The fire protection system shall comply with NFPA

code and must be approved by the local authority having
jurisdiction. The PC Contractor shall be responsible for
getting the required approval of the entire fire protection
system from local civil defense authority.
3.4.5. 12 Inspection and Testing:
3.4.4.12.1 A thorough visual Inspection of the installed system
shall be performed as per NFPA requirements for proper size,
supports, location and tie-Ins.
i. Fire extinguishing systems shall comply
with NFPA standards No, 10.
a. Installation of Fire Extinguishers:
i. Comply with manufacturer's written
instructions for installing fire extinguishers
and mounting brackets.
ii. Coordinate exact location of all fire
extinguishers with electrical panel location,
Sizes, architectural equipment’s and light
switches. Submit shop drawings for SAUDI
ARAMCO/Project Management Consultant
approval.
iii. Mounting Height.
b. Install extinguishers at a height indicated below:
i. Install fire extinguishers mounted on hangers or
brackets attached to a wall so that the lop of the
extinguisher is not more than 1.067 m above the
floor.
ii. In no case shall the clearance between the bottom
of the fire extinguisher and the floor be less than
100 mm.
c. Locations:
Install extinguishers at locations stated below:
i. Install fire extinguishers at locations specified on the
drawings or as directed by the authority having
jurisdiction.
ii. Fire extinguishers shall be conspicuously located,
along normal paths of travel, including exits from
areas.
Extinguishers shall not be obstructed or obscured
from view.
iii. Install portable fire extinguishers on the hanger or in
the bracket supplied or placed in the fire extinguisher
cabinets. Provided. Verify that the extinguisher
operating instructions face outward.
d. Smoke Detector/Heal Detector:
i. The smoke detector shall be ceiling mounted, optical
type or ionization type, UL Listed, 220V, 60Hz and
9V battery back-up, self-alarm.
ii. The heat detector shall be ceiling mounted, UL Listed,
220V, 60Hz and 9V battery back-up, self-alarm.
3.4.5. 13 Installation and Testing:
3.4.4.13.1 Materials, products and equipment furnished by the
PC Contractor shall be Installed and all work shall be
performed in a first class workman-like manner, in conformity
with the best trade, practices, to produce satisfactory results, in
a safe, neat, orderly appearance and to facilitate operating,
servicing. Maintaining and repairing.
3.4.4.13.2 Smoke &Heat detectors shall conform to applicable
standards. NFPA 70 & NFPA 72.
3.4.5 Electrical Work (Div. 16 - Electrical):
3.4.6. 1 The PC Contractor shall supply and construct all necessary works such
as but not limited to:
3.4.6.1.1 Complete supply, installation, testing and
commissioning of all electrical items as per the tender documents.
3.4.6.1.2 All provisions but not limited with the above Item
34.5 shall have complete piping works and wiring works for
lighting points and wiring devices, to be prepared for fixture
installations.
3.4.6.1.3 All electrical equipment and materials shall be In
accordance with the NEC & SASO standards and specifications.
3.4.6.1.4 The Contractor shall provide all equipment and labor
as deemed necessary for the proper execution of the work.
3.4.6.1.5 All work shall be performed In professional manner,
in conformance with the applicable Saudi codes and standards and
the best electrical engineering practice.
3.4.6.1.6 Work shall be performed by skilled workers
appropriately equipped to produce satisfactory results in a safe and
proper manner so as to avoid undue stresses.
3.4.6.1.7 It shall be the PC Contractor's sole responsibility to:
a. Obtain Saudi Electric Company -Eastern Operating Area (SEC-
EOA) necessary approvals.
b. Follow strictly SEC-EOA standard and regulations.
c. Closely coordinate with SEC-EOA with regards to the utility
interface.
d. Coordinate with SEC-EOA.
3.4.6.1.8 The PC Contractor shall be fully responsible for any
mechanical damage upon installation of various items and their
related accessories.
3.4.6.1.9 Submit for approval before any material delivery to
site complete technical material submittal including manufacture
name, country of origin, local agent/supplier details, compliance
statement, schematic/single line diagram, original catalogue/data
sheets and sample(s).
3.4.6.1.10 Submit the test certificates of the materials/electrical
equipment for SAUDI ARAMCO/Project Management Consultant
review upon receiving the material/equipment on site along with
an inspection.
3.4.6.1.11 Store all the critical electrical equipment in dust free
controlled temperature/atmosphere and preserve the materials
according to manufacturer instruction.
3.4.6.1.12 Submit before commencing site installation works,
complete shop drawing set for each type of villa for
SAUDIARAMCO/Project Management Consultant review and
approval.
3.4.6.1.13 Workmanship of electrical installations shall ensure
aesthetical view.
3.4.6.1.14 Submit installation inspection ARAMCO/Project
Management approval.
3.4.6.1.15 Submit testing and commissioning method statements
for all electrical systems. Components of every system for
SAUDIARAMCO/Project Management Consultant review and
approval.
3.4.6.1.16 The PC Contractor shall carry out all site tests, for
each components of every system in accordance with the approved
testing and commissioning method statements/ Procedures.
Testing and commissioning activities shall commence after clearance of
all snags raised on the Installations inspection.
3.4.6.1.17 All tests shall be subject to witness by
SAUDIARAMCO/Project Management Consultant At-least four
(4) weeks prior to scheduled tests, the PC contractor shall submit
to the SAUDI ARAMCO/Project Management Consultant outline
testing and commissioning plan, The PC Contractor shall submit
request/invitation for test witnessing at least two (2) working days
before the tests planned date.
3.4.6.1.18 The PC Contractor shall provide all test instruments,
equipment and accessories necessary for demonstration and pulling
the equipment into operation before commissioning.
All testing equipment shall be calibrated by approved authorities
and calibration certificates shall be submitted to SAUDI
ARAMCO/Project Management Consultant for their review and
approval.
3.4.6.1.19 All installation shall be in accordance with National
Electncal Code (NEG).
3.4.6 TELECOMMUNICATION WORK
3.4.6. 1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
3.4.6.1.1 This Section specifies the minimum technical
requirements for supplying, installing. storing, handling, testing
and commissioning of equipment (wherever applicable), wires,
cables, and connecting devices used in DATNVOICE/lPTV
system, SMATV system and intercom systems within the villas.
3.4.6.1.2 Where works Interface with Saudi Telecommunication
Company (STC), the equipment/materials and installation shall
comply with STC standards latest revision.
3.4.6. 2 SECTION INCLUDES:
3.4.6.2.1 Supply and installation of all necessary hardware for
cable runs such as conduits, pull boxes, channels, ducts, support
units and conduits for the future extension.
3.4.6. 3 REFERENCES:
3.4.6.3.1 The referred codes and standards are intended to
provide an acceptable level of quality for materials and products.
3.4.6.3.2 The latest revision of tile referred codes and standards
shall be used wherever applicable.
3.4.6.3.3 Reference standards:
a. Saudi Telecom Standards.
b. National Electrical Code (NEC) standards.
c. Telecommunication Industry Association/ Electronic
Industries Association (TIAIEIA) standards.
3.4.6. 4 SUBMITTALS:
3.4.6.4.1 The PC Contractor shall submit to SAUDI
ARAMCO/Project Management Consultant the following items
for review and approval before commencing work:
a. Detailed dimensioned shop drawings.
b. Manufacturer's data sheets indicating the necessary
installations dimensions, weights and materials.
c. Operation and maintenance manuals.
d. Certificate of compliance stating that the materials used
conform to all requirements of specification.
e. Copies of catalogs of all equipment to be furnished if
applicable.
3.4.6.4.2 After installation and commissioning, the PC Contractor shall submit the
following:
a. As-built drawing of complete system.
b. All the test results and commissioning reports to show that all tests specified
was performed and all requirements have been met.
c. Operation and maintenance and manuals.
d. Test report.
3.4.6. 5 QUALITY CONTROL:
3.4.6.5.1 The PC Contractor shall be responsible for the quality of work and shall
be develop and propose programs and methods of construction and testing such as to
achieve the specified quality to the approval of SAUDI ARAMCO/Project
3.4.6. 6 COORDINATION:
3.4.6.6.1The PC Contractor shall be responsible for the proper coordination of all phases
of the work under this contract.
3.4.6.6.2It shall be the responsibility of the PC Contractor to coordinate the work and
equipment as specified in specification and drawings in order to assure a complete
and satisfactory installation.
3.4.6. 7 MATERAIL DELIVERY HANDLING AND STORAGE:
3.4.6.7.1 The PC Contractor shall deliver, handle and store equipment and material units
in accordance with the manufacture's requirements as well as following requirements:
a. Ensure equipment and materials are delivered to site originally packed,
securely wrapped and labeled by manufacturer in unopened containers.
Protect materials during delivery as directed by the manufacturer.
b. Store materials at building site strictly according to manufacturer's
instruction.
c. Avoid damage or distortion of the materials during handling and
transportation.
d. Be responsible for damages of equipment and materials occurring during
transportation or storage of the product.
3.4.6. 8 EXECUTION:
3.4.6.8.1 The PC Contractor shall be responsible for
coordinating the installation and activation of tile communication
systems and obtaining any required permits.
3.4.6.8.2 The PC Contractor shall be responsible for providing
operating and supervisory personal with adequate knowledge and
experience, All work shall be done in a workmanlike manner by
competent personnel under the supervision of personnel who have
prior experience in the placing of conduits, wires, cables and all
other related accessories.
3.4.6.8.3 Installation of telecom conduits/fittings/wiring devices
and termination shall be as per the drawings.
3.4.6.8.4 AJI system installation and activation work shall be
performed according to the latest manufacturing technology if
applicable and SAUDI ARAMCO/Project Management
Consultant rules and regulations.
3.4.6.8.5 Inside of all conduits shall be thoroughly clean of any
dirt, moisture or other foreign material before pulling wire and
cable.
3.4.6.8.6 Install cable identification tag on each cable at cabinet
and these shall be installed in easily visible and readable from
front access.
3.4.6.8.7 Separation of wires shall comply With EIA/TIA-569
rules or NEC standards for separating communication cables from
potential EMI sources, including electrical power lines.
3.4.6. 9 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING:
3.4.6.9.1The PC Contractor shall carry out all site tests in accordance
with approved test procedures to ensure that the materials and
related accessories comply with specifications and operational
requirements All tests are subject to witnessing by SAUDI
3.4.6.9.2Upon completion of installation and prior to final acceptance,
each component of each system shall be tested to the complete
satisfaction of the SAUDI ARAMCO/Project Management
Consultant.
3.4.6.9.3Upon completion of all testing, the PC Contractor shall submit
certified reports In accordance with the approved test procedures.
The report for each test shall include the name of the person in-
charge of the test and the date of performance. All factory and field
tests shall be included in Operation and Maintenance Manual.
3.4.6.9.4 Care shall be taken that the test apparatus does not damage
the equipment or other related accessories during the testing.
3.4.6.9.5All data cables shall be tested using a Pent Scanner for Cat 6
NEXT lest or SAUDI ARAMCO/Project Management Consultant
accepted equivalent as appropriate:
Measurement shall include:
 Wire map.
 Length.
 Attenuation.
 NEXT.
 PSNEXT.
 ACR.
 Return Loss.
 Propagation Delay.
 Delay Skew.
3.4.7 QA/QC Plan (Div.1 - General Requirements):
3.4.7. 1 The PC Contractor has to establish and control the procedures
of the QNQC, prepare and submit the quality plan that has to be
followed and implemented during and over the work period that has to
be approved by SAUDI ARAMCO/Project Management Consultant.
3.4.7. 2 All procedures as directed by SAUDI ARAMCO/Project
Management Consultant have to be strictly followed and to be
coordinated with other contractors to ensure the compatible and unified
procedures are applicable to the whole project. These include but not
limited to:
3.4.7.2.1 Work scheduling. Monitoring and control.
3.4.7.2.2 QN/QC monitoring and record keeping.
3.4.7.2.3 Progress evaluation, billing and payments
presentation.
3.4.7.2.4 Safety and loss prevention.
3.4.7.2.5 Reporting either regularly (daily, weekly. monthly) or
upon the SAUDI ARAMCO/Project Management Consultant
request.
3.4.7.2.6 HSE Plan, Procurement Plan. Progress Measurement
Plan.
3.4.7. 3 The PC Contractor has to comply and implement
HSE Plan during the construction period as approved by
3.4.8 Reporting:
3.4.8. 1 Reporting requirements are detailed in the specific
Tender/Contract Appendix. Daily reports by The PC
Contractor will be required to ensure the work progress.
Weekly progress report including work schedule updates.
as well as HSE and QA/QC reports Will be required from
The PC Contractor, In addition to any other report
needed for inspections & testing.
4. 4 Project Schedule end Contract Coordination PC Contract:
4.1 The PC Contractor shall submit within 30 days from the date of Letter of Acceptance {LOA}, a P&C
schedule for the procurement, execution and completion of the works, which shall be consistent with
the milestones set out below. The PC Contractor should submit a detailed delivery schedule as part of
their technical proposal. This is to be prepared and submitted in an Employer approved version of either
the PrimaveraP3, or the MS Project Management software, and this approved scheduling system shall be
adopted for use with the project Bidder to submit detailed level 3 schedules in P3 based on the agreed
pay items of work grouped into below milestones.
4.2 Activation of Optional Scope, following condition shall be applied:
4.2.1 If SAUDI ARAMCO will activate any of the OPTIONAL SCOPE during the First Three
(3) Months after official handover of the Site, CONTRACTOR shall include this additional
works within the original Project Duration.
4.2.2 If SAUDI ARAMCO will activate any of the OPTIONAL SCOPE more than First Three
(3) Months after official handover of tile Site, CONTRACTOR shall submit revised Project
Duration Schedule and subject for SAUDI ARAMCO Approval.
4.3 Duration of Project shall start after handing over the site officially to the CONTRACTOR :
Areas No. of units Duration Remarks
Area 1 (Mock- up) Villas 3 10 Months 10 Months from receiving official

Handing over documents from SAUDI
ARAMCO.
Area 2 127 20 Months 18 Months from receiving official

ARAMCO.

ARAMCO.

ARAMCO.
Total 491 39 Months The project shall b e handed over (Taking

Over) completely no later than 30 Months
from the Project Start Date as mentioned
in the Face Sheet In this Contract.
Schedule No 1. Project Phases and Schedule.

5.4 Mockup Sample:
The PC Contractor shall prepare mock-up samples for Type A villa, Type C villa and Type D villa to
show all permanent works/dimensions, sizes and type of finishing in order to be Inspected by SAUDI
ARAMCO/Project Management Consultant for approval. All comments given on such mockup have to
be implemented on all other units including the mockup unit. Mock up units will be the reference for
all other units. These mock-ups shall be constructed for villa No 047, 048 and 049.
5. Permits:
5.1 The PC Contractor shall do all acts and things necessary, including following-up on behalf of the
SAUDI ARAMCO with the concerned public authorities, In order to obtain the required clearance
certificates and approvals from all the services providers as pre-requisites.
5.2 The PC Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining all permits necessary to complete the works, The
PC Contractor shall identify a suitably qualified individual with the necessary experience who With
proper approval, introduction and coordination by SAUDI ARAMCO/Project Management Consultant
approval. Permit application, processing and approvals take significant time and effort to complete. The
PC Contractor is responsible for planning and allowing sufficient duration for such permits and
approvals to support the project master schedule.
6. Project Closeout (Division 1-General Requirements):
6.1 Cleaning Up:
6.1.1 Shaft, electrical closets, pipe and duct shafts, chases, furred spaces and similar spaces
which are generally unfinished shah be cleaned and left free from rubbish, loose plaster, mortar
drippings, extraneous construction materials, dirt and dust.
6.1.2 Remove rubbish by means of chutes, hoists or receptacles. Do not drop or throw rubbish
or waste from one level to another within or outside the building. Dust Screens should be
provided for these chutes, hoists or receptacles, And this applies to the dump trucks or vehicle
which Will carry the garbage/trash/surplus materials to their destination or dumpsite/storage
out of the project site.
6.1.3 Care shall be taken by workmen not to mark soil or otherwise deface finished surfaces In
the event that finished surfaces become defaced, clean and restore such surfaces to their
original condition.
6.1.4 Clean up dung and immediately upon completion of each trade’s work.
6.1.5 Clean areas in which painting and finishing work is to be performed just prior to the start
of this work and maintain these areas in a clean condition. Cleaning includes the removal of
rubbish, broom cleaning of floors, the removal of any plaster, mortar, dust and other
extraneous materials from finish surfaces and surfaces that will remain after the project is
complete.
6.1.6 In addition to the cleaning specified above and the more specific cleaning which may be
required in various sections of the specification, prepare the building for occupancy by a
thorough cleaning, including washing (or cleaning by other appropriate methods) surfaces on
which dirt or dust has collected and by washing glass on both sides. Wash exterior glass using
a window cleaning contractor specializing in such work. Provide and maintain adequate runner
strips of staining reinforced Kraft building paper on finished floors for protection. Leave
equipment in an undamaged, bright, clean, polished condition. Re-cleaning will not be
required after the works have been accepted unless after operations of The PC Contractor
makes Re-cleaning necessary.
6.1.7 Ensure that no mud and debris is allowed to dirty the surrounding public highway by
being carried off the construction site by trucks or other vehicles. Trucks to be subject to
cleaning, particularly wheels and the underside of the chassis, prior to accessing the
surrounding roads from site.
6.2 Removal of Plant and Temporary Works (Demobilization):
6.2.1 Upon completion of the works or when directed by the SAUDI ARAMCO/Project
Management Consultant clear away ail surplus materials, plant and temporary works including
scaffolding, temporary buildings, equipment. Utilities, services, facilities, access, fencing, gates,
coverings enclosures, etc., and make good to the satisfaction of SAUDI ARAMCO/Project
Management Consultant. Backfill and compact trenches after removal of temporary drains.
Break-up and remove temporary manholes, septic tanks or, if permitted by the consultant and
local authorities having jurisdiction, disinfect and fill in solid with approved filling. Comply
with all Municipality Regulations regarding final site clearance and obtain relevant approvals
and certificates.
6.3 Handover Materials & Documents:
6.3.1 The PC Contractor shall provide all Three (3) Original copies of operation and
maintenance instruction manuals. Three (3) Original copies of brochures, Three (3) Original
copies of catalogue cuts, and Three (3) A3 size sets of as-built drawings for each villa as
specified and required by the contract. This will include all guarantees and warranties required
by the contract including those required of manufacturers, suppliers and subcontractors
together with all spare parts, tools and maintenance equipment for use after the expiry of the
period of maintenance, also, One (1) box for full set of keys for every each villa.
7. OPTIONAL SCOPE OF WORK:
The optional scope compensation shall be in accordance with Schedule C of this Contract. SAUDI
ARAMCO has the right to activate the Optional Scope anytime during the contract period, and shall be
eligible to choose which optional item to be constructed. The price validity shall be within the contract
duration.
7.1 Future Expansion:
7.1. 1 Subject items may be activated as per SAUDI ARAMCO requirement. Future items which
includes guest rooms, bedrooms, toilet, diwaiya & driver room.
7.1. 2 The PC Contractor shall provide the best practice to make it easier for the user to expand
the house In the future as mentioned in Item No (3.1.5.vi) of this document.
Villa/ Items Guest Room 2 Diwanly a Driver Reference

with Toilet Bed room with room
Toilet
Villa B - - 1 - Refer to Type B
BOQ.
Villa C - 1 1 1 Refer to Type C
BOQ.
Villa D - 1 1 1 Refer to Type D
BOQ.
Schedule No 2. Future Expansion Items:
7.2 Cabinet (Bedroom & Storage Cabinets):

7.2. 1 Not used.
7.2. 2 The specification for the above Item shall be considered but not limited to Body, MDF
Boards, exposed surfaces (wooden veneer, walnut or cherry) Internal part (white Formica mat) and
PC Contractor shall provide complete cabinet accessories as specified in the Drawing and BOQ.
7.3 Hidden Lights (Cove Light):
7.3 1 Not used.
7.3 2 PC shall provide the best practice for future expansion as mentioned In Item No. (3.1.5.vi)
of this document.
7.3 3 Items may be activated to be installed as per SAUDI ARAMCO requirement.
Villa/ Items Ground First Floor Men Majlis Dining Reference

Location Floor Living Living Area Area
Area
Villa B 1 1 1 1 Refer to Type B
BOQ.
Villa C 1 1 1 1 Refer to Type C
BOQ.
Villa D 1 1 1 1 Refer to Type D
BOQ.
Schedule No 3. Optional Lighting Items:
7.4 Landscape:
7.4 1 Design shall be as per the IFC Drawing in Schedule B -Attachment III.
7.4 2 PC shall provide the best practice for future expansion as mentioned in Item No. (3 1 5
VI) of this document.
7.5 Not used.
7.6 CCTV Security System:
7.6 1 The PC Contractor shall provide the price during the bidding stage.
8. LIST OF SPECIFICATIONS:
The codes and standards as listed below are the principle ones applicable to this
contract; however, this list of Codes is not intended to be exclusive and exhaustive.
For the full scope of applicable codes and standards refer to the referenced codes and
standards listed in the project specification. The Latest editions at the time of contract
placement shall apply unless modified by requirements specified herein; the facilities
shall comply with these publications.
No. Title Specification Number

1 scope of Work for Temporary Facility Attached Document
2 3.2 Mobilization and Temporary Works Division 1- General Requirements
3 3.4 Engineering Division 1- General Requirements
4 3.4.1 Civil and Site Preparation Work. Division 1- General Requirements.
3.4.3 Structural Work (Concrete: Reinforced Division 2- Site Works
and Pre-cast Concrete Division 3- Concrete
5 3.4.2 Architectural work.
6 3.4.2 b Masonry, including ancillaries and Division 4- Masonry
service conduits for boundary walls.
7 3.4.2 c Architecture concrete, including Division 3- Concrete
lintels, coping and sills.
8 3.4.2 d Floor screeds. Division 9- Finishes
9 3.4.2 Roofing, including drainage, insulation, Division 7- Thermal and Moisture
screed, membrane, protection and flood test protection
of flat roofs.
10 3.4.2 f Rainwater s stem, Including scupper Division 15- Mechanical
drains
11 3.4.2 g Doors and ironmongery. Division 8- Doors and Windows.
12 3.4.2 h windows, glazing and privacy Division 8- Door and Windows.
screens.
13 3.4.2 i Plastering. Division 9- Finishes
14 3.4.2 j Floor and wall finishes. Including Division 9- Finishes
ceramic
tiles and skirting .Spare tiles shall be
provided
.
15 3.4.2 K Suspended ceilings Division 9- Finishes
16 3.4.2 I Sanitary system, including fittings, Division 15- Mechanical
plumbing, cleaning.
17 3.4.2 m Fixtures and fittings, including toilet
Division 5- Metals, Division 6- Woods &
Division facilities, handrails and louvers. Plastic, Division 10- Specialties and
Division 11- Equipment
18 3.4.2 n Residential equipment, range hoods. Division 11- Appliances
19 3.4.3 Structural Work. Division 3 - Concrete
20 3.4.4 Mechanical work (HVAC, Plumbing Division 15 -Mechanical
and Fire Protection System
).
21 3.4.4.1 HVAC Work. Division 15 - Mechanical and Division
16- Electrical
22 3.4.4.2 HVAC Testing, Adjusting and Division 15 - Mechanical
Balancing.
23 3.4.4.4 Plumbing system. Division 15 - Mechanical
24 3.4.4.11 Fire Protection System. Division 15 – Mechanical and Division
16- Electrical
25 3.4.5 Electrical Work Division 16- Electrical
26 3.4.6 Telecommunication Work. Division 16- Electrical
27 3.4.7 OAIQC Plan. Division 1- General Requirements
28 3.4.8 Reporting. Division 1- General Requirements
29 3.14 Permits. Division 1- General Requirements
30 3.15 Project Closeout Division 1- General Requirements
9. LIST ATTACHMENT:
9.1 Attachment I - Temporary Facility Documents with Attachments.
9.2 Attachment II – Royal Commission Specifications & Requirements.
9.3 Attachment III – IFC Drawings.
9.4 Attachment IV - Technical BOQ.
END OF SCHEDULEB
Scope of Work
Temporary Facilities
Date of Issue: February 2015
REVIEWED BY:

Date and Signature
1. OVERVIEW:
This project, BI-28-10012, provide for the Home Ownership Lot Development, Phase I, at AI-Mutrafiah, Juball
industrial City In the Eastern Province of the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia. This Contract will accommodate 491
house units, in total, with varying lot sizes for sectors Fl-1, Fl-2 and F1.3 and the construction of three (3) Duplex
type houses for the Imam & Muzzain to be built on three (3) lots to be selected by Saudi Aramco, in addition to
three (3) local day mosques.
The following is the scope of work which provide for the supply, installation, of Portable office and Storage for
Temporary Facility at SAUDI ARAMCO HOP Project site located at Mutrafiah Area, In addition to provide
operation and Maintenance 5ervices for this facility.
The site is located in the Mutrafiah District of the Jubail Industrial City residential area.
Mutrafiah District is a new development within the Jubail industrial City residential area and SAUDIARAMCO
has been granted a total of 491 villas.
development shall be completed once the houses are constructed or nearing completion.
3. Standards and Specification:
This Temporary Facility shall be supplied and installed in accordance with latest edition, of applicable standards
and procedures as per SAUDI ARAMCO requirements. ATIACHMENT 1 shows the material specification that
shall be followed.
4. Responsibilities and Assurance:
4.1 Contractor shall visit the project site to make the site survey, and collect the necessary and required
information.
4.2 Contractor shall adhere to the space requirement provided by SAUDI ARAMCO Representative.
4.3 Contractor shall coordinate with SAUDI ARAMCO Representative for the any permits required.
4.4 Contractor shall adhere to the working hours 5Chedule with SAUDI ARAMCO Representative and
Project Management Consultant.
4.5 Contractor shall maintain the project site safe and clean working area.
4.6 Contractor shall provide Support Service, Janitorial Service, office and pantry consumable, IT
equipment's (Computers and Printers) and Maintenance Service for the Facility during the project
period.
4.7 Contractor shall provide waste bin, for the facility and manage the waste disposal inside and outside the
facility.
4.8 Contractor shall provide all but not limited to complete furniture, computers, appliances, office supplies
& consumables, pantry supplies and consumables.
4.9 Contractor shall be liable on providing the Temporary Utilities not limited to Electrical
Power/Generator, IT Equipment, Air Conditioning, Potable Water, Drainage system and Sewer line
system.
5. Portable office Building Requirements:
5.1 Space Requirement:
Space Number
Offices 12
Achieve Room 1
Toilets 6
Meeting room 1
Prayer room 1
Pantry Area 1
Storage Area 2
Total Area 300 m2
 Proposed layout of the space requirement is shown in ATTACHMENT 2.
5.2 Facility Furniture:

 12 tables (160 cm width), Drawers, coffee table cabinets.
 12 High back wire mesh chairs.
 44 Low back wire mesh chairs.
 1 Meeting Table.
 Fully furnished Pantry room including the appliances {Coffee machine, boiler and sink).
5.3 IT Connection and Ports:
 Network Port per workstation.
 IT Equipment per workstation, Projector for meeting room.
 Network coble duct to one assembly point.
5.4 IT equipment:
 12 Computers.
 Network printer (1) or Individual 1Printers (12).
 1 Projector to be installed in the meeting room.
 The maintenance of this equipment is part of the contractor scope of work.
5.5 Potable Water:
 Drinking Water Station.
 Water for the wash area/ Toilet Area.
5.6 Electrical Connection and Ports:
 2 Electrical ports 220V per workstation.
 Electrical wiring ducts to Main panel board.
 Provide emergency lights.
5.7 Toilets (Saudi ceramic fixtures): with Complete Waste management service:
 Wash downs w/ perennial spray.
 Wash basin.
 Water heater.
 Exhaust Fans.
5.8 Fire safety requirements:
 THE CONTRACTOR shall include the following:
 Hard Wire Fire Detection System - Battery System with 220V connection.
 Adequate number of Fire Extinguishers (6 kg Dry Powder, 6 kg C02 inside the building).
 Fire Hydrant availability depends on the design of the Facility.
5.9 Steel or concrete steps in the main entrance and fire exit doors.
6. OPERATION and MAINTENANCE SERVICES:
The contractor shall provide Operation and Maintenance services during the project period the service shall
include the following services:
6.1 Maintenance and Janitorial staff:
6.1 1 The Contractor shall be fully responsible for all janitorial and maintenance services within
the facility.
6.1 2 The Contractor shall supply the required labor, materials, tools, equipment and
consumables for the execution of the works. This includes, but is not limited to; mops, brushes,
buckets, polishing machines, industrial vacuum cleaners.
6.1 3 The Contractor shall provide all disinfectants, detergents, sanitizing agents, special
cleaners, strippers, polishes, shampoos, fabric cleaner, and any other cleaning agents that may
be required to perform the works. A minimum 7 days stock shall be maintained in suitable,
lockable stores or in the pantry.
6.1 4 All toilet facilities and pantry shall be cleaned daily. Any other requirements not listed but
necessary to deliver a complete and quality service are deemed to be included in the scope of
work.
6.1 5 Particular attention shall be paid to all areas to ensure that the precise standard of
cleanliness is achieved.
6.2 General Cleaning & Upkeep:
6.2 1 The Contractor shall be fully responsible for all general cleaning & upkeep services within
the Portable office buildings.
6.2 2 General cleaning & upkeep services shall include the following non exhaustive list of
requirements, Any other requirements not listed herein but necessary to deliver a complete and
quality service are deemed to be included within the OM&S Contractor scope of service:
 Provision of cleaning of all indoor areas to ensure a clean, tidy and presentable area.
 All indoor areas shall include vacuum cleaning, dusting and polishing as required to
ensure a dust free clean environment is maintained.
 Clean the furniture on a Daily basis to ensure that it is in a clean and hygienic
condition.
6.3 Pantry Service:
6.3 1 The Contractor shall be fully responsible for all pantry services within the
Portable offices Buildings.
6.3 2 The Contractor shall supply all labor, supervision, kitchen utensils, crockery and
consumables for the execution of the works. Pantry services shall include all provision of
teas, coffees, drinking water dispenser, for an approximate daily staff number of 15
persons.
6.4 Other included services:
7.4 1 The contractor shall provide the following services and materials for the facility:
7.4 2 Provide first aid services (1 set).
7.4 3 The Garbage collection and disposal services, this shall Include Providing pins
inside the offices, Garbage plastic bags, outside pins, moving the pins from the site to RC
land fill area as require.
7.4 4 Pest control. (As require)
7.4 5 Roads and parking lot general cleaning.
7. Other items (Portable office Requirements):

7.1 Internet Network and telecommunication system shall be provided by Contractor.
7.2 The land shall be compacted and leveled.
7.3 Shaded parking area shall be provided and reserved for SAUDI ARAMCD Representatives. (4
Parking's).
7.4 Air-conditioning:
7.4 1 Portable offices building shall be provided with sufficient Air-conditioning. The
air conditioners shall be designed to control and maintain the room design temperature.
7.4 2 Heating shall be provided to maintain the required winter indoor design
temperature, the air conditioner shall be accomplished with factory assembled indoor and
outdoor units.
8. Contract Duration:
The contractor has to establish the construction of this facility after signing the contract with SAUDI ARAMCO
HOP Project. This contract shall commence during the mobilization stage.
9. Prices AND Payment Method:
The Facility shall be available within 30 Days after NTP. Prices shall be reflected with the HOP Project BOQ
including the operation and maintenance services during the project period.
10. Testing and Commissioning:
Contractor shall perform the required tests, inspections, and commissions of the completed work under the
supervision of SAUDIARAMCO Representative prior to mobilization.
11. General Instructions:
The contractor must abide by the building's safety rules and regulations in the site location (SAUDI ARAMCO
project site).
6 ATTACHMENT
- ATIACHMENT 1 – Temporary Facility Layout
- ATIACHMENT 2 - Material Specifications
=== End ===
Engineering Office Temporary Facility
The Location to be determined later
The Scope sholl include provide mg 10 shaded proking in front of the facility
Scope of Work
Temporary Facilities
REVIEWED BY:

Date and Signature
1. Methods and Specifications for Roads and Asphalt Laying:

1.1 General:
All design, materials, and work shall comply with the requirements of this specification. All design
calculations. Drawings, and specifications shall be submitted to SAUDI ARAMCO for approval.
1.1 1 Design Criteria - Temporary Training facilities:
1.1.1.1 Design of Roadways and Traffic conditions:
Design of roadway pavements shall be In accordance with Chapter 4 "Low Volume Road
Design" of AASHTO GDPS-4 "Guide for Design of Pavement Structures". For thickness
design of roadways, the following design traffic levels in l8-kips ESAL(Equivalent Single
Axle Load) as defined in AASHTO GDPS-4 shall be used:
1.1.1.2 Design Period:
Roadway and Parking Areas shall be designed for a period of 5 years traffic:
1.1.1.3 Drainage:
Roads shall be crowned (minimum 1 to maximum 2 percent for concrete pavement and
minimum 2 to maximum 4 percent for bituminous, the minimum surface slope shall not
be less than0.25% to provide adequate drainage, A cross-fall may be constructed to
provide drainage of roadways only with prior approval from Company. Area concrete
pavements shall have a minimum slope of 1 percent and a maximum slope of 4 percent.
The pavement slope shall be uniform to prevent water accumulation.
1.1.1.4 Road Width:
Roads shall be classified into the following categories:
A. Major roads shall have a minimum width of 8,0 m.
B. Minor roads shall have a minimum width of 6,0 m.
The actual width of roads around each facility shall be based on the related plot plan drawings.1.0 m wide
crushed stone hard shoulder shall be provided to both sides of roads with following exceptions.
1.1.1.5 Intersection Radii:
Road Junctions or bends shall provide for the safe movement of traffic without undue
restrictions. The design shall allow for the type of vehicles to be used and limitations of
space at such locations, but the internal radius to the kerbing shall not be less than 6 m,
other intersection radii shall be provided as required by anticipated vehicles, and shall be
in accordance with their respective minimum turning paths.
1.1.1.6 Turnouts:
Roads less than 6 m wide shall have a minimum of 6m wide turnouts and standing areas
at fire hydrant locations, Length of turnouts shall be a minimum of 1S m to allow fire
vehicles to be parked clear of main traffic lanes.
1.1 2 Sub-grade:
Definition: Sub-grade is the foundation for the pavement structure.
1.1.2.1 Design:
The condition and classification of sub-grade soil shall be determined for the pavement
design; THE CONTRACTOR shall perform the soil investigation and the appropriate
field tests in accordance With the relevant standards to obtain the sub-grade classification
values, such as sub-grade Reaction (K), California Bearing Ratio (CBR), and Resistance
Value (R).
1.1.2.2 Construction:
The preparation and compaction of sub-grade soil shall be in accordance with relevant
standards.
1.1 3 Bituminous Concrete Paving:
Bituminous concrete paving mixes shall be used for surfacing and base courses of all roadways and
parking areas, full-depth asphalt concrete design and shall be constructed using hot-mix; hot-laid
mixtures spread and compacted in layers.
1.1.3.1 Materials:
Materials for tI1e hot-mixed hot-laid bituminous concrete shall conform to the following
requirements:
a. Cutback asphalt for prime coat shall conform to ASTM D2027 Grade MC30, MC-70 or MC-
2S0.
b. Emulsified asphalt for tack coat shall conform to ASTM D977 Grade SS-1 or SS-1h.
c. Tack coat shal1l be diluted one part water to one part emulsified asphalt.
d. Cutback asphalt for tack coat shall conform to ASTM 02028 Grade RC-70 or RC-T.
e. Bituminous concrete shall conform to ASTM 03515, job mix formula design density between
95 to 97 percent of void-less mixture determined by the Marshall Test in accordance with
ASTM D1559.
f. Asphalt cement shall be prepared from petroleum. It shall be uniform in character, free from
water and shall not foam when heated to 177 degrees C. It shall conform to Grade 85 to 100 as
defined in ASTM 0 946.
g. Coarse aggregate shall conform to ASTM D 692. Coarse aggregate is defined as all material
retained on a No. 10 sieve as tested by ASTM C136 and when tested in accordance with Los
Angles Abrasion Test according to ASTM C 131 shall have a percent of wear not exceeding 40.
The coarse aggregate shall consist of crushed stone, crushed gravel or a combination of the
two.
Gravel shall be free from clay, organic or other injurious matter occurring either free or as a
coating on the aggregate, and material removed by decantation shall not be more than 3
percent.
Coarse aggregate shall contain no more than 5 percent by dry weight of soft or semi-hard
sandstone shale, conglomerate particles, or other unsound material.
h. Fine aggregate is defined as all material passing the No, 10 sieve and retained on No 200 sieve,
It shall consist of sand, or stone screenings or a combination of the two The portion of the fine
aggregate which passes the No, 40 sieve shall have a Plasticity Index of not more than 6 as
determined prior to the addition of mineral filler.
As delivered to the mixer, it shall be free from clayey lumps, bonded aggregations, and other
deleterious materials. Fine aggregate shall conform to ASTM 0 1073.
i. Mineral filler is defined as all material passing the No, 200 sieve, If filler in addition to that
naturally present in the aggregate is necessary it shall consist of thoroughly dry stone dust.
Volcanic ash or Portland cement. As delivered to the mixer, it shall be free of lumps and
loosely bonded aggregations. Up to one percent of hydrated lime may be added to tile mix,
particularly with aggregates that are subject to stripping, Fly ash shall not be used as mineral
filler. Mineral filler shall conform to ASTM D 242.
1.1 4 Construction Joints:
Construction joints shall be made in such a manner as to assure a neat junction, thorough
compaction, and bonded throughout, Where new paving meets existing, the edge of existing paving
shall be saw-cut Square for the full depth of paving, Feathering of the edges on new paving shall
not be permitted.
1.1 5 Bituminous Surface Course:
Bituminous concrete surfacing shall be minimum thickness of 40 mm. Bituminous concrete
surfacing and final ponding test shall be performed on all roadways and parking areas.
1.1 6 Base Course:
The bituminous base, of full-depth asphalt design, shall be constructed using hot-mix, hot-laid
bituminous aggregate mixture spread and compacted in layers. This base shall be compacted and
densified with smooth-wheeled, tandem power-driven rollers with a minimum metal weight 10
tons.
1.1 7 Construction of Bituminous Pavement:
a. General:
Bituminous concrete construction for roads and paving shall conform to the recommendations
contained in local highway department specifications, AASHTO GDPS-4, and AIIS-91, IS-96,
MS-1, M8-2, MS-8, MS-23, and 8S-1.
b. Weather Limitations:
Asphalt primer. tack coal. and bituminous concrete shall be placed when the humidity, general
weather conditions, air temperature, and conditions of the compacted base course are suitable
as determined by SAUDI ARAMCO.
In general, no paving materials shall be placed when the air temperature is below 10 degrees C
and falling, but may be placed when the air temperature IS above 4 degree C and rising No
materials shall be placed until the underlying surface is clean and dry.
c. Surface Preparation:
The compacted aggregate base shall be maintained and cured until the moisture content of the
entire thickness of the base does not exceed 70 percent of the optimum moisture for crushed
limestone base martial or 60 percent of optimum moisture for other types of aggregate base
material. The compacted aggregate surface shall be swept clean of all dust, dirt, and loose
particles before the primer is applied.
d. Primer:
When bituminous concrete is placed on a newly constructed or existing aggregate base the top
surface of the base course shall receive a prime coat of cut-back asphalt.
The rate of application of primer shall be between 0,9 and 2.3 liter per square meter as
required filling all voids, and uniformly coating the surface of the compacted aggregate base.
The type and rate of application of the primer shall be adjusted to Suit the gradation of the
compacted aggregate base material.
Grade M-30 or MC-70 shall be used for dense graded surfaces and Grade MC-250 for open
graded surfaces. The primed surface shall be cured for not less than 24 hours, if the primer is
not completely absorbed by the compacted aggregate base within 24 hour period, excess primer
shall be blotted with sand. Blotter sand shall pass a No.4 sieve and be retain on a No. 200 sieve.
e. Tack Coat:
When bituminous concrete IS placed on material other than an aggregate base the top surface
of the material receiving the paving shall be coated with a tack coat of either cut-back asphalt
or emulsified asphalt and allowed to cure prior to the application of the bituminous concrete.
The tack coat shall be applied on only as much pavement as can be covered with bituminous
concrete in the same day, the rate of coverage for the application of tack coat material shaH be
between 0.2 and 0.7 liter per square meter.
f. Bituminous Concrete Placement:
The surface and base course layers mixture shall be placed with an asphalt paver or spreader to
provide a nominal compacted thickness, the minimum lift thickness shall be at least twice the
maximum particle size and the maximum lift thickness shall be that which can be
demonstrated to be laid in a single 11ftand be compacted to the required uniform density and
smoothness.
Placing of bituminous concrete mixture shall be a continuous operation, If any irregularities
occur, they shall be corrected before final compaction of the mixture. The completed paving
shall have a density equal to or greater than 95 percent of the density of a laboratory specimen
made in the proportions of the job mix formula. Bituminous concrete surface shall be
compacted and densified using smooth steel-wheeled, tandem power-driven rollers with a min
metal weight of 10 tons.
=== End ===
SPECIFICATION FOR MATERIALS AND WORK EXECUTION
B1- 28- 15008 Housing Project- Jubail
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 1- GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

Specification 0101 Summary of Work
0102 Quality Control
0103 Temporary Facilities
0104 Temporary Fences and Barricades
0105 Project Identification and Sign
0106 Clo5e-out requirements
0107 Additional Construction Requirements
DIVISION 2- SITEWORK
Specification 0201 Survey work
0202 Earthwork - including Excavation, Filling and Grading
0203 Boundary Wall
0204 Pavement Sub-Base and Aggregate Base
0205 Underground Piping and Site Utility Pits
0206 Pre-construction Termite Control
0207 Interlock concrete paver block
0208 Curbs
0209 Landscape
DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE (Plain and Reinforced)
Specification 0301 Concrete Reinforcement
0302 Concrete Work (Cast in Place & Pre-cast)
DIVISION 4 - MASONRY
Specification 0401 Masonry Units
0402 Concrete Unit Masonry
DIVISION 5- METALS
Specification 0501 Steel Rectangular Hollow Sections and Small Sections
Structural Steel
DIVISION 6- WOOD AND ALUMINIUM
Specification 0601 Carpentry and Millwork
0602 Cabinet Work
DIVISION 7- THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
Specification 0701 Waterproofing and Damp Proofing, Vapour Barrier for
Slabs
0702 Building Insulation
0703 Membrane Roofing
0704 Flashing and Sheet Metal
0705 Joint Sealants
0706 Bituminous Film Coatings
0707 Concrete Water proofing
DIVISION 8- DOORS AND WINDOWS
Specification 0801 Aluminum Doors and Frames
0802 Aluminum Windows
0803 Glazing and Mirrors
0804 Wood Doors
0805 Finish Hardware
0806 Steel Doors and Frames
0807 Garage Doors
DIVISION 9- FINISHES
Specification 0901 Solid Plaster Rendering Stucco Work
0902 Tiling
0903 Painting
0904 Gypsum Wallboard and Ceiling System
0905 Metal Stud and Ceiling Support Systems
0906 Marble and Granite Tiling
DIVISION 10- SPECIALTIES
Specification 1001 Sanitary Fixtures
1002 Bathroom Accessories
DIVISION 11- APPLIANCES
Specification 1101 Schedule of Kitchen and Other Appliances

DIVISION 12 to Not Applicable
DIVISION 14 -
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL
Specification 1501 Plumbing System Plumbing System
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL
Specification 1601 Electrical Work
1602 Lighting Fixtures
1603 Fire Alarm system
1604 Telecommunication system
DIVISION 17- ABBREVIATIONS/ REFERENCES
DIVISION 1:
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:
0101 Summary of Work
0102 Quality Control
0103 Temporary Facilities
0104 Temporary Fences and Barricades
0105 Project Identification and Sign
0106 Close- out requirements
0107 Additional construction Requirements
0101 SUMMARY OF WORK:

1.0 GENERAL:
The intention of the documents is to include all matenals, equipment construction techniques
and transportation necessary and readily available in the Kingdom for proper execution for the
work. Use of Saudi manufactured goods shall be used wherever possible.
2.0 CONSTRUCTION AND MATERIALS STANDARDS:
Where reference is made to construction or materials standards in this Specification or on the
Drawings, the latest edition of the relevant standards shall apply, unless otherwise specified.
3.0 OWNER SUPPLIED ITEMS:
Where items stated are Owner supplied fix only items, refer to part III execution in relevant
division item for correct procedure.
4.0 INTERPRETATION OF DOCUMENTS:
See relevant specifications on condition of contract.
5.0 APPLICATIONS:
These specifications in its entirety shall be applicable for the following 4 different villa types B
(90 units), C (279 units), D (122 units) and Imam & Muazzin (3 units).
6.0 APPLICABLE EDITION OF STANDARDS:
7.0 DEFINITIONS:
a. GENERAL:
A substantial amount of specification language constitutes definitions for terms found
in other contract documents, including drawings which must be recognized as
diagrammatic in nature and not completely descriptive of requirements Indicated
thereon Certain terms used in contract documents are defined generally in this article
Definitions and explanations of this section are not necessarily either complete or
exclusive, but are general for the work to extent not stated more explicitly in another
provision of contract documents.
b. TOLERANCES:
The allowable error in the value of the indicated quantity It is the dimensional
allowance made for the inability of men and machines to fabricate a product of exact
dimensions.
c. MEASUREMENT & PAYMENT:
A. MEASUREMENT:
The Contractor shall use the metric system of measurement for all designs,
specifications, plans and drawings, except as otherwise approved in writing
by the Company.
B. PAYMENT:
The Contract Price shall be paid to the Contractor in accordance with the
following payment provisions.
B. 1The Contract Price shall be paid to the Contractor on the basis of
monthly assessment and onsite measurement of completed Work as the
Work proceeds, Such assessments shall be prepared by Contractor in
the form and manner requested by the Client Representative and shall
be submitted for the Client Representative's approval on or about the
end of each month covering the amount and value (in terms of the
Contract Price) of work performed by Contractor up to the date of
such estimate The estimate may be made by strict measurement or by
estimate or partly by one method and partly by the other, Estimates
shall be based on cumulative total quantities of Work performed and
shall not Include matenals or equipment not incorporated into the
Permanent Works. except as otherwise expressly provided herem or
authorized by the Client Representative during the course of
performance of the Work, The quantity of Work to be paid for under
any item set forth in the Schedule of Prices shall be the amount or
number approved by the Client Representative of units of Work
completed in accordance with the Contract.
B. 2Contractor shall make surveys necessary for determining quantities of
Work to be paid for hereunder. Copies of field notes, computations,
and other records made by Contractor for the purpose of determining
quantities shall be furnished to the Company upon request. Contractor
shall notify the Client Representative in witiing prior to the time any
survey is made, and the Client Representative, at its discretion. May
arrange to have a representative present to witness and verify such
survey.
B. 3Measurements and computations shall be made by such methods as the
Client Representative may consider appropriate for the class of Work
measured.
B. 4Monthly Statement:
On the dates agreed With the Client Representative the Contractor
shall prepare and submit in triplicate a detailed statement to the Client
Representative, in the form and manner agreed to by the Client setting
out the total amount of completed time the survey is to be carried out
in order that the client, at its discretion, may arrange to witness and
verity such survey. Copies of the field Notes, computations and other
records made by contractor for the purpose of determining the quantity
of such Work shall be furnished to the Client upon request.
B. 5Client Overall payment process:
a. Review by the Client representative of Contractor’s
statement shall be completed within 25 days of its receipt,
and a copy of the statement as maybe modified or certified
shall be returned to Contractor attached to the client
payment certificate. Contractor shall thereupon submit to
the Client and invoice prepared in the form and manner
designated by the Client, reflecting the amount of the
certified statement. Contractor, from time to time, may be
required also to provide a forecast of the amounts of its
future invoices to be submitted to the Client for the
following three (3) months.
b. Within (20) days of receipt of an approved invoice the
Client shall pay the Contractor the approved invoice
amount less any amounts to be deducted there from in
accordance with the Terms and Conditions 01the
Contract.
B. 6Payment Provisions:
Before payment of the first invoice can be approved, the Contractor
shall submit and have approval from the Client Representative of the
following documents:
a. Detailed Procurement Plan and Schedule.
b. Detailed Construction Schedule.
c. Construction Inspection Plan.
d. Security Plan.
e. Fire Prevention Plan.
f. Health and Safety Plan.
g. Materials and Inventory Plan.
h. Anticipated Overall Cash Flow based upon a detailed
Construction Schedule.
C. ABBREVATIONS:
The language of specifications and other contract documents is of the
abbreviated type in certain instances, and implies words and meanings
which will be appropriately interpreted. Actual word abbreviations of a self-
explanatory nature have been included in texts; Specific abbreviations have
been established, principally for lengthy technical terminology and primarily
in conjunction With coordination of specification requirements with
notations on drawings and In schedules These are frequently defined in
section at first instance of use. Trade association names and titles of general
standards are frequently abbreviated. Singular words will be interpreted as
singular where applicable and where full context of the contract documents
so indicates.
D. APPROVAL:
Where used in conjunction with Client Representative's response to
submittals, requests, applications, inquires, reports and claims by
contractor, the meaning of term "approved" will be held to limitations of
Client Representative's responsibilities and duties as authorized by the
Client. In no case will "approval" by Client Representative be interpreted as
a release of contractor from responsibilities to fulfill requirements of
contract documents.
E. SPECIFICATION AND DRAWINGS:
SPECIFICATION: None of these explanations will be interpreted to modify
substance of requirements Portions of these specifications have been
produced by Client Representative's standard methods of editing master
specifications, and may contain minor deviations from traditional writing
formats. Such deviations are a normal result of this production technique,
and no other meaning will be implied or permitted.
SHOP DRAWINGS: The term "shop drawings" includes the shop drawings
and shop drawing Information such as descriptive literature, product data.
Illustrations. Schedules, performance and test data, and similar information
furnished by the Contractor to explain In detail specific portions of the
Work as required by the various sections of these specifications.
SAMPLES: The term "samples" includes a representative item, a
representative part of an item, or a mock-up, which is a representative
assembly of items as required by the various sections of these specifications.
8.0 RELATION TO OTHER CONTRACTORS:
The owner (Client) may appoint other contractors for work not covered or not included in this
building contract, and the contractor shall fully cooperate and coordinate his work with other
contractors so as to enable himself and other contractors to complete their respective jobs on
time.
The general contractor shall not commit or permit any act that will interfere with the
performance of work by any other contractor.
9.0 DEFECTIVE MATERIALS:
All materials found not satisfactory and not in accordance with the contract, plans and these
specifications, shall be removed at once from the job site by the Contractor so that they are not
be used by mistake.
10.0 TEST OF MATERIALS:
When test of materials are necessary or required, the expenses shall be borne by the
Contractor.
11.0 SUPERINTENDENT:
The Contractor shall employ a full time Project Engineer and an adequate number of Site
Engineers/Foremen, who shall be responsible for proper implementation of the work. He shall
be at the job site the full ten-hour workday, and must have an alternative in case of inability to
work during overtime hours.
12.0 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITY ON PREMISES AND ADJOINING
PROPERTY:
A. The Contractor shall so conduct the work as will produce the least disturbance and, if
possible without inconvenience to the adjoining structures existing buildings and
offices and neighborhood.
B. He shall be responsible for damage to all persons and property on premises or site
that may occur as a result of or in connection with the execution of the work under
this contract.
C. The Contractor shall be responsible for any or all damage to other contractors work
already on site or adjoining property.
13.0 CONSTRUCTION SAFETY:
The Contractor shall at all times conduct its operations at all locations where the Work is
performed in such a manner as to avoid any risk of bodily harm to persons or damage to
property. The Contractor shall promptly lake all precautions which are reasonable or necessary
to safeguard against such risks and shall make regular safety inspection of the conditions where
the Work is performed, and any materials or equipment used in the performance of the Work,
The Contractor shall be solely responsible for the discovery. Determination and correction of
any unsafe conditions arising in connection with the performance of the Work.
In addition, the Contractor shall comply with all applicable safety laws, standards, codes and
regulations, including any safety program established by the Client and/or the Royal
Commission, The Contractor shall cooperate and coordinate with other contractors on safety
matters and shall promptly comply with any specific safety instructions or directions given to
the Contractor by the Royal Commission or Client. within thirty (30) days after the
commencement date specified in the Notice to Proceed, the Contractor shall submit to the
Client for approval, the Contractor's safety program, provided, however, that the Client's
approval of any such program shall not relieve the Contractor of its other obligations
hereunder The Contractor shall inform its employees of safety practices and the requirements
of any of the Royal Commission's, the Client's and the Contractor’s safety programs The
Contractor shall furnish suitable safety equipment and enforce the use of such equipment by
its employees.
Upon the failure of the Contractor to comply with any of the requirements set forth herein, the
Royal Commission and/or the Client shall have the authority to stop any operations of the
Contractor affected by such failure until the condition is remedied. No part of the time lost due
to any such stop order shall be made the subject of a claim for extension of time or for
increased costs or damages by the Contractor.
14.0 HEALTH & SAFETY PLAN:
A. All works undertaken in relation to this Specification are to be completed in full
accordance with the respective health and safety requirements established by the
following:
1. Kingdom of Saudi Arabia:
a. Legislation, Regulation, Standards and Codes.
2. Municipality / Royal Commission Regulations:
a. Standards, Contractual Conditions, and Health and Safety Systems.
3. Contractor:
a. Health and Safety Standards and Systems as accepted by the
Municipality / Royal Commission/ Client.
B. In the absence of any of the above, best accepted industry practice shall be employed
throughout.
C. The Contractor shall submit a Site Safety Plan within 30 days of the Contract Award
and at least 10 days prior to mobilization 10 the site for approval by the Royal
Commission / Client. As a minimum, the plan shall detail the procedures, designated
persons, instructions, and reports to be used to assure site safety for all Contractors,
Sub-contractors, Royal Commission / client personnel, the public, and others on the
site.
15.0 FIRST AID PLAN:
1. The Contractor shall be responsible for the provision of adequate first aid facilities at
the Work Site for all personnel employed or retained by the Contractor or any of its
subcontractors in the performance of the Work. However, other first aid facilities may
be present at or near the Work Site which the Royal Commission may, at its option,
make available for the treatment of such personnel who may be injured or become iii
while engaged in the performance of the Work.
2. In the event any of the Contractor’s personnel or the personnel of a subcontractor
requires the services of an ambulance, hospital or physician, the Contractor or its
subcontractor will promptly pay all charges therefore directly to the providers of such
services.
3. The Contractor shall submit a First aid Plan within 30 calendar days after the
effective date of Notice to Proceed, submit a First Aid Plan for the Royal
Commission's/ Client acceptance.
16.0 SITE CLEANLINESS:
The Contractor shall, at all times, keep the Work Site areas used by the Contractor in a neat,
clean, and safe condition and shall dispose all rubbish and other unwanted materials in specific
areas to be designated by the Client.
17.0 SITE RECORDS:
1. The Contractor shall maintain at the site for the Client / Royal Commission one
record copy of:
a. Mark-up IFC Drawings.
b. Quality Control Inspection Report.
c. Shop Drawings.
d. Contract Specifications.
e. Final As-built Quantities and back-up documentations.
f. Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract.
g. Client / Royal Commission field orders and other written instruction.
h. Approved Shop Drawings, product data, and samples.
i. Field and laboratory test records.
j. Copy of all 3st party subcontracts.
k. Copy of all vendor representative Contracts / reports.
l. QA/QC inspection and test reports.
m. Copy 01all safety test reports.
n. Copy of all permits/ licenses (e.g. environmental, occupancy,
encroachments, etc.).
o. Copy of all pay item/quantity report.
p. Other records required throughout construction by the Client / Royal
Commission.
2. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples:
a. The Contractor shall store documents and samples in the Contractor's field
office apart from documents used for construction. Provide files and racks for
storage of documents, Provide locked cabinet or secure storage space for
samples.
b. The Contractor shall file documents and samples in accordance with
Drawing Index and Specification Table of Contents.
c. The Contractor shall maintain documents in a clean, dry, legible condition
and in good order. Do not use record documents for construction purposes.
d. The Contractor shall make documents and samples available at all times for
inspection by A/E and the Client / Royal Commission, Representative.
e. Record Prints will be reviewed monthly by the Client / Royal Commission.
And A/E. This will be a requirement for issuance of a Certificate for
Payment.
18.0 SITE ESTABLISHMENT:
See relevant specifications on condition of contract/scope of work.
19.0 CONTRACT IMPLIMENTATION:
20.0 PROGRAMME OF WORKS:
The Contractor shall perform the Work in accordance with their submitted Tender Contract
Schedule.
21.0 FACILITIES FOR THE CLIENT TEAM IF ANY:
Materials, equipment and furnishing must be new and adequate for required purpose and must
not violate applicable codes or regulations.
22.0 THE CONTRACTOR FACILITIES SITE APPROVAL:
A. The Contractor shall obtain the Client approval for the construction of temporary
facilities and all such construction shall be in accordance with applicable Royal
Commission regulations for construction and use of field offices, worksites and lay
down areas.
B. The Contractor’s request for temporary facilities shall include a Site plan showing
size, location and use of desired area and location, size and construction details of
temporary buildings. Installations, facilities, utilities and access roads. The request
shall include the requested occupancy date, period of occupancy and special
requirements, if any.
C. No approval shall be granted by the Royal Commission to the Contractor for the
establishment of plants on client property for manufacture of goods available from
Saudi Arabian manufacturers.
22.0 GUARANTEE:
See relevant Specifications.
23.0 QUALITY:
The Contractor shall be responsible for the quality of all his manufactured and purchased
items and the construction work. All workmanship, materials shall be in compliance with the
USC, UMC, SASO, and NEC, Royal Commission Building Code (RCBG), and applicable
Saudi building codes (SBG).
24.0 CERTIFICATES AND SAMPLES:
The Contractor shall submit for all materials the proper and appropriate certification of the
producer or association attesting to the product's compliance with requirements of the contract
documents for the approval of the Client Representative, all documents should read Client
Representative. Samples, catalogue cuts and/or manufacturer brochures will be submitted as
requested by Client Representative. No materials will be incorporated into structure without
prior approval.
26.0 PROGRESS MEETINGS AND REPORTS:
A. Pre-Construction Meeting:
A pre-construction Meeting shall be held within 7 days of Notice to Proceed.
B. General Progress Meetings:
Progress meetings shall be held at weekly intervals or as required by the Client
Representative. The Contractor shall be required to provide all necessary information
required to evaluate actual progress to date and scheduled progress, together with
reports in relation to manpower, plant and equipment, materials procurement,
subcontractors etc., in order to review everything of significance which could affect
progress of the work.
C. Monthly Progress Reports:
The Contractor shall prepare monthly progress reports indicating the relationship
between actual and programmed progress of Work The report shall be in narrative
form and supplemented by drawings, tables and charts to further describe the
progress of the Work. The report shall describe the activities of the Contractor
including:
1. Work accomplished during the month, with updated work schedule.
2. Project problems.
3. Anticipated progress during the next month.
4. Staff assignments.
5. Forecast of future expenditures per month.
6. Status of outstanding items, and any variations or additional works instructed,
and their proposed programmed incorporation with in the works.
27.0 TESTING & COMMISSIONING:
1. The Contractor shall perform all necessary pre--commissioning and
commissioning checks, start-up, initial operation and other tests on the facilities,
installations and equipment to demonstrate that the requirements of the Contract
have been met and that its work has been performed properly and adequately.
2. Following testing, the Contractor shall operate the complete facilities
continuously for a certain period as per manufacturer recommendation and in the
manner envisioned by the design and in accordance with the agreed procedure.
3. The Contractor's nominated Commissioning Team shall be present continuously
during commissioning period and Its equipment and materials shall be available
at all times.
4. The Contractor shall utilize a permanent power supply for the pre—
commissioning and commissioning tests. However. If such arrangement is not
available, the Contractor shall be responsible for providing the necessary
temporary power supplies required to perform the pre-commissioning and
commissioning tests.
28.0 MOBIL.IZATION AND TEMPORARY WORKS:
a. The PC contractor shall be deemed to have allowed for any necessary mobilization
and relocation of such temporary works during the construction period as may be
required in order to complete the permanent works Any proposed change In location
or relocation of any temporary works must be preceded by the submission of a
drawing , indicating such change, to consultant/ owner for his approval.
b. All temporary works shall be construed to standard for similar permanent facilities
and shall comply with the applicable rules, regulations and requirements of local
authorities having jurisdiction.
c. The mobilization should commence Within 14 days after the NTP or letter of
acceptance or date of signing the contract is issued.
d. Within seven (7) calendar days of the date of commencement of the mobilization
period, the PC contractor shall submit for the approval fully dimensioned plans and
detail showing the proposed location and layout on the site of all necessary temporary
buildings including consuRant1owner office accommodations (located apart from PC
contractor’s offices), plant and materials stores, testing laboratory, messing facilities
etc. as such, plans shall also include (but not limited to) the following:
1. Temporary access routes to, from, and upon the site.
2. Temporary fencing, gates, parking and other security requirements.
3. Extent of covered or open areas designated for plant and materials storage
and/or for vehicle parking for PC contractors. Owner’s and consultant's
staff.
4. Refuse storage and collection points.
5. Means of providing fresh water supply, showing location of drinking water
storage tanks, tanker fill points, and lines of distribution about the Site.
6. Means of providing temporary fire protection facilities, showing location of
the firefighting water storage tanks, tanker fill points, pumping and fire hose
stations, and lines of distribution about the site.
7. Location and methods of sewage disposal and surface water drainage.
8. Location and source of temporary power generation, temporary switch
boards etc. for all temporary facilities, and as required providing lighting and
power for the execution of permanent works.
9. Telephone services.
10. Location of site name boards.
29.0 AS BUILT SUBMISSION:
1. Prior to transferring "As-Built" information from the record set of prints to the
originals of the approved drawings issued for construction and, in the case of PC
contracts, before the client! Royal Commission will loan the originals for this purpose,
the Contractor shall submit a sample drawing, prepared by each draftsman nominated
to do the transfers, to demonstrate its ability to comply with the specified quality
standards.
2. Following transfer of the "As-Built" information onto the originals of drawings issued
for construction. the Contractor shall submit them, together with all other related
Contractor's and Manufacturer's, etc. drawings and all other related documents, to the
client for review Each drawing and document shall be certified "As-Built" by the
Contractor's authorized signature in the space provided (see item 29.0 - 3 below). If,
as a result of review, the client finds the drawings or documents do not comply with
this specification they will be returned for Contractor's proper compliance and
resubmittal, Upon acceptance they will be signed as such by the client's/ Royal
Commission Project field Engineer, or his delegate, in the space provided (see item
29.0 -3 below) and the initial Acceptance, Partial Initial Acceptance of Beneficial
Occupancy (as applicable) process can proceed.
3. Each drawing and document shall be stamped, or otherwise noted, as
follows:
FINAL ACCPETANCE AS-BUILT

Project Field Engineer ------ Date -----------------------------
Contractor --------------------- Date -----------------------------
30.0 MOCK-UP SAMPLE:

The PC contractor shall prepare mock-up sample of each type of Villas to show all permanent
works/ dimensions, sizes and type of finishing in order to be inspected by client/consultant for
approval. All comments given on such mockup has to be implemented on all other units
including the mockup unit. Mock up units will be the reference for all other units.
31.0 PERMITS:
The PC contractor shall do all acts and things necessary, including following-up on behalf of
the Client with the concerned public, authorities in order to obtain the required clearance
certificates and approvals from all the services providers as pre requisites.
The PC contractor shall be responsible for obtaining all permits necessary to complete the
works The PC contractor shall identify an individual who with proper approval, introduction
and coordination by the owner, will interface with the Saudi Arabian authorities. In addition,
this Individual will coordinate the PC contractor effort in identifying permit requirements,
obtaining applications, communicating the requirements, compiling the required design
documents, submitting the applications and following through with the authorities. The
individual shall be subject to the owner's (Client) approval. Permit application, processing and
approvals take significant time and effort to complete The PC contractor is responsible for
planning and allowing sufficient duration for such permits and approvals 10support the project
master schedule.
0102 QUALITY CONTROL:
1.01 GENERAL:
A. In addition to the "General Obligations" as mentioned in the Form of Agreement and
Condition of Contract or these documents, the Contractor shall be responsible for
establishing and executing a Quality Control Program.
B. A Quality Control Program is the procedure for the continuous process of inspection;
testing and documentation of the work being performed in order 10 verify that the
work has been accomplished in accordance with the standards set down by the
Drawings and Specifications. The Contractor shall furnish all necessary staff and
facilities to implement and maintain the program.
C. Within 30 days of the Notice to Proceed the Contractor shall submit a Quality
Control Program to the Owner (Client) for review and approval. The Program shall
be complete and contain all the elements indicated below. The Quality Control
Program, when approved, shall became an Integral part of the Contract.
1. 2 POLlCY:
A. It is the responsibility Of the Contractor, under the provisions of the Bid
Documents, to furnish all necessary quality control, inspection and testing
personnel, equipment, and facilities to support the program. To be effective,
the program must provide for:
1. Adequate testing facilities.
2. Qualified personnel in adequate numbers and separate from
construction line reporting, to monitor, test and evaluate work
performed.
3. Clearly defined acceptability criteria for all work performed.
4. Responsibility and authority of quality control and inspection
personnel to reject unsatisfactory work and have in corrected.
5. Adequate numbers of workmen shall be provided with necessary
skills and well versed in their applied craft, properly informed 01
the methods and techniques required to execute the work to high
standards. In acceptance or rejection of any work the Client will
make no allowance for lack of skill on the part of the workmen
used by the Contractor.
1. 3 QUALlTY STANDARDS:
A. Relevant catena setting forth the required standards for materials and
workmanship are given in the Contract Documents. The Contractor's
Quality Control Program shall take lull account of the requirements of such
standards and criteria.
1. 4 WORKMANSHIP:
Instigate and maintain procedures to ensure that persons performing at site are skilled
and knowledgeable in methods and craftsmanship in completed work. Remove and
replace work which does not comply with workmanship standards as specified and as
recognized in the construction industry for applications indicated. Remove and
replace other work damaged or deteriorated by faulty workmanship or its
replacements.
All work to be carried out in accordance to manufacture's instruction, British
standards or similar approval equal.
1. 5 ORGANIZATION:
A. A typical Quality Control Program would be divided into two parts, On-site
and Off-site. The Off- site Program will consist of the Procurement of the
material of specified quality and standard and as they arrive On-site for
inspection, protection, storage, handling and installation in the Permanent
Work. The On-site Program of the Quality Control is further divided into:
1. Testing – to include all laboratory and field materials testing
services; and.
2. Inspection - to include all construction inspection.
The Quality Control supervisor will maintain records of all tests and
inspection for Owner's (Client) review.
B. Contractor shall designate one of his key personnel as Quality Control
Supervisor. It shall be the sole duty and responsibility of the quality Control
Supervisor and his staff to organize, coordinate, conduct and otherwise
implement the Quality Control Plan as submitted by the Contractor and
approved by the Owner (Client).
1. 6 SUBMITTALS:
A. Quality Control Program:
1. Completed procedures for each element of the outline will be
submitted for review and shall be implemented before any new
items or work begin.
B. Certificates of Tests:
Daily records of On-site testing and inspection shall be kept on forms of
approved format. Test results shall be certified by the appropriate person on
the Contractor’s quality control team. All test certincates and inspection
records shall be clearly identified with the appropriate part of the Permanent
works to which they refer, and they shall be submitted to the Owner.
Certificates of test from suppliers or other of Off-site testing agencies shall
also be clearly identified with the appropriate part of the works to which
they refer and shall be submitted to the Owner as soon as they are available,
and in any case not later than the date at which the materials to which they
refer are delivered to the Work site.
C. Work Reports:
Once weekly, within 24 hours of the time of the last inspection or test
conducted, the Contractor shall submit to the Owner, in an approved form.
a report of all quality control Inspection and test performed over the
previous seven days. The weekly reports shall include all work performed by
the Contractor, tests performed with applicable sample numbers, and
inspection reports for both supplier's shops and the Permanent Works All
test data shall be summarized in tabular and/or graphical form in a manner
which best illustrates the trends, specific results and specification
requirements Full explanation shall be provided to show that action was
taken (i.e., rejection of the work, re-test, etc.) A separate report shall contain
forecast of work to be performed during the next 7 days. Hold points shall
be identified.
D. Inventory Records:
The Contractor shall keep detailed and up-to-date records in an approved
form of materials and equipment on order, delivered, found faulty, lost
during the work or to be surplus to requirements. The Owner shall have
access to these records at all times, Summary inventory records shall be
submitted to the Owner once a month.
E. Additional Quality Control Submittals:
Additional submittals shall be made as required in the contract documents
and the approved Quality Control Programs.
F. Submittal Standards:
Contractor drawings and data submittals shall be in accordance with other
applicable sections of Bid Documents. The Contractor’s submittals shall be
carefully organized so that the content can be read easily. All drafting work
shall be legible, accurate and clear. On all Contractors’ drawings, the title
block must be complete before being submitted to the Owner for review.
G. Material Schedule:
The Contractor shall prepare and submit to the client for material schedule
and get approval before commissioning work.
H. Materials - Inspection:
Unless otherwise expressly provided on the drawings or in any of the other
Contract Documents, only new materials and equipment shall be
incorporated In the Works, All materials and equipment furnished by the
Contractor to be incorporated in the Work shall be subject to inspection by
Client Representative, and to enable him to give approval. The Contractor
shall submit complete maternal or equipment manufacturer information In a
formal shop drawing submittal. All inspections, certificates, records and data
for installed equipment shall be submitted or performed in accordance with
Royal Commission / Client inspection Procedures.
I. Method of statement schedule:
Contractor to be provide method of statement schedule for each activity
covering all disciplines of projects during execution for approval by Client.
J. Key Staff:
The Contractor shall submit to the client for key staff detail and get approval
before commissioning work.
K. Site Management Plan:
The Contractor shall submit to the client for Site management plan detail
and get approval before commissioning work.
L. Site survey on taking possession:
Lines, Grades and Measurements:
a. The Contractor shall deploy the required site supervision team as per
the work requirements and acceptance of the Client.
Contractor shall establish all lines, elevations, reference marks, batter
boards, etc. needed by Contractor during the progress of the Work, and
from time to time to verify such marks by instrument or other
appropriate means.
Contractor shall deploy a qualified surveying team capable enough to
carry out Works related to all surveying Works (specifically having
thorough know how of coordinates, as most of the Work is done with
coordinates).
b. Client Representative shall be permitted at all times to check the lines,
elevations. reference marks, batter boards, etc., set by Contractor, who
shall correct any errors in lines, elevations, reference marks, batter
boards, etc., disclosed by such check.
Such a check shall not be construed to be an approval of Contractor's
work and shall not relieve or diminish in any way the responsibility of
Contractor for the accurate and satisfactory construction and completion
of the entire Work.
c. Contractor shall make all measurements and check all dimensions
necessary for the proper construction of the Work called for by the
Drawings and Specifications. During the execution of the Work,
Contractor shall make all necessary measurements to prevent errors in
the Work.
d. Contractor shall provide at his own expense batter boards, forms,
materials, and labor as may be required or directed. If Contractor for
any reason removes, or permits to remove, any reference marks
established, the replacement of such reference marks shall be set at
Contractor’s expense.
e. Contractor shall furnish to Client Representative such assistance as may
be needed for setting or checking lines and grades and making other
measurements In connection with the Work.
M. Inspection test Plan:
The Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Client for approval within
thirty (30) days of the Notice of Award an Inspection and Testing Plan
covering all of the Contractor’s work activities both on and off the Work
Site, The plan shall be in two parts covering off Work Site and on Work Site
activities respectively. The Contractor, with the Client's on or written
approval, may delay the submission of the portion of the plan covering on-
work, Site activities to a date thirty days prior to commencement of such
activities if Work Site activities are not scheduled to commence for a
minimum of six months after the Notice of Award.
The Inspection and Testing Plan shall include. But not be limited to, a full
and complete description of each item or part of the Work to be inspected or
tested, the nature and frequency of the inspection and testing. The type and
size of samples to be taken, If any, the means of recording the inspection and
testing data, the name and specific responsibility of any proposed testing or
inspection agency and all other information necessary or required to fully
describe the inspection and testing function to be performed for the Work,
The Contractor's Inspection and Testing Plan when approved by the Client
shall be used for the inspection and testing of the Work and shall be revised
and resubmitted for the Client's approval whenever the Contractor wishes to
change the sequence, method or nature of the Inspection and testing or the
sequence, method or nature of the inspection and testing differs from the
current approved Contract Schedule and Scope of the Work. Neither the
Client's approval of or failure to approve the Contractor's Inspection and
Testing Plan shall detract from the Contractors' responsibility for the
Inspection, testing and performance of the Work as provided for In the
Contract. Such Inspection and Testing program shall be applicable for the
Contractor manufactured items. Vendor supplied items and on-Me
construction.
N. As-Built Records:
A. Each document except drawings shall be labeled "AS-BUILT' in 6 mm
high printed letters and drawings in 12 mm high printed letters, A
rubber stamp may be utilized for this purpose.
B. Information shall be recorded concurrently with construction progress.
C. The Contractor shall not permanently conceal any work until required
information has been recorded.
D. Drawing Issued for Construction: The Contractor shall legibly
mark and record actual construction of the following:
1. Levels of various elements of foundations relative to the Client
Datum.
2. Horizontal and vertical locations of underground and above
ground utilities and appurtenances in client Grid Coordinates and
relative to the client Datum.
3. Location of internal utilities, structural elements and appurtenances
concealed in the construction, referenced to visible and accessible
features of the structure.
4. Final coordinates of building corners.
5. Field changes in power and telecommunication single line
diagrams, riser diagrams, etc.
6. Field changes of dimensions and details issued and/or drawing
clarification notices.
7. Revision authorized by contract change order (CDD) if not already
incorporated into an updated revision of the drawing.
8. Delails not on original Contract Drawings.
9. Modifications or substitutions of details which in each case. by
reason of having no significant impact on design, construction or
Intended operations and maintenance of the facility. Have been
given "Code I" review status by the Royal Commission/client.
E. Specifications: The Contractor shall legibly mark each Section
to record the following:
1. Manufacturer, trade name, catalog number, supplier of each
product and item of equipment actually installed.
2. Revisions authorized by Contract Change Order (CCO), or
equivalent products and equipment or substitutions which in
each case have been given "Code I" review status by the Royal
Commission/client.
3. Other items not originally or not fully specified, or which were
originally given a performance-type specification requiring
specialized technical implementation.
F. Contractor’s Drawings: The Contractor shall prepare "As-Built"
drawings to record the following, as applicable to the Contract, but not
limited to:
1. Underground conditions found as a result of site investigations
and any changes made to the original conditions.
2. Location, elevation, rake and orientation of each substructure
element of foundations.
3. Locations, elevations, sizes, material and function of all buried
utilities uncovered during excavations and any adjustments,
changes or connections made to them.
4. Interfacing With previously existing utilities and the
coordination of utilities constructed, where shown as separate
systems in the drawings issued for construction. These shall
include the following system components as relevant: sewers,
storm water drainage (both surface and underground), subsoil
drainage, potable water, irrigation water and control, power,
telecommunication and CATV ducts and cables, street lighting
and traffic Signal cables.
5. Coordination of surface features, where shown separately in
drawings issued for construction, and interfacing with work
done or designed for adjacent contracts.
6. Shop drawings of precast concrete components showing cast in
attachment and lifting devices, other fabrication details
(including date cast and identification marks), erection details
and the final location of each component.
7. Pre-stressing details (including system used, ducting,
anchorages, grouting) with recorded results of elongations,
loads and other pertinent information.
8. Systems diagrams, instrumentation diagrams, locations,
installation devices and connections to other unities for HVAC,
and other items of mechanical equipment.
9. Schedules relating mechanical equipment designations,
manufacturer, brand, model, capacity, serial and other
identifying numbers to installed locations.
10. Electrical equipment ratings and device/equipment numbers,
power transformer impedances, C.T. ratios, where not shown
in drawings issued for construction.
11. Schematics with electrical, telecommunication and/or
Instrumentation Device/equipment numbers, wire and cable
numbers, terminal numbers and special sequencing or logic
descriptions, where not shown in drawings issued for
construction.
12. Above and below ground telecommunication cable routing
with box and equipment numbers and locations. Connections
with trunk identification and assignment. Cable pair loading
coils.
G. The Contractor shall record changes in engineering calculations
resulting from changes in the work.
H. Items recorded as specified above shall be cross-referred between one
type of document to another so that, for example, changes recorded in
drawings can be readily tracked to equivalent changes in specifications
or other documents and vice -versa. Contractor's and manufacturer's
drawings shall be cross-referred to the marked-up drawings issued for
construction.
I. Reference documents:
Relevant references may be cited from the pertinent individual
Specification Sections.
J. RISK ASSESSMEN:T
Risk assessment consists of an objective evaluation of all potential risks
in which assumptions and uncertainties are clearly considered and
presented.
1. 7 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT:
The Contractor shall supply all samples for testing, and consumable materials used in
testing procedures and all testing equipment.
1. 8 MATERIAL TRANSPORT, HANDLING AND STORAGE PROCEDURES:
Except as otherwise provided in the Contract the Contractor shall deliver to the Work
Site, receive, unload, store in a secure place, and deliver from storage to the
construction area all materials and equipment required for the performance of the
Work. The Contract storage facilities and methods of storing shall meet the Client's
approval. Materials and equipment subject to damage, degradation or spoilage shall be
stored in a suitable enclosure provided by the Contractor, The Contractor shall keep
complete and accurate records, for the Client's inspection, of all materials and
equipment received at the Work site, stored, and issued for use in the performance of
the Work.
1. 9 EXECUTION:
A. The Quality Control Program approved by the Client shall be followed
throughout the performance of the Contract unless specific approvals of
instructions to the contrary are received from the Owner.
B. The Contractor shall at all times have one or more persons On site
charged with specific responsibility for quality control and no other
responsibility, Such person or persons shall be vested with authority to
reject work already carried out when such work does not meet the
specified standards.
1. 10 INSPECTION:
Access shall be provided for inspection of the works by the Owner at all times, but
such inspections shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities in this
connection.
1. 11 ELEMENTS OF OFF-SITE AND ON-SITE QUALITY CONTROL
PLANS:
The Following list provides guideline format for the types of elements that must be
Included in a Site Quality Control Plan It is not intended to be all inclusive but rather
to give the Contractor a clear picture of the types of elements to be covered.
Contractor may use his own format and grouping as long as the required elements are
covered.
1. 12 GENERAL ITEMS:
A. Procurement and Manufacturing Control:
1. Control of:
a. Manufacturing.
b. Material and Equipment Supplies.
c. Sub –Contractors.
2. Receiving control.
3. Inventory control.
4. Storage and Maintenance during construction.
B. Survey Control.
C. Testing Laboratory Control.
D. Calibration of construction tools and equipment.
E. Documentation and record storage.
1. 13 DETAILED JTEMS:
A. Civil:
1. Earthwork:
a. General Excavation.
b. Backfill/compaction.
c. Trenching d. Materials Testing and Inspection.
2. Concrete:
a. Forms Material
b. Rebar Control &
c. Embedded Materials in place
d. Concrete Inspection
3. Structural and Miscellaneous Steel:
a. Receiving.
b. Pre-erection.
c. Erection complete d. Painting.
d. Painting.
4. Other Civil:
a. Pre-cast concrete.
b. Masonry.
c. Manholes.
5. Architectural:
a. Floor & wall finishes, Roofing and Cladding.
b. Roofs.
c. Doors, Windows, Louvers, Vents, Kitchen & Bath fittings, etc.
d. Rendering (Plastering).
B. Mechanical Piping (Exposed and Buried):
1. Pipes:
a. Materials.
b. Supports, Hangers.
c. Coatings.
d. Installation inspections.
e. Testing.
2. Valves.
3. Mechanical Equipment:
a. Storage and Maintenance.
b. Installation and Inspections.
c. Testing.
4. Welding.
5. Insulation.
C. Electrical:
1. Equipment:
a. Storage and Maintenance.
b. Installation and Inspection.
c. Testing.
2. Conduit.
3. Cable.
4. Connections.
5. Ducts.
1. 14 HOLD POINT INSPECTIONS:
A. "Hold Point" is defined as a part of the work that cannot proceed until it has
been inspected and certified by signature of the proper authority. Hold points can
be either Contractor "Hold Points", requiring the Contractor Q C. Manager's
signature or Owner "Hold Points" requiring a signature by a representative of the
Owner. The format of the "Hold Point" document shall include at what stage of
the work "Hold Point" is required, description of the work to be inspected,
appropriate pay item reference and shall be approved by the Owner.
1. 15 MATERIAL SUBMITTALS:
A. Submittals shall be made for all materials to be incorporated into the permanent
works as required by various sections of this Specification.
B. Within 30 days of the Notice to Proceed the Contractor shall submit a Material
Submittal Program to the Owner for review and approval. The Program shall be
completed and contain all the materials referred to above.
C. Wherever possible the Contractor shall submit a minimum of three (3)
alternative vendors for each category of material.
D. The Contractor shall allow a period of ten days for review of materials submittals
by the Owner/Owner's Representative.
E. Should the Contractor intend to propose the use of any alternative materials to
those specified in the Contract Documents, then the Contractor must provide a
detailed list of all such materials together with all relevant product data etc., and
a justification for this proposed substitution for the Owners approval.
F. All material submittals are to be supported technical literature which should
include as a minimum manufacturer's instruction, Q.A. certificates, etc.
G. Contractor to allow for material sample library on site of all submittals, including
technical literature.
H. Site condition Execute periodic cleaning to keep building, site, and adjacent
properties free of accumulations of waste materials, debris, rubbish, and
windblown debris resulting from construction operations, trucks not taking dirt
on the public roads, etc. and all to comply with local environmental laws.
I. Section on the shop drawings and approval process required.
===End of Section ===
0103 TEMPORARY FACILITIES
1. 1 GENERAL:
2.0 1 Description:
A. This section specifies Contractor's temporary services and, office and support facilities,
including utilities, construction and support facilities.
Provide facilities ready for use, maintain, expand and modify as needed. Remove
when no longer needed.
2.0 2 General Requirements:
A. Keep facilities clean and neat Operate in a safe and efficient manner. Take necessary
fire prevention measures.
Do not overload, or permit facilities to interfere with progress.
Do not allow hazardous, uncertainty conditions to develop or persist on site.
B. Inspection: Arrange for Client Representative to inspect and test each temporary
utility before use Obtain required approval and permits.
C. Cost or use changes for Contractor's temporary facilities are not chargeable to Client
and will not be accepted as a basis of claim for a change order.
2.0 3 Reference Standards:
A. IBC, International Building Code – 2003.
B. IPC, International Plumbing Code.
C. NFPA, National Fire Protection Association.
D. NEC, National Electric Code.
E. NEMA, National Electric Manufacturers Association.
F. NESC, National Electric Safety Code.
2.0 4 Submittals:
A. Submit reports of tests, inspections and similar procedures performed on temporary utilities.
Submit a schedule showing implementation and termination of each temporary utility within
15 days of commencement of the work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.0 1 Sanitary Facilities:
A. Include temporary toilets, wash facilities and drinking water fixtures, Comply with the
regulations and health codes of SASO / Royal Commission / RC Sanitary Code for type,
number, location, operation and maintenance of fixtures. Provide toilet tissues, paper towels,
and disposable materials for each facility. Provide covered waste containers for used materials.
2.0 2 Toilets:
A. Install self-contained toilet units, properly vented and fully enclosed. Toilets shall be in
accordance with the applicable reference as listed in Section 103 "Reference Standards".
2.0 3 Drinking Water:

A. Provide drinking water units.
2.0 4 Project Sign:
A. Construct, install and maintain project signs as specified details
2.0 5 Contractor's Field Office & Accommodation Facilities:
A. The Contractor shall provide and maintain a temporary field office, and support facilities in a
location designated by Client for his own use during the period of construction. The office
shall be located where it will not interfere with the progress of the work. In charge of this office
there shall be a competent superintendent of the Contractor. The office and all facilities shall
conform to the applicable Codes listed in Section 1.03 "Reference Standards
2.0 6 Client's Field Offices:

A. Scope:
Contractor shall provide and maintain during the project duration, on land provided by Client,
office facilities including all required support services and facilities for Client personnel and/or
Client designated personnel to a level of quality generally acceptable to the construction
industry as determined by the Client Representative. The contractor should propose to the
Client Representative's approval specifications for constructing the site offices. Temporary Site
Facilities shall be provided prior to commencement of construction until Project Completion
and Commissioning,
B. Temporary Site Facilities shall consist of:
1. Office facilities at site.
2. Shaded Parking Area.
3. Broadway vehicle.
4. New brand office.
Once the Contractor Provided Site Facilities are no longer required under this Contract,
and Client has so agreed in writing. Contractor shall remove all such Contractor Provided
Site Facilities and restore the land to as-found condition, unless Client and Contractor
have otherwise mutually agreed in writing.
C. Services:
Contractor shall provide the following services:

1. Contractor shall furnish all offices with marker board, waste paper basket, in/out trays and
other standard desktop equipment.
2. Contractor shall provide the kitchenette of Client offices and the Client designated personnel
with cold/hot bottled drinking water facility, refrigerator, and kettle.
3. Contractor shall supply complete office stationery to the Client offices. Stationery shall be
supplied, throughout the Contract duration, in sufficient amounts and quantities for the
numbers of person required.
This is to include, but not be limited to, paper for photocopiers (with paper selection of A4/A3
and letter sizes), facsimile and printers, writing pads, pens, pencils, in/out trays, staplers, tape,
rubber bands, erasers, 2 and 3 hole punchers, files and folders and other accessories and
supplies for the listed office equipment.
4. Contractor shall be responsible for the complete kitchenette furnishing and to provide two (2)
office boys.
5. Contractor shall be responsible to supply complete sanitary requirements for the toilet facilities
and to be kept clean and provided with all necessary toilet paper, towels, cleaning and
detergents agents, refreshing at all time.
6. Contractor shall provide first aid facilities within the offices, for the first line treatment of
Client designated personnel.
D. Site Facilities Plan:
As part of the Project Execution Plan, Contractor shall prepare for Client review and approval,
a comprehensive site facilities plan which details all Contractor provided site facilities and the
procedures to be used to maintain and administer them. This plan shall address, at a
minimum, the following:
 Plot plans and building layouts.
 Specific descriptions of furniture and equipment.
 Proposed typical menus.
 Water supply and handling.
 Fire protection.
 Security.
 Medical care and evacuation plan.
 Sanitation.
 Refuse handling.
 Solid waste land fill and construction debris site. (Prior approval is required by
Client).
Contractor will present this plan to Client within fourteen (14) days from effective
date of the Contract to allow for Client review and for Contractor to respond to any
comments or recommendations that may be made by Client
E. Standard:
1. Contractor Provided Site Facilities shall be built and operated consistent with all Labor
and Workmen's Laws in the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia and applicable Royal Commission
RC standards.
2. Air conditioning with individual controls to maintain temperature between 70° and 75° F.
F. Contractor shall provide electrical power, 400/230V, 3 phase, 60 Hz as needed, continuous
communications facilities (phone, fax, and internet).
G. The contractor shall provide in an approval and as a self-contained compound, a company
consultants project office with 160 m2 of good quality air conditioned office, complete with
toilets, kitchen facility, telephone, tax, computer with printers A3, Wi-Fi internet, office
supplies, copy machine (A3) and complete furniture's.
1. Project manager offices with small meeting room with complete facilities, computer,
furniture, cabinet.... Etc.
2. Senior Civil Engineer (2) with complete facilities.
3. Meeting room for 10 persons with complete facilities.
4. Toilets (2).
5. Secretary section with complete facilities and attached with small room for
documentation store.
6. Guest sitting area.
7. Engineers hall for 10 persons with complete facilities.
8. Sample room for sample material (36m2).
9. Tea room.
10. The Contractor is to provide 1 no four-wheel drive Toyota Prada or equivalent to
SAUDI ARAMCO for site transportation for the project duration
2.0 7 Fire and Safety Standards:

A. Fire-fighting equipment shall be in accordance with NFPA. Provide pressurized 2-1/2 U.S.
gallon water extinguishers for ordinary combustibles. A fixed fire protection shall be
provided for kitchen hood.
B. Fire Detection: Provide fire alarm system according to IBC 907.2.10.3.
2.0 8 Health and Sanitation Standards:
A. Provide / Refer to the Contract Schedules for requirements pertaining to housing facilities,
dining and food handling facilities, and waste management.
2.0 9 Medical Facilities:
A. Provide / Refer to the Contract Schedules
2.0 10 Temporary Electricity, Lighting and Communications:
A. The Contractor shall provide, supply, install and maintain service required for power,
lighting and communications.
B. Provide adequate artificial lighting for all areas of work when natural light is not adequate
for work and for areas accessible to the public.
C. Lighting and power of the Contractor Camp, accommodation and client offices shall
conform to the applicable Standards listed in Section 1.03 "Reference Standards" and all
Royal Commission /RC Standards under "P" index.
2.0 11 Non-Electric Utilities:
All non-electric utilities supply, installation, testing, flushing and disinfection shall be the
responsibility of the Contractor and shall be in accordance with the applicable references listed
in Section 1.03 "Reference Standards".
2.0 12 Equipments:
A. HVAC Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system, provide
vented, self-contained, liquid-propane-gas or fuel-oil heaters with individual space
thermostatic control.
1. Permanent HVAC System: If Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system
for temporary use during construction, provide filter with Minimum Efficiency
Ratina Value (MERV) of 8 at each return air grille in system and remove at end
of construction.

PART 3 – EXECUTION:
1.0 1 Operation:
A. Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. Limit availability to intended use to
minimize abuse. Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal.
1.0 2 Termination and Remova!

A. Coordinate with Client to remove each temporary facility when the need has ended
Temporary facilities are the property of the Contractor.
1.0 3 Project Identification and Temporary Signs:
A. Prepare project identification signs as specified standard detail and install where indicated.
Prepare signs to provide directional information to construction personnel and visitors The
signs shall be erected in locations as directed by Client Representative,
1.0 4 Environmental Protection:
A. Operate temporary facilities and conduct construction by methods that comply with
environmental regulations to minimize the possibility that air and subsoil might be
contaminated or polluted.
1.0 5 Installation / General:
A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum
interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by
progress of the Work.
=== End of section ===
0104 TEMPORARY FENCING AND BARRICADES
Part 1 – General:
1.0 1 Temporary Fences and Barricades:
A. Erect temporary fencing to prevent unauthorized personnel from entering construction
sites and Temporary Construction Facilities. Maintain the Fencing for the duration of
construction operations.
B. Erect fencing around the site perimeters.
C. Temporary fencing shall be as per the relevant authorities requirements and as approved
by the Client Representative.
Part 2 & 3 - Products & Execution:

As per SBC/RC Standards & Client Representative at site instruction.
- End of section -
1.0 5 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION AND SIGNS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.0 1 Requirements:
A. Furnish, install and maintain project identification sign.
B. Provide temporary on-site informational signs to identify key elements of construction facilities.
C. Remove signs upon completion of construction.
D. Allow no other signs to be displayed.
1.0 2 Related Requirements:
A. Section 0103 - Temporary Construction Facilities
1.0 3 Project Identification Sign:

A. Contractor shall provide at each separate approved work location a sign indicating the presence of the
individual Contractor, Only one sign will be allowed Company name, address, logo, and Client project
and contract number. The sign shall be in Arabic and English. The Contractor shall submit the design
and location for approval prior to installation.
Contractor shall maintain the sign in good repair and condition, and upon completion of the Work
shall remove and dispose of the sign. Except for warnings and other signs required by law and
ordinance, Contractor shall place no other signs or advertisements on the premises without the written
consent of the Client Representative.
B. Graphic Design Style of Lettering, and Colors: As designated by Client Representative.
C. Erect on the site at a lighted location of high public visibility, adjacent to main entrance to site, as
approved by Client Representative.
1.0 4 Informational Signs:
A. Painted signs with painted lettering:

1. Size of signs and lettering as required by regulatory agencies, or as appropriate to usage.
2. Colors as required by regulatory agencies, otherwise of uniform colors throughout Project.
B. Erect at appropriate locations to provide required information.
1.0 5 Quality Assurance:

A. Sign Painter: Professional Experience in type of work required.
B. Finishes Painting Adequate to resist weathering and fading for scheduled construction period.
0105 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION AND SIGNS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.0 1 Sign Materials
A. Structure and Framing: May be new or used, wood or metal, in sound condition structurally
adequate to work, and suitable for specified finish.
B. Sign Surfaces. Exterior softwood plywood with medium density overlay, standard large sizes to
minimize joints.
Thickness: As required by standards to span framing members, to provide even, smooth surface
without waves or buckles.
C. Rough hardware: Galvanized.
D. Paint Exterior quality.
1. Use Bulletin colors for graphics.
2. Colors for structure, framing, sign surfaces and graphics: Representative As selected by Client
Representative.
0105 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION AND SIGNS

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.0 1 Project Identification Sign:

A. Paint exposed surfaces of supports, framing and surface material; one coat of primer and
one coat of exterior paint.
B. Paint graphics in styles, sizes, and colors selected
3.0 2 Information Signs:

A. Paint Exposed Surfaces: One coat of primer and one coat of exterior paint.
B. Paint graphics in styles, sizes, and colors selected.
C. Install at a height for optimum visibility, on ground mounted poles or attached to
temporary structural surfaces
3.0 3 Maintenance:
A. Maintain signs and supports in a neat, clean condition; repair damages to structure,
framing or sign.
B. Relocate informational signs as required by progress of the work.

3.0 4 Removal:
A. Remove temporary signs, framing, supports, and foundations at completion of project
=== End of Section ===
0106 CLOSE-OUT REQUIREMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
01 Requirements Included:
A. Close-out requirements include those general requirements in preparation for Initial
Acceptance, final payment and normal termination of the contract. Specific requirements for
individual units of work are specified in the technical sections of these specifications.
1.0 2 Record Document Submittals:

A. Immediately prior to the time of Initial Acceptance, complete the record documents in
accordance with the requirements of "Record Documents", and submit to Client for
acceptance.
B. The record documents are as follows:
1. Record Drawings
2. As-Built Drawings
3. Record Specifications
4. Record Shop Drawing Information
5. Record Miscellaneous Submittals
6. Record Samples
C. The documents shall be organized in a logical order, bound or filed, ready for continued
use and reference.
D. Immediately prior to the time of Initial Acceptance, Client will meet with the Contractor
at the site, and will determine which of the record samples maintained by the Contractor
during the progress of the work are to be submitted. Any samples not required by Client
shall be properly disposed of by the Contractor.
1.0 3 Operating and Maintenance Instructions:

A. Arrange for each installer of work requiring continuing maintenance or operation to meet with
the operating personnel at the project site to provide basic instructions needed for proper
operation and maintenance of the entire work.
B. Include instructions by manufacturer's representatives where installers are not expert in the
required procedures.
C. Review maintenance manuals, record documentation, tools, spare parts and materials,
lubricants, fuels, identification system, control sequences, hazards, cleaning and similar
procedures and facilities
D. Review maintenance and operations in relation with applicable guarantees, warranties,
agreements to maintain, bonds, and similar continuing commitments,
1.0 4 Final Cleaning:
A. Special cleaning for specific units of work shall be as specified in the various technical specifications.
B. Provide final cleaning of the work at the time indicated, consisting of cleaning each surface or unit
of work to the normal "clean" condition expected for a first-class building cleaning and
maintenance program comply with manufacturer's instructions for cleaning operations As a
minimum, the following are examples of the cleaning levels required.
1. Remove labels which are not required as permanent labels
2. Clear exposed hard-surfaced finishes, including metals, concrete, painted surfaces, special
coatings, and similar surfaces, to a dirt free condition, free of dust, stains, films and similar
noticeable distracting substances. Except as otherwise indicated, avoid the disturbances of
natural weathering of exterior surfaces Restore reflective surfaces to original condition.
3. Remove debris and surfaces dust from limited-access spaces including trenches, equipment
vaults and similar spaces.
4. Clean project site including landscape development areas of litter and foreign substances.
Sweep paved areas to a broom-clean condition; remove stains, petro chemical spills and
other foreign deposits. Rake grounds which are neither planted nor paved to a smooth,
even textured surface.
C. Except as otherwise indicated or requested by Client, remove temporary protective devices and
facilities which were installed during the course of the work to protect previously completed work
during the remainder of the construction period.
D. Comply with safety standards and governing regulations for cleaning operations. Do not burn
waste materials at the site, nor bury debris or excess materials on the property, nor discharge
volatile or other harmful or dangerous materials into drainage system. Remove waste materials from
the site and dispose of.
E. Green Housekeeping: Provide documentation that all cleaning products and janitorial paper
products meet requirements of relevant authorities in KSA.
1.0 5 Continuing Inspection:

A. Where required by special guarantee, warranties, agreements to maintain, workmanship bonds
and similar continuing commitments, comply with requests to participate in inspections at the
end of each time period of such continuing commitments.
1.0 6 Delivery Turnover Inventory Requirements

A. Upon product delivery the Contractor shall:
1. Conduct tests and operational checks to ensure serviceability of property to be transferred.
2. Verify cleanliness and overall condition as acceptable.
3. Prepare the inventory list on form furnished by Client.
4. Coordinate with Client to obtain forms, and to ensure completeness and accuracy of t
TRANSFER/CUSTODY document.
5. Designate a contractor representative authorized to sign the TRANSFER/CUSTOI
document upon completion of the turnover inventory.
Note: Property considered to be unclean, unserviceable and/or unfit for use will be rejected
by Client.

Part 2 – Products:
2.01 Green Housekeeping:
A. Utilize cleaning products that meet the requirements of Saudi or International Standards.

Part 3 - General (Not Used).
0107 ADDITIONAL CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS
1.0 General:
This section summarizes some of the major Contractor responsibilities in constructability, construction
planning and work permitting activities. The Contractor is to provide constructability procedures and
methods for construction planning in accordance with the Contract Documents Main items affecting
constructability and construction planning are indicated in Table 1 below.
Table 1 Constructability and Construction Planning Items

Sequence of Installation
Construction Schedule
Material Site Required Dates
Work Breakdown Structure
Construction Execution Strategy
Drawing construction strategy
Health, Safety & Environmental Plan
Work Permitting and site access plan
2.0 Constructability:
Constructability Requirements contractor shall implement and conduct constructability reviews during the
project. It is the Contractor's responsibility to assess and confirm all construction constructability aspects
3.0 Not Used.
4.0 Not Used.

DIVISION 2
SITEWORK
0201 Survey work.
0202 Earthwork - including Excavation, Filling and Grading.
0203 Boundary Wall.
0204 Pavement Sub-Base and Aggregate Base.
0205 Underground Piping and Site Utility Pits.
0206 Pre-construction Termite Control.
0207 Interlocking block paving/ mosaic tile.
0208 Curbs.
0209 Landscape.
0201 SURVEY WORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.0 1 Description:
A. Work in this Section includes, but is not limited to, furnishing survey crew, setting LL reference points
and bench marks, vertical and horizontal setting out of all building foundations, fences, grading, trench
work, utility installations, roadways, asphalt paving walkways and other works forming part of the
Contract.
B. Work is to be performed in accordance with the conditions as per standards.
1.0 2 Related Work:

A. Section 0201 – Earthwork.
B. Section 0203 - Pavement Sub-Base and Aggregate Base.
C. Section 0301 - Concrete Reinforcement.
D. Section 0302 - Concrete Work.
1.0 3 Contractor Responsibility:

A. Contractor responsibility includes, but is not limited to:
1. Performing all surveys for the duration of the Contract to ensure that levels an locations conform to the
design Drawings, and shop/working drawings approved by clien Representative.
2. Making formal requests to Client for data on survey control points related to the project prie to
construction.
3. Verifying the figures on all Client furnished data and documents before laying out the Work contractor
shall be responsible for any errors or inaccuracies resulting from his failure to do so.
4. Informing Client Representative if the validity of any survey monument is threatened, ar takes the necessary
steps as outlined in this Specification.
5. Obtaining approval of Client Representative if any survey control points will be disturbed destroyed by
construction activities.
6. Maintaining all Client established reference points and bench marks at all times duri construction. Under
the direction of Client Representative, replace any survey monumen damaged or disturbed by construction
activity.
7. Preparing accurate as-built survey and submission of drawings.
8. Contractor shall submit a survey report after each completed (compacted) layer to Client representative for
verifying the correct elevation. No work shall proceed for the next phase prior to approval of the completed
work.
9. Contractor shall contact Client Survey Group through PMT to verify the exact punch mark prior to start of
any backfilling.
1.0 4 Accuracy and Quality Assurance:

A. Contractor is to establish all horizontal and vertical reference points, and monuments accurately within a
maximum tolerance of 5 mm vertically and 10 mm horizontally. Subsequent checking or lack of checking
by Client does not relieve Contractor from his responsibility for the correctness of the construction.
B. Contractor will be provided with survey controls (refer to benchmark data shown on the drawings). These
control points shall be tied from any of Client survey controls and closed to another Client survey control
All survey field notes must be kept in field at all times for inspection by Client Representative.
1.0 5 Submittals:
A. Submit to Client Representative all data and grade sheets at least 48 hours prior to construction. Show
on the grade sheets the vertical and horizontal relationships between the stakes and the design reference
points shown on the Drawings
PART 2 – PRODUCTS:
2.0 1 Stakes
A. Construction Stakes: Construction stakes shall be 14 mm steel rebar. Wood or PVC stakes may be
used as directed by Client Representative.
B. Machine Control Stakes: Machine control stakes shall conform to manufacturer's specifications.
3.0 1 Surveying Work:
A. Contractor Survey Controls: From Client provided survey controls (refer to bench mark data shown on
the Drawings), Contractor shall establish additional survey controls with an accuracy as stipulated in
this Specification.
B. Survey Monuments: If the validity of any survey monument is threatened, place at least three (3)
reference or witness markers for each point likely to be disturbed. Submit survey notes listing the
relative positions of the reference markers to each other, and to the points they are referencing at least
48 hours prior to disturbing or threatening the validity of the monument.
C. Road Works:
1. General. Prior to the start of grading, and during the progress of the Work, set and maintain
sufficient stakes to show conformance with the Drawings. Locate all stakes in such a way that they
will not be disturbed by construction operations.
2. Stake Placement: Construction stakes shall be placed at the left and right of center lines, at
shoulders, edge of paving, grade breaks, beginning and ending of curves, angle points and
intersections of flow lines.
3. Stake Spacings :
Item Curve Straight Grade Vertical

Subgrade 30 m 10 m
Base 20m 10 m
Asphalt Paving, auto equipment controlled by string-line 10 m 5m
D. Utility Work:
1. General: Prior to beginning trenching operations, and during the progress of the Work, set and
maintain sufficient stakes to show conformance with the Drawings. Locate all stakes in such a
way that they will not be disturbed by construction operations.
2. Stake placement Construction stakes are to be place at, but not limited to, the following
locations;
a. Utility Pipes: Stakes shall be placed at each wye or tee connection, cleanout and manholes
and at every 10 meter station.
E. Park Work: Prior to beginning of grading, and during the progress of the Work, set and maintain
sufficient stakes to show conformance with the Drawings. Locate all stakes in such a way that they will
not be damaged or disturbed by construction operations.
F. Contractor shall protect the stakes in areas where they are likely to be disturbed or displaced.

0201 EARTHWORK
PART 1 – GENERAL:
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
ASTM D 1556 - Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Sand- Cone
Method.
ASTM D 1557 - Tests Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort.
ASTM D 4253 - Standard Test Methods for Maximum Index Density and Unit Weight of Soils Using a
Vibratory Table.
ASTM D 4254 - Standard Test Method for Minimum Index Density and weight of Soils and Calculation of
Relative Density.
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division - 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
Extent of earthwork is indicated on drawings.
Preparation of sub-grade for isolated footings, grade beams, building slabs, walls, and pavements is included
as part of this work.
Backfilling of trenches within building lines is included as part of this work.
1.03 EXCAVATION FOR MECHANICAL ELECTRICAL WORK:
Excavation and backfill required in conjunction with underground mechanical and electrical utilities, and
buried mechanical and electrical appurtenances is included as work of this section
1.04 DEFINITION:
"Excavation" consists of removal of material encountered to sub-grade elevations indicated and subsequent
disposal of materials removed.
"Backfilling" consists of Refilling of spaces from excavation is referred to as Backfilling.
"Fill material consists of an approved soil material being placed upon the surface of an existing ground.
"Formation" consists of the geological features of the earth.

"Barrow material" consists of Material obtained from sources other than from site excavation. This is a
reference to the source of supply and not to the characteristics of the material.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
Codes and Standards: Perform excavation work in compliance with applicable requirements of governing
authorities having jurisdiction.
 FIELD LABORATORY:
Contractor shall provide field laboratory with a skilled technician, including as a minimum the
following equipment:
- Modified Proctor Density Test Apparatus (ASTM D 1557).
- Sand-Cone Method Apparatus (ASTM D 1556).
- Set of ASTM Sieves, Balances and Stoves.
- Relative Density (ASTM D 4253/4).
- Equipment to execute the CBR (California Bearing Ratio) for roads on filling.
- Certificates of materials coming from external borrows.
1.06 TESTING AND INSPECTION SERVICES:
Employ, at Contractor's expense, testing laboratory to perform soil testing and inspection service for quality
control testing during earthwork operations
The following minimum testing shall be performed:

 One standard sieve analysis and one Modified Proctor Test with corresponding Proctor curve shall be
performed on every 1000 cubic meters. If there is a large variation in analysis, more frequent tests shall
be made.
 In Place Density AND Moisture content Testing.
The following in place density tests on compacted fill shall be performed:
1. Structural fill - one every 75 cubic meters. (maximum involved structural fill: 10000m).
2. Backfill and sub-base- every 150 cubic meters. (maximum involved backfill and general fill:
20000m3).
3. Road base and sub-base-one every 75 cubic meters.
At least one set of these density tests must be performed on every lift of fill and further
placement shall not be allowed until the required density is achieved.
The number of tests shall be increased, if a visual inspection determines that the moisture
content is not uniform or if the compacting effort is variable and not considered sufficient to
obtain the specified density,
1.07 SUBMITTALS:
Test Reports - Excavation: Submit following reports directly to The Client Representative from the testing
services:
a. Methods statement for the works.
b. Excavation permits as per requirements.
c. Test reports on borrow material.
d. Verification of foundation sub-grade
e. Field density test reports.
f. One optimum moisture-maximum density Curve for each type of soil encountered.
g. Report of actual unconfined compression strength and/or results of bearing test of each strata tested.
1.08 JOB CONDITIONS:
Site Information.
The contractor shall carry out, at his own expense, appropriate tests i.e plate bearing test or other
exploratory operations to determine the ground condition bearing the works capacity, water table depth etc.
prior to commencing the works.
1.09 Existing Utilities: Verify location of existing underground utilities in areas of work. Where utilities
are to remain in place, provide adequate means of support and protection during earthwork operations.
1.010 Should uncharted, or incorrectly charted, piping or other utilities be encountered during excavation,
consult utility owner immediately for directions. Cooperate with Owner and utility companies in keeping
respective services and facilities in operation. Repair damaged utilities to satisfaction of utility owner.
1.011 Do not interrupt existing utilities serving facilities occupied and used by Owner or others, during
occupied hours, except when permitted in writing by The Client Representative and then only after
acceptable temporary services have been provided.
A. Provide minimum of 48 hours notice to the Client Representative, and receive written notice to proceed
before interrupting any utility.
1.012 Use of Explosives: The use of explosives is not permitted.
1.013 Protection of Persons and Property: Barricade open excavations occurring as part of this work and
post with warning lights.
1.014 Operate warning lights as recommended by authorities having jurisdiction.
1.015 Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by
settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout and other hazards created by earthwork operations.
0201 EARTHWORK
PART II – PRODUCTS:
2.01 SOIL MATERIALS:
Definitions.
Satisfactory backfill materials below structural members are those classified as A-1-a materials as per
ASTM D-3282.
2.02 Unsatisfactory soil materials are defined as those complying with ASTM, D2487 soil Classification
groups GC, SC, ML, MH, CL, CH, OL, OH and PT.
2.03 Sub-base Material Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, Crushed
stone, crushed slag, natural or crushed sand.
2.04 Backfill and Fill Materials: Satisfactory soil materials free of clay, rock or gravel larger than 100mm
in any dimension, debris, waste materials, vegetable and other deleterious matter.
TABLE 2.04A: SIEVE GRADATION LIMITS FOR SAND BACKFILL:
Sieve Size Percentage Passing

(ASTM E11) (by Weight)
9.5 mm (% in.) 100
4 75 mm (No. 4) 95-100
2.36 mm (No 8) 80-100
1.18 mm (No. 16) 50-85
0.60 mm (No. 30) 25-60
0.30 mm (No. 50) 10-30
0.15 mm (No 100) 2-10
TABLE 2.04A: SIEVE GRADATION LIMITS FOR GRANULAR SUBBASE:

75 mm 100
50 mm 90-100
4.75 mm 35-70
0.0075.mm 0-15
TABLE 2.04C: SIEVE GRADATION LIMITS FOR GRANULAR COURSE MATERIAL:

37.5mm 100
25mm 60-100
19mm 55-85
7.75mm 35-60
2.00mm 25-52
0.425 mm 15-30
0.075mm 8-15
2.05 Termite protection- All surfaces of the ground under structures to be treated with a suitable
approved termite protection treatment.
0201 EARTHWORK
PART III - EXECUTION
Methods:
a. The Contractor shall receive prior approval from the RC/Client and utilizes methods for placement and
compaction of fill that have been based on the Contractor's proposal.
b. Whether or not specifically indicated in the Contractors description of the approved methods, the
Contractor shall place and compact fill in an orderly manner using equipment maintained in first class
operating condition Prior to compacting, ruts in the surface of any layer shall be filled and leveled.
c. Each layer of backfill material shall be so placed as to maintain adequate drainage and to prevent
accumulation of water.
d. Structure backfill shall be placed in uniform layers and shall be brought up uniformly on all sides of the
structure being backfilled. Within 1.5 m of the sides of a structure, backfill shall be placed in layers not
to exceed 150 mm in un-compacted thickness.
e. Each layer shall be spread uniformly, wetted or dried as required, and rolled with an approved tamping
or power roller Compacting equipment or methods that transmit excessive pressure to the structure
shall not be used.
f. At all times while compacting. vibratory rollers shall be operated within the manufacturer
recommended frequency range for the type of material being compacted and at the optimum operating
frequency.
g. Compaction of unclassified structure backfill by ponding or jetting is not permitted unless recommended
by its Contractor and specifically approved in advance by the Royal Commission
3.0 1 EXCAVATION:
Excavation is Unclassified, and includes excavation to sub-grade elevations indicated regardless of character
of materials and obstructions encountered.
3.0 2 Unauthorized excavation consists of removal of materials beyond indicated sub-grade elevations of
dimensions without specific direction of the Client Representative. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial
work directed by the Client Representative, shall be at Contractor's expense.
3.0 3 Under footings, foundation bases, or retaining walls, fill unauthorized excavation by extending indicated
bottom elevation of footing or base to excavation bottom, without altering required top elevation. Lean concrete
fill may be used to bring elevations to proper position, when acceptable to the Client Representative.
3.0 4 Elsewhere, backfill and compact unauthorized excavations as specified for authorized excavations of same
classification unless otherwise directed by The Client Representative.
3.0 5 Additional Excavation: When excavation has reached required sub-grade elevations, notify The Client
Representative who will make an inspection of conditions.
3.0 6 If unsuitable bearing materials are encountered at required sub-grade elevations, carry excavations deeper
and replace excavated materials as directed by The Client Representative.
3.0 7 Stability of Excavations: Slope sides of excavations to comply with local codes and ordinances having
jurisdiction, Shore and brace where sloping is not possible because of space restrictions or stability of material
excavated.
3.0 8 Maintain sides and slopes of excavations in safe condition until completion of backfilling.
3.0 9 Shoning and Bracing: Provide materials for shoring and bracing, such as sheet piling, up rights, stringers and
cross-braces, in good serviceable condition.
3.0 10 Establish requirements for trench shoring and bracing to comply with local codes and authorities having
jurisdiction.
3.0 11 Maintain shoring and bracing in excavations regardless of time period excavations will be open. Carry down
sharing and bracing as excavation progresses.
3.0 12 Dewatering: Prevent surface water and sub-surface or ground water from flowing into excavations and from
flooding project site and surrounding area.
3.0 13 Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Remove water to prevent softening of foundation bottoms,
undercutting footings, and soil changes detrimental to stability of subgrades and foundations. Provide and
maintain pumps, well points, sumps, suction and discharge lines, and other dewatering system components
necessary to convey water away from excavations.
3.0 14 Material Storage: Stockpile satisfactory excavated materials where directed, until required for backfill or fill.
Place, grade and shape stockpiles for proper drainage
3.0 15 Locate and retain soil materials and waste materials as herein specified.
3.0 16 Dispose of excess soil materials and waste materials as herein specified.
3.0 17 Excavation for Structures: Conform to elevations and dimensions shown within a tolerance of plus or minus
20mm and extending a sufficient distance from footings and foundations to permit placing and removal of
concrete formwork, installation of services, other construction, and for inspection.
3.0 18 in excavating for footings and foundations, take care not to disturb bottom of excavation Excavate by hand
to final grade just before concrete reinforcement is placed. Trim bottoms to required lines and grades to leave
solid base to receive other work.
3.0 19 Excavation for Pavements' Cut Surface under pavements to comply with cross-sections, elevations and
grades as shown.
3.0 20 Excavation for Trenches Dig trenches to the uniform width required for particular item to be installed,
sufficiently wide to provide ample working room. Provide 150mm to 225mm clearance on both sides of pipe or
conduit.
3.0 21 Excavate trenches to depth indicated or required. Carry depth of trenches for piping to establish indicated
flow lines and invert elevations. Beyond building perimeter, keep bottoms of trenches sufficiently below finish
grade.
3.0 22 For pipes or conduit 125mm or less in nominal size and for flat-bottomed multiple-duct conduit units, do
not excavate beyond indicated depths, Hand excavate bottom cut to accurate elevations and support pipe or
conduit on undisturbed soil.
3.0 23 For pipes or conduit 150mm or larger in nominal size and other mechanical/electrical work Indicated to
receive sub-base, excavate to sub-base depth indicated, or, if not otherwise indicated, to 150mm below the bottom
of work to be supported .
3.0 24 Except as otherwise indicated, excavate for exterior water bearing piping (water and drainage) so top of
piping is not less than 0.6m below finished grade.
3.0 25 Grade bottoms of trenches as indicated, notching under pipe bells to provide solid bearing for entire body of
pipe.
3.0 26 Backfill trenches with concrete where trench excavations pass within 450mm of columns or wall footings
and which are carried below bottom of such footings, or which pass under wall footings. Place concrete to level of
bottom of adjacent footing.
3.0 27 Do not backfill trenches until tests and inspections have been made and backfilling authorized by The
Client Representative. Use care in backfilling or avoid damage or displacement of pipe systems.
3.0 28 For piping or conduit less that 750mm below surface of roadways, provide 100mm thick concrete base slab
support. After installation and testing of piping or conduit, provide minimum 100mm thick encasement (sides
and top) of concrete prior to backfilling or placement of roadway sub-base.
3.0 29 COMPACTION:
General Control soil compaction during construction providing minimum percentage of density specified for
each area classification indicated below.
3.0 30 Percentage of Maximum Density Requirements: Compact soil to not less than the following percentages of
maximum density for soils which exhibit a well-defined moisture density relationship (cohesive soils) determined
in accordance with ASTM D 1557; and not less than the following percentages of relative density, determined in
accordance with ASTM D 2049, for soils which will not exhibit a well-defined moisture-density relationship
(Cohesionless soils).
A. Structures, raft foundation, Building Slabs and Steps, Pavements: Compact top 300mm of sub-grade and
each layer of backfill or fill material at 90% maximum density for cohesive material or 95% relative
density for cohesion less material
B. Lawn agricultural or unpaved Areas:
Compact top 150mm of sub-grade and each layer of backfill or fill material at 85% maximum density
for cohesive soils and 90% relative density for cohesion less soils.
C. Walkways:
Compact top 150mm of sub-grade and each layer of backfill or fill material at 90% maximum density
for cohesive material or 95% relative density for cohesion less material.
3.0 31 Moisture Control: Where sub-grade or layer of soil material must be moisture conditioned before
compaction, uniformly apply water to surface of sub-grade, or layer of soil material, to prevent free water
appearing on surface during or subsequent to compaction operations.
Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry, soil material that is too wet to permit compaction to specified density.
3.0 32 BACKFILL AND FILL:
General: Place acceptable soil material in layers to required sub-grade elevations, for each area classification listed
below.
A. In excavations, use satisfactory excavated or borrow material.
B. Under grassed areas, use satisfactory excavated or borrow material.
C. Under walks and pavements, use sub-base material, or satisfactory excavated or borrow material, or
combination of both.
D. Under building slabs and steps, use sub-base material.
E. Under piping and conduit, use sub-base material where sub-base is indicated under piping or conduit;
shape to fit bottom of cylinder.
3.0 33 Backfill excavations as promptly as work permits, but not until completion of the following:
A. Acceptance of construction below finish grade including, where applicable, damp- proofing, water-
proofing, and perimeter insulation.
B. Inspection, testing, approval, and recording locations of underground utilities.
C. Removal of concrete formwork.
D. Removal of shoring and bracing, and backfilling of voids with satisfactory materials.Cut off temporary
sheet piling driven below bottom of structures and remove in manner to prevent settlement of the
structure or utilities, or leave in place if required.
E. Removal of trash and debris.
F. Permanent or temporary horizontal bracing is in place on horizontally supported walls.
3.0 34 Ground Surface Preparation: Remove vegetation, debris, unsatisfactory soil materials, obstructions, and
deleterious materials from ground surface prior to placement of fills. When existing ground surface has a density
less than that specified under "Compaction" for particular area classification, break up ground surface, pulverize,
moisture-condition to optimum moisture content, and compact to require depth and percentage of maximum
density
3.0 35 Placement and Compaction Place backfill and fill materials in layers not more than 200mm in loose depth
for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more that 100mm in loose depth for material
compacted by hand-operated tampers
3.0 36 Before compaction, moisten or aerate each layer as necessary to provide optimum moisture content.
Compact each layer to required percentage of maximum dry density or relative dry density for each area
classification. Do not place backfill or fill material on surfaces that are muddy.
3.0 37 Place backfill and fill materials evenly adjacent to structures, piping or conduit to required elevations. Take
care to prevent wedging action of backfill against structures or displacement of piping or conduit by carrying
material uniformly around structure, piping or conduit to approximately same elevation in each lift.
3.0 38 GRADING:
General: Uniformly grade areas within limits of grading under this section, including adjacent transition areas.
Smooth finished surface within specified tolerances, compact with uniform levels or slopes between points where
elevations are indicated, or between such points and existing grades.
3.0 39 Grading outside Building Lines: Grade areas adjacent to building lines to drain away from structures and to
prevent ponding.
3.0 40 Finish surfaces free from irregular surface changes, and as follows:
A. Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Finish areas to receive top soil to within not more that 25mm above or below
required sub-grade elevations.
B. Walks: Shape surface of areas under walks to line, grade and cross-section, with finish surface not more
that 25mm above or below required sub-grade elevation.
C. Pavements: Shape surface of areas under pavement to line, grade and cross section, with finish surface
not more that 10mm above or below required sub-grade elevation.
3.0 41 Grading Surface of Fill under building Slabs: Grade smooth and even, free of voids, compacted as specified,
and to require elevation. Provide final grades within a tolerance of 10mm when tested with a 3m straight edge.
3.0 42 Compaction: After grading, compact sub-grade surfaces to the depth and indicated percentage of maximum
or relative density for area classification.
3.0 43 PAVEMENT SUB-BASE COURSE:
General: Sub-base course consists of placing sub-base material, in layers of specified thickness, over sub-grade
surface to support a pavement base course
3.0 44 Grade Control: During construction, maintain lines and grades including crown and cross-slope of sub-base
course.
3.0 45 Shoulders' Place shoulders along edges of sub-base course to prevent lateral movement. Construct shoulders
of acceptable soil materials, placed in such quantity to compact to thickness of each sub-base course layer.
Compact and roll at least a 300mm) width of shoulder simultaneously with compacting and rolling of each layer
of sub-base course.
3.0 46 Placing: Place sub-base course material on prepared sub-grade in layers of uniform thickness, conforming to
indicate cross-section and thickness. Maintain optimum moisture content for compacting sub-base material
during placement operations.
3.0 47 When compacted sub-base course is shown to be 150mm thick or less, place material in a single layer.
When shown to be more that 150mm thick, place material in equal layers, except no single layer more than
150mm or less than 75mm in thickness when compacted.
3.0 48 BUILDING SLAB SUB-BASE COURSE:
General: Sub-base course consists of placement of sub-base material in layers of indicated thickness, over sub-
grade surface to support concrete building slabs.
3.0 49 Placing: Place sub-base material on prepared sub-grade in layers of uniform thickness conforming to
indicated cross-section and thickness. Maintain optimum moisture content for compacting material during
placement operations.
3.0 50 When a compacted sub-base course is shown to be 150mm thick or less place material in a single layer.
When shown to be more than 150mm thick, place material in equal layers, except no single layer more than
150mm or less than 75mm in thickness when compacted.
3.0 51 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:
Quality Control Testing during Construction: Allow testing services to inspect and approve sub-grades and fill
layers before further construction work is performed.
3.0 52 Perform Field density tests in accordance with ASTM D 1556 (sand cone method) or ASTM D 2167
(rubber balloon method), as applicable.
A. Footing Sub-grade: For each strata of soil on which footings will be placed, conduct at least one test to verify
required design bearing capacities. Subsequent verfication and approval of each footing sub-grade may be
based on a visual comparison of each sub-grade with related tested strata, when acceptable to The Client
Representative.
B. Paved Areas and Building Slab sub-grade: Make at least one field density test of subgrade for each 2008q.m
of paved area or building slab, but in no case less than 3 tests. In each compacted fill layer, make one field
density test for every 2008q.m of over-laying building slab or paved area, but in no case less than 3 tests.
C. Foundation Wall Backfilt: "Take at least 2 field density tests, at locations and elevations as directed.
If in opinion of The Client Representative, based on testing service reports and inspection, sub-grade or fills
which have been placed are below specified density, provide additional compaction and testing at no
additional expense
3.0 53 MAINTENANCE:
Protection of Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic and corrosion Keep free of trash and debris.
Repair and re-establish grades in settled, eroded, and rutted areas to specified tolerances.
3.0 54 Reconditioning Compacted Areas: Where completed compacted areas are disturbed by subsequent
construction operations or adverse weather, scarify surface, re-shape and compact to required density prior to
further construction.
3.0 55 Settling: Where settling is measurable or observable at excavated areas during general project warranty
period, remove surface (pavement, lawn or other finish), add backfill material, compact, and replace surface
treatment. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of surface or finish to match adjacent work, and eliminate
evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible.
3.0 56 DISPOSAL OF EXCESS AND WASTE MATERIALS:
Remove excess excavated material, trash, debris and waste materials and dispose of it off Owner's as approved by
the Client representative.
0202 BOUNDARY WALL

PARTI - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
"This Section covers the material and construction requirements for concrete masonry boundary walls to the
heights and locations shown on the Contract Drawings and as specified herein.
1.02 RELATED WORKS IN OTHER SECTION:
1. See Section 0302 - Cast in place concrete.
2. See Section 0402 - Concrete unit masonry.
3. See Section 0501 - Steel rectangular hollow sections and small sections structural steel.
4. See Section 0701 - Waterproofing and damp proofing vapour barrier for slabs.
5. See Section 0707 - Concrete Waterproofing.
6. See Section 0901 - Solid plaster rendering stucco.
=== END OF SECTION ===

0203 PAVEMENT SUB-BASE AND AGGREGATE BASE
PARTI - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
A. Work Included:
This Section covers the furnishing spreading and compacting of sub-base and road base for making
good to existing road pavement construction where indicated on the Contrac Drawings and as specified
herein.
1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE:
Section 0102 Quality Control.
Section 0202 Earthworks, Compaction and Testing of Earthwork.
1.03 APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARDS:
The codes and standards which are generally appli cable to the Work of the Section are listed hereinafter.
A. AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials.
T-193 The California Bearing ratio (as modified by ASTM D 1983).
B. ASTM American Society For Testing & Materials
C. 131 Resistance to Abrasion of Small size Coarse Aggregate by Use of the Los Angeles Machine. Test for,
C-136 Sieve or Screen Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates.
D-422 Particle-Size Analysis of Soils.
0-423 Liquid Limit of Soils, Test for,
D-424 Plastic Limit and Plasticity Index of Soils, Test for,
D-1140 Amount of Material in Soils finer than the No. 200 (75 micron) Sieve, Test for,
D-1557 Moisture-Density Relations of Soils Using 10 lb. (4.5kg) Rammer and 18 inch (457 mm) Drop.
Test for
D-1883 Bearing Ratio of Laboratory-Compacted Soils, Test for,
D-2217 Wet Preparation of Soil Samples for Particle-Size Analysis and Determination of Soil constants.
D-2844 Resistance R-Value and Expansion Pressure of Compacted Soils, Test for,
D-2922 Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place by Site Radiology (Shallow Depth) Tests for.
1.04 QUALITY CONTROL:
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the quality of all work and material to be used in the Work and
shall propose a prograrn for inspection and testing, such as to achieve the specified quality, in
accordance with Section 0102, "QUALITY CONTROL".
The Contractor shall have all necessary tests performed and submit its findings in a report form to the
Client Representative for review and approval prior to the transportation of materials to the site.
B. The Contractor shall perform all specified testing on the existing subgrade and on the subbase and
roadbase materials placed under this Contract. The test results for each type of material and the
Contractors recommendations shall be submitted in a report form to the Client Representative for
review.
Approval by the Client Representative of each report will be required prior to proceeding with the
construction of a subsequent material.
0203 RAVEMENT SUB- BASE AND AGGREGATE BASE
PART II - MATERIALS:
A. General:
All goods and products covered by these specifications shall be procured, when available from an in-
Kingdom manufacturer. Procurement of all goods and products manufactured out-of-Kingdom must be
approved by the Client Representative.
B. Gradation Requirements:
Subbase material shall be tested in accordance with ASTM D 422 and D- 2217 and grading shall be
within the limits as shown in Table 2.01B.
The Contractor shall demonstrate compliance with this Subsection before the material to site.
TABLE 2.01B - SUBBASE GRADING LIMITATIONS:
Sieve size % Passing, By Weight

75mm 100
50mm 90-10
4.75mm 35-75
75 micron 0-15
C. Classification and Performance Requirements:

Shall be in accordance with Table 2.010. Soaked CBR testing is an alternative for use only with Client
Representative's written approval.
TABLE 2.01C FURTHER REQUIREMENTS:
Parameter Limit
ASTM Ref. Frequency of
Testing
Liquid Limit D-4318 25 Max Daily
Plasticity Index D-4318 6 Max Daily

Soaked CBR (@ 95% 25 min
D-1883 As Approved
relative compaction and20
lbs. surcharge)
Abrasion Loss C131 50 Max As Approved
R-Value (@ 300 psi D-2844 40 Min Weekly
exudation pressure)
The Contractor shall test more frequently as necessary to properly control quality and as required by the Client
Representative.
2.02 ROADBASE:
A. Roadbase shall be a mixture of crushed gravel and sand with natural sand and filler suitable binding
quality blended such that it can be readily compacted at optimum moistu conditions to form a firm and
stable pavement course.
B. Gradation Requirements:
Road base material when tested in accordance with ASTM D-2217 and ASTM C-136, she be within the
limits shown in Table 2.02B.
Additionally, not less than 10% shall be retained between each pair of successive sie sizes as specified in
Table2.02C, excluding the largest pair. The Contractor is permitted reduce the percentage larger than
37.5mm to zero if level control or segregation problematic and as approved by the Client
Representative. The Contractor sh demonstrate compliance with this subsection before delivery of the
material to site.
TABLE 2.02B - ROADBASE GRADING LIMITATIONS:
%Passing by Weight
Selve Size
Mix Design Plant Mix Tolerance
63 mm 100 Nil
37.5 mm 90-100 +6%
19mm 50-80 +8%
9.5mm 40-70 +8%
4.75mm 30-60 +7%
600micron 10-25 +5%
75micron 3-10 +3%
C. Classification and Performance Requirements shall be in accordance with Table 2.03C.Soaked CBR
testing is an alternative for use only with Client Representative written approval.
TABLE 2.03 C FURTHER REQUIREMENTS:
Parameter Limit
ASTM Ref. Frequency of
Testing
25 Max
Liquid Limit D-4318 Daily
Plasticity Index D-4318 4 Max Daily

Soaked CBR (@ 95% 50 min
D-1883 As Approved
relative compaction and20
lbs. surcharge)
Abrasion Loss C131 45 Max Weekly
R-Value (@ 300 psi D-2844 60 Min Weekly
exudation pressure)
The Contractor shall test more frequently as necessary to properly control quality and as required by the Client
Representative.
D. Mix Design, Shall be demonstrated as meeting all requirements of this specification and shall be
approved by the Client Representative based on the Contractors report and recommendation before
roadbase is laid in the permanent work. Plant mix tolerance shall then apply Roadbase mixtures outside
any of the plant mix tolerances shall be deemed to meet this specification when encompassed by the
approved mix design that meets the specified requirements for grading, plasticity, abrasion loss and R.
Value (Soaked CBR).
0203 PAVEMENT SUB-BASE AND AGGREGATE BASE

PART III - EXECUTION:
3.0 1 SUBGRADE PREPARATION:
Subgrade preparation shall be carried out as specified in the Section 0201 EARTHWORKS. The Contractor
shall check and ensure that the subgrade conforms with the specified requirements in respect to stability and
elevations before placing subbase material thereon.
3.0 2 PRODUCTION OF SUBBASE AND ROADBASE MATERIAL:

A. Subbase and Roadbase material shall be blended to meet the requirements specified in Part Il of this
section. The subbase and roadbase material shall be watered such that the material is in an optimum
moisture condition at the time of compaction. Individual sizes of material shall be blended by a mixing
plant comprising feed hoppers, conveyors and pug mill as necessary to meet grading requirements.
Stabilization media may be used as recommended by the Contractor and approved by the Client
Representative.
3.0 3 SUBBASE AND ROADBASE CONSTRUCTION:

A. The Contractor shall deliver both the subbase and roadbase material as uniform mixtures at the
optimum moisture condition for laying. spreading and compaction. Material shall be tested for
gradation at least twice daily. All material shall be placed and spread evenly with moisture content
checks being conducted every two hours. Spreading shall be undertaken concurrently with delivery or
without delay Roadbase material shall be spread using an electronically controlled mechanical spreader.
B. In all cases the material shall be compacted in layers not exceeding 150mm compacted thickness. This
limit may be exceeded only when the Contractor's compaction operation is demonstrated to be adequate
and acceptable to the Client Representative.
C. All segregated or otherwise defective areas shall be removed to the full thickness of the layer and relaid
with new material.
3.0 4 COMPACTION, TESTING AND GRADE TOLERANCE:
A. Compaction The subbase and roadbase shall be compacted within one percent of the optimum moisture
condition to a relative compaction of at least 95% of the maximum laboratory ASTM D-1557, method D,
density. One result from twenty consecutive field density determinations may fall below this relative
compaction value.
B. Frequency of Testing. One laboratory density test shall be conducted for every ten field density
determinations or more frequently as required by apparent change or a change in source or process. Field
density determinations shall be conducted in accordance with ASTM D-1556; or ASTM D-2922 as calibrated
against the former method. Each 5000m of subbase and of roadbase shall be represented by 10 field density
determinations evenly distributed over the whole area. Every field density result shall indicate the depth of
layer at each test location.
C. Grade Tolerance: All subbase material shall be laid within 30mm below and never above the elevations as
shown and interpolated from the Contract Drawings. All roadbase material shall be laid within 20mm below
and never above the elevations as shown and interpolated from the Contract Drawings. Compliance with
these tolerances shall be recorded by the Contractor's survey to the satisfaction of the Client Representative
before proceeding with the next layer.
D. Subbase or roadbase which does not comply with the requirements of this subsection shall be re-shaped, or
re-worked and thoroughly re-compacted to conform to this Specification
0204 UNDERGROUND PIPING AND SITE UTILITY PITS
PARTI – GENERAL:
1.01 WORK INCLUDED:

A. Work under this Section includes but is not necessarily limited to all pipe work, manholes, valve boxes,
clean outs, trenches for utilities and all required work for the connection to the City system to bring
every system into satisfactory operational condition,
1.02 PRODUCT HANDLING:

A. All pipe products, valves conduits fittings and accessories shall be delivered in manufacturer's original,
protective packaging. Full consideration shall be given to protection of all flange and valve faces and
pipe ends before and during installation,
1. Sampling, testing and checking procedures shall be recorded on a daily basis including corrective
actions taken by the Contractor, if necessary.
2. Reports and records shall be made available for assessment to the client/RC not later than 3 days
after testing and checking.
3. Reports and records shall be established and maintained in a manner to ensure traceability.
4. Arrangements shall be made in the Contractor's work schedule and time allowed for checking and
testing as indicated.
2.01 MATERIALS:
General:
A. All goods and products covered by these specifications shall be procured from an in Kingdom
manufacturer when available (manufacturer: NEPRO or approval equal).
B. All pipes shall be of pressure class and diameters as shown on the drawings and all cables and
conduits shall be of size shown on the drawings
2.02 Water Pipe and Fittings:
PPR Type 3, Sch. 80, Din 8062 & ISO 161/1 Class 5.
2.03 Sanitary Sewer plpe and Fittings:
Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) SASO-14 & 15, Sch. 40, Din 8062 & ISO 161/1, with elastomeric ring joints.
2.04 Gate valves shall conform to ANSI / AWWA C500, solid wedge disc, non-rising stem, for
underground service, pressure rated to 14kgim. end connection shall be compatible with the pipe joints
selected.
2.05 Valve boxes shall be precast or cat in-situ concrete with cast iron cover and frame.
2.06 Manhole covers shall be Gray Iron confirming to ASTM A48M, Class 25B.
2.07 Underground Electrical Conduits:
A. These conduits should be uPVC schedule 40 and sizes as shown in the electrical drawings. On the
path of cable markers are to be places for identification.
B. All Saudi Electricity Company - Eastern operating area (SEC-EOA) direct interface work, shall be
done with SEC - EOA prior approval and in strict accordance with SEC-EOA standards.
C. Low voltage power cables shall be installed in underground conduits as specified in the drawings.
D. The minimum burial depths to the top of electrical conduits shall be as specified in articles 300 and
310 of NEC.
E. Upon completion of installation and prior to final acceptance, each component of every system shall
be tested to the satisfaction of the customer and/ or his representative.
F. The contractor shall provide all test instruments, equipment and accessories necessary for
demonstration and putting the equipment into operation before commissioning. All testing
equipment shall be calibrated by approved authorities.
G. Special care shall be taken during field testing including the safety of personnel and test apparatus,
wiresi cables and their accessories from injuries and damages.

PART III – EXECUTION:
3.01 Water Pipe Installation:
A. Water pipe shall be installed to the design lines and grades and in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Water lines shall not cross below sanitary sewer lines. Vertical clearances shall be minimum
600mm. All water line joints shall be at least 1.0m away from the Sewer line and water pipe shall be
cut as necessary to provide this clearance. Water lines shall not parallel sanitary sewers with less
than 3m horizontal spacing. All pipe ends shall be capped and protected until ready for final
connections The pipe separation to be follow as per Royal commission plumbing code standards or
approval equal.
C. PPR Type 3 water pipe shall be installed in accordance with ASTM D2774 and applicable portions
of ASTM D2321.
D. Concrete thrust blocks shall be placed at all changes of alignment and shall be as per detail
drawing.
E. The water system shall include isolating and air relief valves as required.
3.02 Sanitary Sewer Pipe Installation:

A. PVC sewer pipe shall be installed in accordance with ASTM D2321.
B. Drain pipe slope shall not be less than 2%.
C. Sanitary sewer piping shall be encased in minimum of 150mm of concrete when laid under the
building foundation slabs or roads.
D. Cleanouts, manhole, chambers, gullies and marker shall be provided as shown on drawings.
3.03 Pipe Separation:

A. Vertical Separation:
1. Forced Sewer Mains:
a. Waterlines shall always cross above forced sewer mains and shall be installed at least 600 mm
above the sewer. The sewer line shall have no joint within 1 m of the waterline unless it is
encased in concrete for a distance of at least 3 m each side of the crossing.
2. Gravity sewers:
a. Where waterlines cross under or above gravity-flow sewer lines, the sewer pipe shall be fully
encased in concrete for a distance of at least 3 m each side of the crossing or shall be made of
pressure pipe with no joint located within 1 m horizontally from the waterline.
b. A minimum vertical distance of 500 mm shall always be kept between the outside diameter of
the water main and the outside of the sewer regardless of the location of the water main,
whether above or below the sewer.
B. Horizontal Separation:
1. A minimum horizontal separation of 3 m shall be maintained between potable water supply lines
and sewer lines, except when bottom of water pipe is at least 500 mm above the top of the sewer
pipe, in which case a 2 m minimum horizontal spacing will be permitted.
2. Water lines under the building shall be at least 300 mm (12 in.) above the top of the drainage or
waste water line or appurtenance and be placed on a solid shelf excavated at one side of the trench.
3.04 Encasement of underground pipes:
Underground pipes shall be designed to provide a minimum of 1.2 m earth cover over the pipes where this
cover cannot be achieved; pipes shall be encased in concrete.
3.05 Testing:
A. Water Pipe:
All piping systems shall be field tested hydrostatically at 10 Bars pressure for leakage in the presence of the
authorizing inspector before backfilling is done all to the client approval.
B. Sewage Pipe: The Sewer pipe shall be tested in sections as approved. Pipe below ground water level shall
be tested by measuring infiltration. Pipe above ground water level shall be tested by measuring leakage
The section to be tested shall be filled with water up to the maximum head available as controlled by
manhole or cleanout, but not less than 3 meters. Leakage shall be measured by the amount of water
required to keep the test section full under the specified head for twenty four hours, after a presoak
period of 4 hours.
3.06 DISINFECTION:
When the entire water system, including valves, fittings and allied work has been installed and tested, it shall
be disinfected by the procedures of AWWA C651. After final flushing and before the system is placed in
service, water samples shall be collected from the system at approved sources and tested for bacteriological
quality in accordance with Section 9 of AWWA C651. If the initial samples fail to meet the requirements,
disinfection of the system shall be repeated until satisfactory samples are obtained.
3.07 IDENTIFICATION:
All manholes, valve boxes, pits etc, shall have approved identification markings.
3.08 IDENTIFICATION TAPES:
For all underground utilities approved plastic identification tapes should be laid at a depth of 300mm below
finished grade elevation during backfilling.
0205 PRE-CONSTRUCTION TERMITE CONTOROL
PARTI – GENERAL:
1.0 1 DOCUMENTS INCLUDES:

A. Pre-construction subterranean Termite Control & Treatment System.
B. Horizontal & Vertical barriers to footings, trenches, floor slabs, carports, etc.
1.0 2 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Documents 0201 - Earthwork
B. Documents 0204 - Underground Piping and Site Utility Pits
C. Documents 0302 - Cast-in-Place & Pre-cast Concrete
1.0 3 SUBMITTALS:
A. Submit for review and approval to Client the following items before procurement:
1. All manufacturer's test reports as well as certificate of compliance to the specification, reference
codes and standards.
2. Sample of materials.
3. Complete catalog data for all Termiticides and equipment required.
4. Shop drawings as required for effective placement of treatment on all horizontal & vertical areas.
0205 PRE-CONSTRUCTION TERMITE CONTROL

2.01 TERMITICIDE MATERIAL:

A. Commercial Termiticide, Permethrin Dragnet FT or any other equivalent Termiticide with Pyrethroid
active ingredient, to meet U.S. Urban Department and Property Standards.
2.02 PRODUCT HANDLING:

A. State special packing and shipping requirements.
B. State special measures needed to prevent damage prior to installation.
C. Materials shall be properly protected and packaged during shipment.
D. Materials shall be properly stored at site and marked Hazardous area, which shall be an established
adequate protected storage area. Proper and adequate control and caution should be taken for any
environmental risks and all water lines isolated and protected.
0205 PRE-CONSTRUCTION TERMITE CONTROL

3.01 PRE-CONSTRUCTION SUBTERRANEAN TERMITE TREATMENT:
The use of the product prevents and controls termite infestations in and around structures and
constructions.
To meet the criteria, procedure and execution has been given for permethrin Dragent FT. for any other
termiticide, proper execution procedure per manufacturer's recommendations should be got approved before
execution.
Effective pre-construction subterranean termite control is achieved by the establishment of vertical and/or
horizontal insecticidal barriers using 0 5%, 1.0% emulsion of Dragnet FT. to meet lermite proofing
requirements follow the procedures in the latest edition of the Housing and Urban Development Minimum
Property Standards (refer to U.S.D.A home and Garden Bulletin No 64).
Horizontal Barriers: create a horizontal barrier wherever treated soil will be covered, such as footing
trenches, slab floors, carports, and the soil beneath stairs and crawlspaces.
To produce a horizontal insecticide barrier, apply the emulsion at the rate of 1 gallon per 10 square feet to
fill soil. If fill is washed gravel or other coarse material, apply at 1.5 gallons of emulsion per 10 square feet, so
that the emulsion will reach the soil beneath the fill.
Applications shall be made by a low pressure spray (less than 50p.s.i.) using a coarse spray nozzle. If slab
will not be poured the same day as treatment, cover treated soil with a water-proof barrier such as
polyethylene sheeting. This is not necessary if foundation walls have been installed around the treated soil.
Vertical Barriers: vertical barriers should be established in areas such as around the base of foundations,
plumbing, utility entrances, back filled soil against foundation walls and other critical areas.
To produce a vertical barrier in soil, apply the emulsion at a rate of 4 gallons of emulsion per 10 linear feet
per foot of depth. Distribute the treatment as evenly as possible
a. When rodding or trenching. It is important that emulsion reaches the top of the footing, Rod Holes
should be spaced to provide a continuous insecticidal barrier.
b. Care should be taken to avoid soil wash-out around the footing.
c. Trenches need not be wider than 6 inches. Emulsion should be mixed with the soil as it is being
replaced in the trench.
d. For a monolithic slab, an inside vertical barrier may not be required Hollow block voids may be
treated at a rate of 2 gallons of emulsion per 10 linear feet, so that the emulsion will reach the top
of the footing.
3.02 CLEANING AFTER INSTALLATION:
Apply manufacturer's required cleaning methods, as specified and approved under Section 1.03, submittals.
3.03 TESTING:
Required tests shall be done as specified and approved under Section 1.03, submittals.
0206 INTERLOCK CONCRETE PAVER BLOCK
PARTI – GENERAL:
1.0 1 SECTION INCLUDES:
A. The work includes ground preparation which require cutting or filling and compaction to the lines and
grades shown on the drawings and approval by the Client Representative. Placing of pavers shall be on
mortar setting bed over reinforced concrete slab on compacted ground.
1.0 2 RELATED SECTIONSL:

a. Section 0201 Backfilling.
b. Section 0301 Concrete Reinforcement.
c. Section 0302 Cast-in Place Concrete.
1.0 3 REFERENCES:
A. SASO SSA 224 Steel Fabric for Reinforcement of Concrete.
B. SASO SSA 2 Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.
1.0 4 SUBMITTALS:
A. Submit under provisions specified in the Client Contract Documents.
B. Shop Drawings Indicate layout of interlock concrete paver block, dimensions of paved areas, elevations,
and effected adjacent construction.
C. Product Data: Provide characteristics of paver unit, dimensions, and special shapes.
D. Samples Submit two samples of each paver size, illustrating style, size, color range and Surface texture of
units being provided for Client approval prior to ordering product.
E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions :Indicate substrate requirements and .installation methods.
2.01 PAVER MATERIALS:
A. Interlock Concrete Paver block. Pavers with shape and color subject to the approval of Client
representative.
B. Recycled Content of Products: Provide products with an average recycled content so postconsumer
recycled content plus on-half of preconsumer recycled content in not less than 30 percent.
C. Regional Materials: Provide materials that are extracted, processed and manufactured within 500
miles/800km from the project site.
2.02 BEDDING:
A. Mortar setting bed type specified in section 0400.
B. Reinforced concrete cast-in-place type as specified in section 0301.
3.01 EXAMINATION:
A. Verify substrate conditions under provisions of Section 0201-Earthwork.
B. Verify that substrate is level, smooth, capable of supporting pavers and mortar and concrete bedding
imposed loads, and ready to receive work of this Section.
C. Verify gradients and final elevations including substrate base are correct
3.02 INSTALLATION:
A. The sub grade or select fill shall be shaped to lines, grades and sections and compacted to not less than
95% of the maximum dry density as per ASTM D-1557.
B. After the sugared or select fill preparation had been completed, with all the curbs and forms already set
to the lines and elevations as shown on the drawings and has been approved by the Client
Representative, the area is now ready to receive the cast-in-place reinforced concrete slab bedding.
C. Interlock /Mosaic tile pavers shall be laid on a 2.0 cm thick (minimum) mortar setting bed above
reinforced concrete slab. The pavers finish surface levels shall be as specified on the drawings
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:

A. Contractor shall prepare shop/layout drawings for all the pavers & submit to Client for approval prior
to any installation/ordering materials.
B. Contractor shall prepare moke-up of all types & shapes of pavers on site. No work shall proceed on site
without getting Client approval of moke-up & samples.
C. The surface will be tested with a four meter straight edge at any selected locations The variation of the
surface shall at no point exceed four (4) millimeters between two contacts of straight edge with the
paver's surface.
D. All humps and depressions exceeding the tolerance shall be Corrected to the satisfaction of the Client
Representative.
3.04 APPEARANCE:
A. Exposed surfaces of the finished work will be inspected by the Client Representative and any deficiencies
in appearance will be identified. All humps and depressions exceeding the tolerance shall be removed
and replaced.
0207 CURBS
PART 1 GENERAL:
1.0 1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A. This Section covers the furnishing and installation of curbs at the locations and to the lines, grades,
details and dimensions as shown on the Contract Drawings and approval by Client Representative.
B. The Contractor shall provide all material, labor, tools, equipment and other incidentals as required to
complete the work in accordance with the Contract Requirements.
1.0 2 REFERENCES:
A. The referred codes and standards are intended to provide an acceptable level of quality for materials,
products and workmanship. In case of conflict between these standards and the text of this Specification,
the Specification text shall govern.
B. The latest revision of the referred codes and standards shall be used wherever applicable. In case of
conflict, the Contractor shall propose equipment, materials and processes conforming to one group of
codes and standards.
C. The codes and standards generally applicable to the work.
D. MOT - Ministry of Transportation, Kingdom of Saudi Arabia.
1.0 3 SUBMITTALS:
A. Submit under provisions specified in the Client Contract Documents.
B. Shop Drawings Indicate dimensions of curbs, elevations, and effected adjacent construction.
C. Product Data: Provide characteristics of curbs unit, dimensions, and special shapes.
D. Samples: Submit two samples of each curb size, illustrating style, size, And color range, for Client
approval prior to ordering product.
E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions. Indicate substrate requirements and installation methods
1.0 4 QUALITY CONTROL:

A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the quality of work and shall develop and propose programs and
methods of construction and testing such as to achieve the specified quality to the approval of the client
in accordance with standards.
B. Quality control shall conform to the referenced Sections for concrete work and joint filers.
C. Quality control procedures shall comply with the local governing regulations regarding precast curbs, if
they are more stringent than specified herein.
A. Curbs with shape and color subject to the approval of Client representative:
Curb outside forms shall have a height equal to the full depth of the curb. The inside form of curb shall
have batter and shall be securely fastened to and supported by the outside form.
Rigid forms shall be provided for curb returns, except that benders or thin plank forms may be used for
curb returns with radius specified on plans, where grade changes occur in the return, or where the
central angle is such that a rigid form with a central angle of 90 degrees cannot be used. Back forms for
curb returns may be made of 38 mm (1% inch) benders, for the full height of the curb, cleated together.
B. Curb Granular Base:
The Granular Base shall be the same material as the aggregate base course of the asphalt road pavement
extended 100 mm at the concrete base of the curb as shown on details.
3.05 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION:
A. Verity base conditions under provisions of the Client Contract Documents.
B. Verity base had been completed, inspected, tested and accepted.
C. Verify gradients and elevations of base are correct as per approved drawings.
D. Notify Client Representative, a minimum of 24 hours prior to commence concreting operation.
3.02 CURB CONCRETE PLACEMENT AND FINISHING:
A. Formed Curb:
Concrete shall be placed to the section required in a single lift. Consolidation shall be achieved by using
approved mechanical vibrators.
B. Concrete Finishing:
Exposed surfaces shall be floated and finished with a smooth wood float until true to grade and section
and uniform in texture. Floated surfaces shall then be brushed with a fine-hair brush with longitudinal
strokes The top of the curb shall be rounded with an edging tool to a radius of 13 mm (V2 inch)
Immediately after removing the front curb form, the face of the curb shall be rubbed with a wood or
concrete rubbing block and water until blemishes, form marks, and tool marks have been removed. The
front curb surface, while still wet, shall be brushed in the same manner as the curb top.
C. Joint Finishing:
Curb edges at formed joints shall be finished as indicated.
D. Surface and Thickness Tolerances:
Finished surfaces shall not vary more than 6.4 mm from the testing edge of a 3.05 m straight edge.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:
The Contractor shall perform the inspection and tests described and meet specified the requirements for
inspection details and frequency of testing.
3.04 SURFACE DEFICIENCIES AND CORRECTIONS:

A. Thickness Deficiency:
When measurements indicate that the completed concrete section is deficient in thickness by more than
6 mm (4 inch) the deficient section shall be removed, between regularly scheduled joints, and replaced.
B. High Areas:
In areas not meeting surface smoothness and plan grade requirements, high areas shall be reduced
either by rubbing the freshly finished concrete with carborundum brick and water when the concrete is
less than 36 hours old or by grinding the hardened concrete with an approved surface grinding machine
after the concrete is 36 hours old or more. The area corrected by grinding the surface of the hardened
concrete shall not exceed 5 percent of the area of any integral slab, and the depth of grinding shall not
exceed 6 mm (inch). All pavement areas requiring grade or surface smoothness corrections in excess of
the limits specified above shall be removed and replaced.
C. Appearance:
Exposed surfaces of the finished work will be inspected by the Client Representative and any deficiencies
in appearance will be identified. Areas which exhibit excessive cracking, discoloration, form marks, or
which are otherwise inconsistent with the overall appearances of the work shall be removed and
replaced
0208 LANDSCAPE:
NOTE: Work in this Section includes, but is not limited to the preparation of landscaped areas with 100mm
thick imported fill material and 250mm thick Agricultural soil (sweet sail) or approval equal, as per drawing
details with approval by Client Representative.
PARTI – GENERAL:
1.0 1 DESCRIPTION:
A. The Contractor shall submit details of the preparation of landscaped areas with furnish all labor,
materials, tools and equipment necessary to complete and maintain the work as indicated on the
Drawings.
B. Work to be performed and supervised at all times by qualified personnel.
1.0 2 PLANTING SOIL MIXTURE:

A. Before delivery of the planting soil mix, the Contractor shall furnish written statements giving the
location from which constituents of the soil mix are to be obtained, together with a laboratory analysis
of each constituent.
1.0 3 SUBMITTALS:
A. The Contractor shall submit all certificates of inspection required by Government Authorities. He shall
submit manufacturers or suppliers certified analysis for soil amendments and fertilizer materials together
with other data substantiating that materials comply with the specified requirernents.
B. The Contractor shall furnish for approval, planting medium and soils suitability analyses from an
approved independent testing laboratory in a format approved by and at intervals as set forth herein.
Soils analyses shall include testing laboratory recommendations for soil amendments on receipt of which
the soil mix shall if necessary be revised accordingly.
C. The Contractor shall submit, not less than fourteen (14) days prior to installation, samples of materials
for approval For standard products the manufacturer's analyses will be acceptable. For all other
materials, analyses shall be by a recognized laboratory. The following shall be submitted for approval
1. Samples of sand, vermiculite, sphagnum peat moss, and fertilizers.
2. Samples of soil mixes.
2.0 1 SOIL MATERIALS:
A. Sand for soil mixes shall be obtained from approved borrow sources. It shall conform to the
following physical and chemical characteristics.
1. Physical Characteristic:
Material passing a No. 10 sieve : 100%
Material passing a No. 35 sieve : 90 - 100%
Material passing a No. 140 sieve: 0-10%
Material passing a No. 270 sieve: 0-3%
2. Chemical Characteristics:
Salinity (ECe x 10) : less than 2
SAR (Sodium Absorption Ration) : less than 1
Boron (saturation extract):less than 0.5 ppm
Рн : less than 8.5
B. Soil organic amendment shall be sphagnum moss with the following chemical and physical
characteristics:
1. Physical Characteristics:
Bulk Density : 60-80 g/L (dry)

Moisture content : 40 - 50%
Moisture holding capacity: 40-55% by volume
2. Chemical Characteristics:
Organic Matter :95 - 98% weight
pH :35 - 4.5
Total Nitrogen :0.9 -2.0% weight (dry)
Ash :1-3% by weight
Exchange capacity : 100 - 150 mval/100g
organic matter (dry)
C. The Contractor shall provide fertilizers as indicated below for soil mixes:
1. Soil Mixes:
A. For outside use.
1. Single superphosphate, Ca(H2PO2)-HO with guaranteed analysis of 20% P205 (0-20-
0) granular form.
2. Potassium nitrite, KNO with guaranteed analysis of 13% Nitrogen and 44% K20. (13-
0 44), powder form.
3. Soil sulphur, S, 99% sulphur content with 100% passing a 16 mesh screen and 50%
passing a 100 mesh screen.
4. Dolomite, CaCO3MgCO3, with 100% calcium carbonate equivalency Kasiser AG-65
or approved equal
B. For indoor use.
1. 25% sand, 25% peat moss, 25% potting sail 25% vermiculite.
2. Tree and Shrub Pits.
Slow release fertilizer tablets weighing 21 grams each, shall be provided. tightly
compressed, long lasting (two years continuous), and with guaranteed analysis of (20-
10-5) plus Fe, Mn, Zn in chelated form.
3. The Contractor shall furnish a certificate of compliance stating that materials
delivered meet the Specification.
C. Soil Amendments.
1. Expanded horticultural vermiculite shall be grade No. 3 and shali meet the following
requirements:
a. Color-Brown
i. Water retention % by weight-530 00.
ii. Bulk density - 80.1 to 1442 kg/m3.
iii. Particle size range - 0.1 to 2.4mm air porosity % -24 to 44.
iv. Caution exchange capacity (me/100g)-approx 75.
b. Extractable concentrations of Nutrients from vermiculite in (ppm).
P Soluble Salts Mmhos/cm NO3 NH4 P K Ca Mg Fe 6 0.03 0 0 0.10 3.99 0.65
0.71 0.27
2. Provide other amendments as required by the soil test analysis.
D. Depth of Soil.
The depth of soil will be as follows: Lawn & Ground cover =30 cm.
Shrubs & Succulent =80cm.
Trees = 120-150cm.
Date Palm = 200-250cm.
2.0 2 INSPECTION:
A. The Client representative has the right to reject unsatisfactory or defective material at any time
during the progress of the work.
2.0 3 PREPARATION OF SOIL MIXES:
A. The soil mixes shall be in the quantities or proportions as indicated below according to the
procedures outlined and amended as necessary by any required soil analysis
1. Soil Mix-A (Date palmi Trees/Shrubs/Ground Cover! succulent Vines) Ingredients:
Sand - 80% by volume
Sphagnum Moss - 10% by volume
Vermiculite - 10% by volume
Single super phosphate - 1 kg/m3
Soil sulphur - 1 kg/m3
2. Soil Mix-B (Pots/Planters) Ingredients:
Sand - 25% by volume
Sphagnum Moss - 50% by volume
Vermiculite - 25% by volume
Single super phosphate - 05 kg/m3
Potassium Nitrate - 0.3 kg/m3
Dolomite - 03 Kgim3
3. Soil-Mix-C(Date Palm Trees/Shrubs/Ground Cover/ Succulent Vines/Planters)
Red Dune Sand (Khurais) -69% by volume.
Imported Organic Soil -35% by volume
Wadis Soil -5% by volume.
Single superphosphate - 1 kg kg/m3
Soil sulphur - 1 kg/m3.
B. In the event that the soil mixes are above a pH of 7.5 the sand portion of the mix shall be amended
with suitable additives (soil, sulphur, sulphuric acid, etc.) to bring the resultant soil mixes into the
specified range of 6.5 to 7.5. Such additives shall be added to the sand prior to addition of the
organic amendment or fertilizer. After adding such additives the sand shall be kept moist for a
minimum of 30 days and then leached with landscape irrigation water to bring the salinity, SAR,
PH and Boron of the resultant mix within the ranges indicated above.
C. Three trial lots of 1m' each for both mixes shall be prepared by the Contractor prior to the start of
full soil mixing operations. Samples of these trials shall be submitted for analysis as described. The
analysis shall include specific recommendations for changes in the soil mix formulations. The
Contractor shall submit such analysis and recommendations and shall make adjustments to the Soil
mix as directed by the Client representative after approval the Contractor may begin the full soilt
mixing operations.
3.01 PREPARATION OF PLANTED AREAS:

A. Excavations shall all be as specified in this Section.
B. Where no rock or high water table occurs, only planting soil will be used to backfill planting
pits/bed areas.
C. Areas to be planted with ground cover shall be brought to even running grades after which they
shall be cultivated to a depth of 200mm All weeds, rocks, and other debris shall be removed and be
disposed of as descnbed elsewhere in the Contract.
D. Nitrogen and super phosphate fertilizer (as approved) shall be applied to all ground cover areas,
shrub, vine and tree pits.
3.02 PREPARATION OF PLANTERS:

A. Place not less than 100mm layer of drainage material in the bottom of planters, install permeable
membrane fabric and fill with soil Mix-B (as specified). Place soil mix in lightly compacted layers to an
elevation 50 mm below top of planter allowing for natural settlement.
B. Provide dupont typar filter Fabric in the courtyard planters, in order to separate the planting medium
from the drainage stone.
3.03 CLEAN-UP AND PROTECTION:

A. During landscape the Contractor shall keep pavements, roads and hardcape clean and the work areas in
an orderly condition
DIVISION 3:
CONCRETE:
0301 Concrete Reinforcement.
0302 Concrete Work (Cast In Place & Pre-cast).
0301 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
PARTI – GENERAL:
1.0 1 DESCRIPTION:
This section, governs for furnishing, fabrication and placing of all reinforcing steel bars, welded wire fabrics,
including chairs, ties, splicing devices, and other reinforcing accessories required to complete all types of
concrete work for the projects.
1.0 2 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
Section 0302 - Concrete Work
1.0 3 QUALITY ASSURANCE:

a. A 36/ A 36M-04 Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel.
b. A 82-02 Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement.
c. A184/ A 184M-01 Standard Specification for Welded Deformed Steel Bar Mats for Concrete.
d. A 185-02 Standard specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain, for Concrete.
e. A 2421 A 242M-04 Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural Steel.
f. A 307-04 Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 psi Tensile Strength.
g. A 497 Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Deformed, for Concrete.
h. A 815M Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet- Steel Bars for Concrete
Reinforcement.
i. A 722/ A 722M- 98(2003) Standard Specification for Uncoated High-Strength Steel Bars for
Prestressing Concrete.
j. A 7671 A 767M-006 Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Bars for Concrete
Reinforcement.
k. A 7751 A 775M-04a Standard Specification for Epoxy-Coated Steel Reinforcing Bars.
l. A 8841 A 884M-04 Standard Specification for Epoxy-Coated Steel Wire and Welded Wire
Reinforcement.
m. A 9341 A 934M-04 Standard Specification for Epoxy-Coated Prefabricated Steel Reinforcing Bars.
n. A 9927 A 992M-04 Standard Specification for Structural Steel Shapes.
o. A 996/ A 996M-04 Standard Specification for Rail Steel and Axle-Steel Deformed Bars for Concrete
Reinforcement.
1.0 4 SUBMITTALS:
The Contractor shall submit samples and manufacturer's certificates of the compliance, for
Owner/Consultant approval.
Note: Prior to start of work, the contractor shall prepare and submit bar bending schedule, all in accordance with the
relevant cod for approval of the Consultant.

2.01 MATERIALS:
A. Reinforcing steel shall be manufactured by Saudi Iron & steel Company (Hadeed or approved equal).
B. Reinforcing steel shall be deformed bars conforming to ASTM A-706 grade 60 with a yield stress 420
N/mm?
C. Welded steel wire fabric shall conform to ASTM A-497 / A-884 with a minimum yield stress 500
N/mm2.
D. Low relaxation strands for hollow core shall conform to ASTM A-416-80 grade 270.
E. Dowel bars details as shown on the drawing.
F. Bar supports and accessories shall be of galvanised or plastic coated wire and shall be specifically made
for the intended use by proprietary manufacturers.
1. Use wire bar type supports complying with CRSI recommendations. Use plastic spacers or pre-cast
concrete blocks as detailed in below.
2. The supports shall be used in such a manner that thay will not be exposed or contribute to the
discoloration or deterioration of the concrete.
3. For slabs on grade, use supports with plates at bottom or horizontal runners where base material
will not support chair legs.
4. Over waterproof membranes, use pre-cast concrete chairs to prevent penetration of the members.
G. Only new materials shall be used and shall be free of loose rust, mill scale, or coating with reduces
bond. They are to be in accordance with the following codes:
a. A 496-02 Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Deformed, for Concrete Reinforcement .
b. A 4971 A 497M-02 Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Deformed, for
Concrete.
c. A 500-03a Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural
Tubing in Rounds and Shapes.
d. A 500-01 Standard Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and Searless Carbon Steel Structural
Tubing.
e. A 5721 A 572M-04 Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy ColumbiumVanadium
Structural Steel.
f. A 588/ A 558M-04 Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural Steel with 50 ksi
[345 MPa] Minimum Yield Point to 4-in. (100-mm) Thick.
g. A 8151 A 615M-04 Standard Specification for Deformed and Plair Carbon Steel Bars for Concrete
Reinforcement.
h. A 7061 A 706M-04 Standard Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Deformed and Plain Bars for
Concrete Reinforcement.
i. A 7221 A 722M-98(2003) Standard Specification for Uncoated High-Strength Steel Bars for
Prestressing Concrete.
j. A 767/A767M-00b Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Bars for Concrete
Reinforcement.
k. A 775/ A 775M-04a Standard Specification for Epoxy-Coated Steel Reinforcing Bars.
l. A 884/A 884M-04 Standard Specification for Epoxy-Coated Steel Wire and Welded Wire
Reinforcement.
m. A 934/ A 934M-04 Standard Specification for Epoxy-Coated Prefabricated Steel Reinforcing Bars.
n. A 9921 A 992M-04 Standard Specification for Structural Steel Shapes.
o. A 9961 A 996M-04 Standard Specification for Rail Steel and Axle-Steel Deformed Bars for
Concrete Reinforcement.

PART ILL-EXECUTION:
3.01 CONSTRUCTION METHODS:

A. Fabrication:
1. General:
Fabricate reinforcing bars to conform to required shapes and dimension, with fabrication
tolerances complying with CRSI "Manual of Standard Practice". In case of fabricating errors,
do not rebend or straighten reinforcement in a manner that will injure or weaken the material.
In these cases, only new material to be use.
2. Unacceptable Materials:
A. Bar lengths, depths and bends exceeding specified fabrication tolerances.
B. Bend or links not indicated on drawings of final shop drawings.
C. Bars with reduced cross-section due to excessive rusting mill scale, coating which reduces
bond, or other cause.
3. Bending:
Reinforcing steel shall be accurately bent or formed to the appropriate dimensions.
4. Splices:
A. Lap splices may be provided as necessary except as otherwise detailed on drawings.
B. Minimum laps unless detailed otherwise to be:
High tensile deformed grade 414 N/mm: Larger of 40 times bar diameter or 300 mm,
whichever is larger.
Welded steel wire fabric, length of overlap between outermost cross wires of each fabric
sheet shall be not less than: Larger of 1 cross-wire spacing + 50 mm or 300 mm.
B. Product Delivery, Storage and Handling:
1. Delivery: Deliver reinforcing to the job site free from dirt, loose scale and rust, paint, oil,
or other foreign materials.
2. Storage: Store reinforcing above the surface of the ground on platforms, skids or other
supports, and protect from mechanical injury and surface deterioration caused by exposure
to the weather.
3. Handling. Handle so that reinforcing is not damaged by crimping, bending, or warping
before and during placement.
C. Installation:
Place reinforcing steel in positions indicated on the drawings.
1. Clean reinforcement to remove loose rust and mill scale, earth, and other materials
which reduce or destroy bond with concrete.
2. The dimensions shown are to centers of bars, unless otherwise noted.
3. Hold bars securely in place with tie wires and other means during placing of concret.
4. Do not tack weld reinforcement.
5. Space steel required distance from forms by approved galvanized metal spacers, metal
spacers with plastic coated tips, stainless steel spacers, plastic spacers, or pre-cast
concrete blocks as approved.
a. Pre-cast concrete block shall be a maximum of 50 mm square by the thickness
required for proper reinforcement clearance from forms. Blocks shall be cast from
the same concrete to be used in the structure but it may use smaller maximum
size aggregate.
6. Use chairs to support all reinforcing steel, except as otherwise approved.
7. Use heavy bolster to support bottom layer of reinforcing in all beams.
8. Clean all mortar, mud, dirt etc from reinforcement before placing concrete.
9. Cover to main reinforcing bars shall be as listed below unless specifically shown
otherwise on the drawings (either for pre-cast or cast-in-situ):
Foundations : 75 mm exposed to weather nor earth.

Beam & Columns: 50 mm exposed to weather nor earth. 40 mm not
exposed to weather.
Slabs (to all reint.) : 40 mm exposed to weather nor earth. 20 mm not
exposed to weather.
Walls (to all reinf.) 40 mm exposed to weather nor earth 20 mm not
exposed to weather nor earth.
Pre-cast Concrete:
Wall Panels: 20 mm exposed to weather nor earth. 20 mm not exposed to weather nor earth.
Other: 40 mm exposed to weather nor earth. 40 mm not exposed to weather nor earth.
D. Future Extension:
Exposed reinforcement and inserts which are intended for bonding with future extensions
shall be protected from corrosion by embedding it into grouted cells of concrete masonry
or into lean concrete (20 N/mm') as shown on the drawings where applicable.
0302 CONCRETE WORK
PARTI – GENERAL
1.0 1 DESCRIPTION:
A. General:
This section covers furnish and install of concrete work (cast-in-situ and pre-cast) where applicable:
B. Related Works Specified Elsewhere:
1. Section 0102 - Quality Control.
2. Section 0301 - Concrete Reinforcement.
3. Section 0701 - Waterproofing and Damp Proofing, Vapour Barrier for Slabs.
1. Codes and Standards:
Comply with the provision of following codes, specifications and standards except as otherwise specified.
a. ACI 117 "Standard Specification for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Material.
b. ASTM C172" Standard Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete C).
c. ACI 301 "Specification for Structural Concrete for Buildings".
d. ACI 315 "Manual of Standard Practice for detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures.
e. ACI 318 "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete".
f. ACI 347 "Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork”.
g. ACI 305 "Recommended Practice for Hot Weather Concreting".
h. PCI (Pre-cast & Pre-stressed Concrete) Institute, 4th Edition – 92.
i. PCI Journal & PCI Committee Reports.
j. ASTM C173M" Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the
volumetric Method.
2. Workmanship:
a. The Contractor is responsible for correction of concrete work which does not conform to the
specified requirements including strength, tolerances and finishes. Correct deficient concrete as per
Consultant approved repair procedures.
b. Maintain procedures and conditions for quality control which are equivalent to plant production
for precast panels.
3. Tolerances:
1. Erection tolerances/variations:
a. Variations from plumb: 6 mm in any 6096 mm run or storey height: 13 mm total in any 12192
mm or longer run.
b. Variations from level or elevation 6 mm in any 6096 mm run, 13 mm in any 12192 mm run.
c. Variations from theoretical position in plan: plus or minus 6 mm maximum at any locations.
d. Offsets in alignment of adjacent members at any joint: 1.5 mm in any 3048 mm run, 6 mm
maximum.
2. Allowable Casting Tolerance as per PCI Design Handbook:
LOCATOIN TOLERANCE PRECAST ELMENT KEY
Length + 12 mm 6.7.8.9.03
+ 19mm 3.5 1=Double Tee
+ 25 mm 1.2.4.11.12 2=Sing Tee
Width + 6 mm 1.2.3.5.6.8.9.12 3=Bldg.beam rect& Ledger
+ 9mm 4 4=l-beam
+ 9mm 11.13 5= Box Beam
Depth + 6mm-3 mm 10 6= Column
+ 6mm 1.2.3.5.6.7.8.9.12 7=Hollow Core Slab
+ 12mm-6 mm 4 =8 Ribbed wall panel
+ 9mm 11 9= insulated wall panel
+ 12mm 13 10=Archit wall panel
Flange of + 6mm-3 mm 1.2.8.10.12 11=Pile
thickness
+ 6mm 3.4.13 12= Joist
Web thickness + 3mm 1.8.10.12 13= step unit
+ 6mm 2.3
+ 9 mm-6 4
Mm
+ 9 mm 5
Position of + 6mm 1.2.3.4.5.6.8.9.11.12
tendons
+ 3 mm 10
Camber, variation + 6mm per3 m 1.2.12
from design
+ 19 mm max
+ 3mmper3m
+ 25 mm max 4
+ 19 mm max 3
+ 12 m max 5
Camber,Differntia + 6 mm per 3m 1.2.5
l
+ 19 mm max 1.2.3.12
+ 16 mm 4
Beaning plates, +3 1.2.3.4.12
Tipping,
Flushness
4. Concrete Testing Services:
a. Contractor shall employ at his own expense independent testing laboratory for mix design and
testing requirements and the timely submission of results to the Consultant for review.
b. Materials and installed work may require testing and re-testing, as directed by the Consultant,
at any time during the progress of the work. Tests to be done at the Contractor's expense,
including re-testing of rejected materials and installed work.
1.0 3 SUBMITTALS:
1. Product Data:
Submit a copy of manufacturer's/suppliers specifications with application and installation
instructions for proprietary materials and items, including reinforcement and forming accessories,
admixtures, patching compounds, Mix design Data, water stops if required, joint systems, methods
statement and any others requested by the Consultant
2. Laboratory Test Reports:
Submit one copy of laboratory test reports for cast in-situ & pre-cast concrete materials and mix
design test as specified.
3. Method statement and site testing procedures:
The Contractor shall submit to the client the method statement and site
Testing procedures anf get approval before commencing work.
0302 CONCRETE WORK

2.01 FORM MATERIALS:

A. Forms for exposed finish concrete. Unless otherwise indicated construct all formwork for exposed
concrete surfaces with plywood, metal, metal-framed plywood-faced or other acceptable panel-type
materials, to provide continuous, straight, smooth, exposed surfaces. Furnish in largest practical sizes to
minimize number of joints.
Provide for material with sufficient thickness to withstand pressure of newly-placed concrete without
bow or deflections.
B. Forms for unexposed finish concrete: Form concrete surfaces which will be unexposed in finished
structure with plywood, lumber, metal or other acceptable material.
C. Form coatings: provide commercial formulation form-coating compounds that will not bond with, stain
nor adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces
requiring bond adhesive.
2.02 REINFORCING MATERIAL:

A. Reinforcing Bars ASTM A-615M grade 60 with a yeild stress 414 N/mm2.
B. Steel Wire ASTM A82. plain, cold-drawn, steel.
C. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A497/A818, welded steel wire fabric.
D. Low Relaxation Strands: ASTM A-416-80 grade 270.
E. Supports for Reinforcement:
Provide supports for reinforcement including bolsters, chairs, concrete spacers, and other devices
for spacing, supporting and fastening bars and welded wire fabric in place. Contractor to obtain
Owner/Consultant prior approval on all supporting & tying materials.
1. For slab-on-grade, use supports with sandplates or horizontal runners where welded base
materials will not support chair legs.
2. For exposed-to-view concrete surfaces, where legs of supports are in contact with forms,
provide supports with legs which are hot-dip galvanised, plastic protected, or pre-cast concrete
spacers.
3. For pre-cast concrete, use spacers/chairs as per manufacturer’s recommendations, subject to
approval of the Consultant.
2.03 CONCRETE MATERIALS:

A. Grey Cement: ASTM C150, type 1, for all framed slabs above grade and cast-in/pre-cast concrete
elements, from approved local manufactorer or equal approved.
B. Grey Cement: ASTM C150, type V, for all concrete to be in contact with earth. Or equal approved.
Use only one brand of cement throughout the project.
C. White Cement ASTM C150, type 1, at all external surfaces of external cast-in/pre-cast elements,
decorative window surrounds elements and parapet walls.
D. Aggregates: ASTM C33, and as herein specified:
Provide aggregates from a single approved source:
1. All aggregates to comply with ASTM C33 and Royal Commission international guideline specs.
2. Fine Aggregate: clean, shap, natural sand-free from loam, clay, lumps or other deleterious
substances.
E. Coarse Aggregate clean, un-coated, processed aggregate containing no clay, mud, loam or foreign matter
as follows:
1. Crushed stone, processed from natural rock or stone.
2. Washed gravel, either natural or crushed.
3. Maximum aggregate size: not larger than 1/4 of the narrowest dimension between sides of forms,
1/3 of the depth of slabs, nor 3/4 of the minimum clear spacing between individual reinforcing
bars. However 20 mm to be the maximum size in concrete & 10 mm in grout.
F. Water: clean, fresh, drinkable, to comply with ASTM C-94.
G. Air-entering admixtures to comply with ASTM AC260.
H. Set control admixtures to comply with ASTM C494M as follows:
1. Type A, water reducing.
2. Type B, Water-reducing & retarding.
3. Type C, Accelerating.
4. Type D, Water-reducing and retarding.
5. Type For G, high range water reducers (super plasticizer)
Admixtures containing calcium chloride are not permitted.
2.04 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS:

A. Vapour Barner for slabs-on-grade, and elsewhere as indicated on the drawings, shall be polyethylene
membrane not less than 200 microns. (Refer to Section 0701).
Membrane - forming curing compound: ASTM C309, type 1, unless other type acceptable to the
Consultant.
B. Expansion Joint Fillers:
Closed cell neoprene joint filler (CN-GF): provide expanded neoprene complying with ASTM D1056,
class SC (oil resistant and medium swell), of 13 kpa to 34 kpa compression deflection (grade SCE 41),
except provide 90 kpa to 117 kpa compression deflection (grade SCE 44) wherever filler is applied under
sealant exposed to traffic.
A preformed non-extruding resilient filler saturated with high quality bituminous materials having
preserving characteristics.
C. Joint Sealing Compound (refer to Section 0705).
D. Soil chemical poisoning for termite control (Permethrin Dragnot FT or any other equivalent termiticide
with pyrethroid active ingredient to meet U.S. Urban Department and Property Standards) to be
sprayed under the entire area building by an approved applicator.
E. Hollow core slab (HCS) shall be pre-cast concrete blocks of approved design for inclusion in composite
concrete slabs as shown on the drawings.
F. Water Stops: provide flat, dumbbell type or centre bulb type water stops at construction joints sized to
suit joints.
2.05 SLUMP LIMITS:
Proportion and design mixes to result in concrete slump at the point of placement as follows:
1. Ramps and sloping surfaces: 100 mm (+/-25mm).
2. Reinforced foundation systems: 100mm (+/-25mm).
3. All other concrete including pre-cast concrete: Not less than 25 mm and not more than 102 mm.
2.06 CONCRETE MIXING:

A. Job site mixing shall not be permitted except when approved by the concemed authority and
Consultant.
B. Ready mix concrete: Comply with the requirements of ASTM C94, and as herein specified.
1. Delete the references for allowing additional water to be added to the batch for material with
insufficient slump. Addition of water to the batch will not be permitted.
2. During hot weather, or under conditions contributing to rapid setting of concrete, a shorter mixing
time than specified in ASTM C94 may be required.
3. When the air temperature is between 29 to 32°C, reduce the mixing and delivery time from 1%
hours to 75 minutes and when air temperature is over 32°C, reduce the mixing and delivery time to
60 minutes.
Note Contractor to comply with the provisions as stated in ACI 305 for the hot weather / high
wind i and low humidity condition as and when Required.
2.07 CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS (PRE-CAST):

A. Steel plates Structural quality, hot-rolled carbon steel, ASTM A283, grade C.
B. Steel shapes: ASTM A36.
C. Anchor bolts: ASTM A307, low-carbon steel balts, regular hexagon nuts and carbon steelwashers.
D. Finish of steel units exposed units galvanized per ASTM A153, others painted with primer.
E. Accessories: Provide all connector, sockets, anchorage system and other accessories required for
production and installation of precast units and for support of subsequent construction or finishes.
Manufactured by DEHA, PFIEFER HALFEN or Consultant approved equivalent.
2.08 MISCELLANEOUS (PRE-CAST):

A. Built in anchorage: Accurately position built in anchorage devices and secure to the formwork
Locate anchorage devices where they do not affect the position of main reinforcement or the
placing of concrete. Do not relocate bearing plates in units unless accepted by the pre-cast concrete
supplier.
B. Quality Control: Pre-cast unit manufacturer shall institute quality control procedures for the
manufacture, inspection and testing of pre-cast units Furnish the Consultant and Contractor with
copies of test reports and/or certification for materials and quality control testing of pre-cast units.
0302 CONCRETE WORK

3.01 CONCRETE PROPERTIES:
A. Mix design shall be by proportioning in laboratory trial batches obtaining the required concrete strength
in accordance with the requirements of UBC.
B. Mix design propotions shall be submitted for approval by Consultant before any order for concrete is
made.
C. Machine concrete mixing on site shall be allowed for grouting and screeding use only and after prior
approval from Consultant has been obtained.
D. Aggregates shall be generally 20 mm maximum size except for grout to pre-cast joints and reinforced
masonry with maximum size of 10 mm.
E. Concrete shall possess the following minimum strenghths:
Note: Cylinder compressive strength to be follow as per in the general not drawing details.
CONCRETE 28days Minimum cement Maximum free Slump

LOCATION compressive content (kg/m3) water/ cement
strength (n/mm2) ratio
Foundations Grade 30 400 0.40 100mm
slabs, grade beams,
topping & all other
insitu concrete not
otherwise nominated.
Slabs, beams, wall & 30 400 0.400 100mm
all other insitu
concrete not
otherwise nominated.
Lean concrete 20 300 0.40 125 mm
All pre-cast concrete 35 450 0.40 100mm
Elements (grey &
white cement)
Grout to reinforced 20 300 4.45 125mm
masonry
F. Where the slump is deemed in appropriate for acceptable workability, the Contractor can recommend
dosing with super plasterizer, measured by truck mounted dispenser, in accordance with the
manufacture's recommendations and subject to the Consultant approval.
3.02 FORMS:
Note: Contractor shall obtain approval of the methods and material proposed for form works for various type of
forms: a) Temporary, b) Permanent, c) Rough and d) fine form works.
A. Design, erect, support, brace and maintain formwork to support vertical and lateral loads that might be
applied until such loads can be supported by the concrete structure.
B. Design formwork to be readily removable without impact, shock or damage to cast-in place concrete
surface and adjacent member.
C. Chamfer exposed corners and edges using wood, metal, PVC or rubber chamfer strips fabricated to
produce uniform smooth lines and tight edge joints.
D. Provide openings in concrete formwork to accommodate work of other sections (plumbing, mechanical
and electrical work) using sleeve pipes etc.
3.03 PLACING REINFORCEMENT:

A. Clean reinforcement of lose rust and mill scale, earth and other materials which reduce or destroy bond
with concrete.
B. Accurately position, support and secure reinforcement against displacement by formwork,construction,
or concrete placement operations. Locate and support reinforcement by metal chairs, runners, bolsters,
spacers, and hangers as required.
C. Place reinforcement to obtain at least the minimum coverage for concrete protection. Arrange, space
and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concreting.
D. Install welded wire fabric in as long lengths as practicable lap adjoining pieces at least one full mesh and
lace splices with wire. Offset end laps in adjacent widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction.
3.04 JOINTS:
A. Construction Joints Locate and install construction joints as required, so as not to impair the strength
and appearance of the structure.
1. Provide key ways at least 38 mm depth in all construction joints in walls, slabs and between
walls and footings.
2. Place construction joints perpendicular to the main reinforcement except as indicated
otherwise, continue all reinforcement across construction joints.
Water Stops: If required, provide water stops in construction joints as shown on drawings.
Install water stops to form a continuous diaphram in each joint.
3.05 INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED ITEMS:
Set and build into the work anchorage devices and other embedded items required for other work that is
attached to, or supported by, cast-in-place, or pre-cast concrete, use setting drawings, diagrams, instructions
and directions provided by supplier of the items to be attached thereto.
3.06 CONCRETE PLACEMENT:

A. Pre-placement Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete the formwork installation,
reinforcing steel, and items to be embedded or cast-in, thoroughly wet wood forms immediately before
placing concrete.
B. Co-ordinate the installation of joint materials and moisture barriers with placement of forms and
reinforcing steel.
C. Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no concrete will be placed on concrete
which has hardened sufficiently to cause the formation of seams or planes of weakness within the
section.
D. Deposit concrete as nearly as practicable to its final locations to avoid segregation due to rehandling or
flowing.
E. Consolidate placed concrete by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by handspading, ridding
or tamping. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside the forms, insert and withdraw vibrators
vertically at uniform spaced locations not farther than the visible effectiveness of the machine.
F. Hot Weather Placing:
1. When hot weather condition exists that would seriously impair the quality and strength of concrete,
place concrete in compliance with AC1305 and as herein specified.
2. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature at time of placement below 32°C.
Mixing water may be chilled, or chopped ice may be used to control the concrete temperature.
3. Cover reinforcing steel with water soaked burlap if it becomes too hot, so that steel temperature
will not exceed the ambient air temperature immediately before embedment in concrete.
4. Wet forms thoroughly before placing concrete.
5. Do not use retarding admixture unless otherwise accepted in mix design.
3.07 MONOLITHIC SLAB FINISHES:
A. Scratch Finish: Apply scratch finish to monolithic slab surfaces that are to receive concrete floor
tapping or mortar setting beds for tile and other bonded applied cementitious finish flooring
material.
After placing slabs, plane surface to a tolerance not exceeding 6 mm in 610 mm. After leveling,
roughen surface before final set, with stiff brushes, brooms or rakes.
B. Float Finish: Apply float tinish to monolithic slab surfaces that are to receive trowel finish and other
finishes as hereinafter specified and slab surfaces which are to covered with membrane or elastic
waterproofing.
C. Trowel Finish: Apply trowel finish to monolithic slab surfaces that are to be exposed-to view, unless
otherwise indicated, and slab surfaces that are to be covered with thin set ceramic tile, paint or
other thin film finish coating system.
D. Non-Slip Broom Finish: Apply non-slip broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps and
ramps and elsewhere indicated.
Immediately after trowel finishing, slightly roughen concrete surface by brooming with fiber bristle
broom perpendicular to main traffic route.
3.08 CONCRETE CURING AND PROTECTION:

A. General:
Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperature, and
maintain without drying at a relatively constant temperature for a period of time necessary for hydration
of cement and proper hardening.
1. Start initial curing as soon as free water has disappeared from concrete surface after placing and
finishing. Keep continuously moist for not less than 72 hours.
2. Begin final curing procedures immediately following initial curing and before concrete has dried.
Continue final curing for at least 7 days and in accordance with AC1301 procedures.
B. Curing Methods: Perform curing of concrete by moist curing by moisture, retaining cover curing, by
membrane curing, or by combination thereof, as therein specified.
C. Provide moisture curing by following methods.
1. Keep concrete surface continuously wet by covering with water.
2. Continuous water - fog spray.
3. Covering concrete surface with specified absorptive cover, thoroughly saturating cover with water
and keeping continuously wet.
4. Using curing compound as approved by Consultant.
3.09 REMOVAL OF FORMS:

A. Formwork not supporting weight of concrete, such as sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts
of the work, may be removed after cumulatively curing for 48 hours after placing concrete, provided
concrete is sufficiently hard to not be damaged by form removal.
B. Formwork supporting weight of concrete such as beam soffits, may not be removed in less than 14 days
and until concrete has attained design minimum compressive strength of in-place concrete by testing
field-cured specimens representative of concrete location or members and subject to Consultant approval
However, for beams & arches of span 6 to 9 metres the form stripping period will be 21 days.
3.010 DEFECTIVE WORK:
Any defective work discovered after form removal to be repaired and replaced immediately at Contractor's
expense.
The Contractor shall at all times incorporate methods that will minimise the cause of requiring future
concrete repairs due to construction.
Main causes are surface air voids, sand streaking, peeling and blistering.
Prepackaged cementations repair shall be mixed and used as per manufacturer's recommendations. Fins shall
be neatly removed from exposed surface.
3.011 PRE-CAST PANELS / MEMBERS:

A. Dimensional Tolerances:
1. Units having dimension smaller or greater than required, and outside the specified tolerance limits,
shall be considered deficient in strength and subject to additional testing.
2. Pre-cast units having any dimension greater than required will be rejected if the appearance or
function of the structure is adversely affected. Repair, removal and replacement to be made or
rejected units as required to meet the construction requirements and conditions.
3. Shall conform to PCI Design Handbook.
B. Installation:
1. Pre-cast units to be installed only after the units achieve design ultimate compressive strength.
2. While installing pre-cast concrete members plumb, level, and alignments within the specified limits
of erection. Provide temporary supports and bracing as required to maintain position, stability and
alignment. Horizontal and vertical joint alignment and also uniform joint to be maintained as
erection progresses.
C. Accessories:
Install clips, hangers and other accessories required for erection of pre-cast units to supporting members
and back up materials.
D. Anchor Units:
In final position by bolting, welding, grouting or as otherwise shown on drawings. Remove temporary
shims, wedges and spacers as soon as possible after anchoring is completed. All metal anchoring, angles,
inserts to be anti-rust/corrosion material.
E. Grouting Connections & Joints:
After pre-cast concrete units have been placed and secured, grout open space at connection and joints as
follows:
a. All exposed joints shall be sealed with approval sealant with ultra violet resistance characteristics.
b. All Joints shall be treated properly to acceptable finish.
c. Cement (grey) if used to finish may consist of 1 part Portland cement, 2 parts of sand and only enough
water properly mixed for hydration.
d. All structural joints shall be hooked together with proper stoel bars.
e. Insert Gaskets:
Insert gaskets or backing rods into joints between units as they are installed and secured. Make
adjustments as required to maintain accurate face joint dimension.
As welded connections, apply rust-inhibitive coating on damaged areas, same as shopapplied materials,
use galvanizing repair coating an galvanised surfaces.
F. CONCRETE SURFACE PROTECTION SYSTEM:
A. Protective treatment shall be applied to the concrete surface and repairs in accordance with the
following requirements:
1. The concrete surface shall be clean, dry and sound substrate at moderate temperature and
humidity conditions, and in well ventilated space.
2. All concrete repairs shall be completed and cured prior to application of surface coating.
3. Surface preparation shall be carried out in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
4. All dust and debris resulting from surface preparation shall be removed pnor to applying the
surface treatment.
5. Mixing and method of application of coating shall be in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendation.
6. Concrete surface protection material:
Concrete surface protection material shall prevent the entry of water, chloride ions and vapors
which are detrimental to concrete and steel reinforcement. These materials shall:
a. Be compatible with concrete substrate and curing membrane.
b. Withstand all operating and exposure conditions.
c. Be stable under cyclic wetting and drying conditions.
d. Gain good adhesion to old and refurbished concrete surface.
e. Be strong and flexible to withstand mechanical stresses due to impact and fatigue.
f. Be resistant to chemical and alkali attack.
3.012 On-Site Concrete Material Testing and Inspection:
a. Verify that the Contractor is following appropriate concreting practices consistent with any
extreme environmental conditions at the point of placement in the structure as defined below.
b. Inspect concrete upon arrival to verify that the proper concrete mix number, type of concrete, and
concrete strength is being placed at the proper location.
c. Inspect plastic concrete upon arrival at the jobsite to verify proper batching. Observe mix
consistency and adding of water as required to achieve targot slumps in mix designs. Record the
amount of water added and note if it exceeds that allowed in the mix design. The responsibility for
adding water to trucks at the job site shall rest only with the Contractor's designated
representative. The Contractor is responsible that all concrete placed in the field is in conformance
to the Contract Documents.
d. Obtain concrete test cylinders.
e. Perform tests to determine slump, concrete temperature, unit weight, and air entrainment. The
slump tests shall be made on concrete taken from the same ocation from which the concrete for
the test cylinders is obtained.
f. Record information for concrete test reports.
g. Verify that concrete being placed meets job Specifications. Report concrete not meeting the
specified requirements and immediately notify the Contractor, Batch Plant Inspector, Architect,
Client Representative, and The Client.
h. Pick up and transport to Laboratory, cylinders cast the previous day.
DIVISION 4:
MASONRY:
0401 Masonry Units.
0402 Concrete Unit Masonry.
0401 MASONRY UNITS

PARTI – GENERAL:
1.0 1 DESCRIPTION:
A. Work included:
This section pertains to the provision of all concrete masonry wall units for all internal and external
unit masonry (where applicable).
B. Related works specified elsewhere:
1. Section 0303 Portland Cement Concrete

2. Section 0302 Concrete Work
3. Section 0901 Solid Plaster Rendering Stucco Work
4. Section 0102 Quality Control
Refer to "Concrete Unit Masonry" Section 0402.

1.0 3 DEFINITION:
Hollow masonry unit: Masonry unit whose net cross-sectional area (solid area) in any plane parallel to the
surface containing cores, cells or deep frogs is less than 75% of its gross cross-sectional area measured in the
same plane.
Solid masonry unit: Masonry unit whose net cross-sectional area in any plane parallel to the surface
containing the cores or cells is at least 75% of the gross cross-sectional area measured in the same plane.
1.0 4 SUBMITTALS:
Three samples of each type and size of concrete masonry unit shall be submitted to the Owner/Consultant
for approval.
0401 MASONRY UNITS

2.01 MATERIALS:
A. Basic Materials.
Use in accordance with "Portland Cement Concrete" Section 0303.
1. Portland Cement.
2. Aggregates.
3. Water.
4. Admixture.
B. Hollow and Solid Concrete Masonry Units:
1. All masonry units shall be new, properly shaped and fully formed, and free from cracks or other
defects that would interfere with the proper placing of the units or impair the strength or
permanence of construction.
2. In addition to the requirements contained herein, concrete masonry units shall comply with
strength, absorption and dimensional requirements of ASTM C90 hollow core and solid block load
bearing concrete masonry units, grade N1 and be tested in accordance with ASTM C140 or SASO
87.
All hollow and solid CMU wall attain a minimum ultimate compressive strength of 20Mpa as
determined by ASTM C140 yielding prism strength (fm) of 14Mpa as determined by ASTM E447.
C. Sizes and Shapes:
As shown and specified in the drawings.
Outer wall masonry units shall consist of 40 mm outside concrete, 75 mm polystyrene extruded thermal
insulation and 85 mm inside concrete.
Shapes of units shall include stretcher, corner, double corner or pier, partition, open ended bond-Deam,
control joint, or other standard modular shapes as required for complete installation of unit masonry as
shown on the drawings.
0401 MASONRY UNITS
(See section 0402 "conctete unit Masonry”)

0402 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
PART I – GENERAL:
1.0 1 DESCRIPTION:
A. Work Included:
1. Installation of all internal and external unit masonry and accessory work (where applicable).
2. Fumishing and installation of masonry-reinforcement, ties, anchors flashings lintels etc.
3. Installation of all inserts, anchors, door and window frames, louvers, reglets and other similar items
furnished by other trades.
4. Tool and point all joints and clean all finish surfaces.
B. Related work described elsewhere:
1. Section 0302 Concrete Work.
2. Section 0401 Masonry Units.
3. Section 0901 Solid Plaster rendering Stucco Work.
4. Section 0102 Quality Control.
5. Section 0202 Boundary Walls.
6. Section 0301 Concrete Reinforcement.
1.0 2 REFERENCES:
A. SBC - Saudi Building Code.
B. SASO - Saudi Arabian Standards Organization.
C. SASO - Saudi Arabian Standards Organization.
SASO 87. Method of Test for Concrete (Cement) Building Bricks and Blocks.
SASO 145 - Concrete (Cement) Hollow Blocks for Building.
D. ACI - American Concrete Institute.
ACI 530.1 Specification for Concrete Masonry Construction.
E. ASTM - American Society for Testing & Materials.
ASTM A82 Specification for Cold Drawn Steel Wire for Concrete Reinforcement.
A153 Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware.
ASTM C90 Specification for Hollow Load-Bearing Concrete Masonry Units.
ASTM C145 Specification for Solid Load-Bearing Concrete Masonry Unit.
ASTM C270 Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry.
ASTM C476 Specification for Mortar and Grout for Reinforced Masonry.
ASTM C140 Specification for method of Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Units.
a. The requirements for quality assurance, for carrying the work, shall be in accordance
with the following:
1. Comply with the applicable code requirements for the types of concrete masonry construction
shown.
2. Wherever a fire resistance classification is shown or scheduled for concrete masonry unit
construction, comply with applicable requirements for materials and installation, tested and
listed for the construction shown.
3. Obtain units from one manufacturer, cured by one process and of uniform texture and color,
for each type required for each continuous and visually related area.
4. Establish reports and records in a manner to ensure traceability between records, test results
and locations of placed concrete masonry units.
1.0 4 SUBMITTALS:
Sample Panel:
1. Before the installation of any masonry materials, erect at the job site one sample panel of concrete
block 1 meter square minimum. Panel shall show texture of finished wall, bond, mortar joints and
workmanship of masonry materials.
2. Upon acceptance of the sample-panel, complete all required concrete unit masonry in strict
accordance with accepted standard.
1.0 5 JOB CONDITIONS:
A. Construction Loads:
1. Do not apply construction loads that exceed the safe superimposed load- carrying capacity of the
masonry.
B. Masonry Protection:
1. When work is not in progress, protect partially completed masonry against weather by covering the
top of walls with strong. waterproof, non-staining membrane. Extend membrane at least 600 mm
down on both sides of the walls 10 and hold securely in place.
2. When the mean daily temperature exceeds 38°C, or exceeds 32°C with a wind velocity greater than
13 km/h, fog spray all newly constructed masonry until damp, at least 3 times a day until the
masonry is 3 days old.
C. Hot Weather Construction:
1. Preparation before masonry work starts):
a. When the ambient temperature exceeds 38°C, or exceeds 32°C with a wind velocity greater
than 13 km/h:
1. Maintain sand piles in a damp. loose condition.
2. Provide necessary conditions and equipment to produce mortar having a temperature
below 49°C.
b. When the ambient temperature exceeds 46°C, or exceeds 41°C with a wind velocity greater
than 13 km/h, implement requirements of par. 1.05 C.1.a and shade materials and mixing
equipment from direct sunlight.
2. Construction (while masonry work is in progress):
a. When the ambient temperature exceeds 38°C, or exceeds 32*C with a wind velocity greater
than 13 km/h:
1. Maintain temperature of mortar and grout below 49°C.
2. Flush mixer, mortar transport container, and mortar boards with cool water before they
come into contact with mortar ingredients or mortar.
3. Maintain mortar consistency by re-tempering with cool water.
4. Use mortar within 1% hr of initial mixing.
b. When the ambient temperature exceeds 46°C, or exceeds 41°C with a wind velocity greater
than 13 km/h, implement requirements of par. 1.05 C.1.a and use cool mixing water for
mortar and grout. Ice is permitted in the mixing water prior to use, but is not permitted in the
mixing water when added to the other mortar or grout materials.

2.01 MATERIALS:
A. Hollow and Solid Concrete Masonry Units:
As per Specification "Masonry Units" Section 0401.
a. Load-Bearing Units:
1. Load-bearing units shall conform to ASTM C90.
2. Classifications. Normal Weight, Medium Weight and Lightweight.
Unless otherwise shown on the Contract Drawings.
Normal Weight concrete masonry units shall be used.
3. Permissible Variations in Dimensions.
a. For standard units, no overall dimension (width, height, and length) shall differ by
more than 32 mm from the specified dimensions.
b. Non-Load-Bearing Units:
1. Non-load-bearing units shall conform to ASTM C129.
2. Classifications Normal Weight, Medium Weight and Lightweight.
a. Unless otherwise shown on the Contract Drawings, Normal Weight concrete
masonry units shall be used.
3. Permissible Variations in Dimensions:
a. Minimum face shell thickness shall not be less than 13 mm.
b. No overall dimension (width, height, and length) shall differ by more than
+3.2 mm from the specified dimensions.
B. Portland Cement:
Cement shall be conforming to the requirements of ASTM C150, Type I. non-staining without air-
entrainment and of natural color or white, to produce the required color of mortar.
C. Hydrated Lime:
Hydrated lime shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C207, Type S, and special finishing hydrated
lime, non-air-entrained.
D. Sand:
Sand shall be conforming to the requirements of ASTM C144, except for joints 6 mm or less where the
Contractor shall use aggregate graded with 100% passing the 1.18 mm (No. 16) sieve. Clean, natural,
light-coloured sand meeting grade specification.
E. Water:
Clean, potable and free of any deleterious materials.
Conforming to the requirements of ACI 301.
F. Mortar for unit masonry:
1. Mortar conforming to the proportion specifications shall consist of a mixture of cementitious
material, aggregate, and water, all complying with the requirements of ASTM C270 & ASTM C246.
The average compressive strength at 28 days are as follows:
a. Type M: 172 MPa.
b. Type S: 12.4 MPa.
2. Mortar mix and proportion shall be controlled and accurately maintained. Measure aggregate
materials in a damp, loose condition. Limit materials as specified herein and limit cement'lime ratio
(by volume) as follows:
a. Type M:
1. Type M shall be used for structural reinforced masonry walls and floors and with proportion of
not more than 4 part lime per part of portland cement and sand equal to and not less than 2%
to 3 times the sum of the volumes of cement and lime materials.
b. Types S:
1. Type S shall be used for exterior masonry mortar construction and with proportion of not
more than 4 part lime per part of portland cement and sand equal to not less than 24 to 3
times the sum of the volumes of cement and lime materials.
All mortar should comply to the appropriate code ASTM C270 & ASTM C246.
Note: Mortar to be tested with one sample /25 m2.
G. Cement-Parging:
Shall be 1 part Portland Cement and 3-1/2 parts clean sand.
H. Horizontal Reinforcement:
Deformed bars with yield stress of 414 N/mm Reinforcement" Section 0301. as per specification,
"Concrete
I. Vertical Reinforcement:
Deformed bars with yield stress of 414 N/mm2 as per specification, "Concrete Reinforcement" Section
0301.
J. Adjustable wall ties shall be rectangular type or as indicated on drawings fabricated from 5 mm cold-
drawn corrosion resistant steel wire of the length required for proper embedment in masonry, 4 ties per
m2 plus extra around openings.
K. Flashing Material:
As per specification, "Metal Flashing and Trim" Section 0704
L. Lintels:
Provide and install as an integral part of masonry work where shown on drawings. Portion of walls
bearing reinforced concrete lintels shall have cells filled solid with grout.
M. Grout for unit Masonry:
A. MATERIAL:
a. Grout:
Grout shall conform to ASTM C476 with a minimum compressive strength of 21 MPa at 28
days.
b. Portland Cement:
Cement shall be conforming to the requirements of ASTM C150, Type I, non- staining,
without air-entrainment, and of natural color or white, to produce the required color of grout.
c. Hydrated lime:
Hydrated lime shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C207, Type S, and special finishing
hydrated lime, non-air-entrained.
d. Fine Aggregate:
Fine aggregate shall be sand and conforming to the requirements of ASTM C33 or C404,
100% of fine aggregate shall pass the 9.5 mm sieve for Size No. 1.
e. Coarse Aggregate:
Coarse aggregate shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C404, 100% of coarse aggregate
shall pass the 12.5 mm sieve for Size No. 8 or 89.
f. Water:
Water shall be clean and free of amounts of oils, acids, alkalies, salts, organic materials, or
other substances that are deleterious to grout or any metal in the wall, and shall comply with
the requirements of ACI 301.
g. Additive:
Additive shall be metallic aggregate, prepared and graded to counteract shrinkage and reduce
permeability of portland cement grout.
B. Proportion and mix:
Grout proportions and mixes shall conform to ASTM C476. Grout type proportioned by volume
are as follows:
1. Fine Grout:
a. Proportion by Volume.
1. Portland Cement:1part.
2. Hydrated Lime. O to 1/10 part.
3. Fine Aggregates: 2% to 3 times the sum of volume of cement and lime materials.
2. Coarse Grout:
a. Proportion by Volume
1. Portland Cement: 1 part.
2. Hydrated Lime 0 to 1/10 part.
3. Fine Aggregates: 2 1 to 3 times the sum of volume of cement and lime materials.
4
4. Coarse Aggregates: 1 to 2 times the sum of volume of cement and lime materials.
3. The sum of volumes of fine and coarse aggregates shall not exceed 4. times the sum of
volumes of cement and lime materials.
4. Cement Setting Bed:
a. Combine 1 part of portland cement with 2 parts of damp setting bed sand. Use water to
dampen sand (if required), but water shall not be added to the mix.
5. Grout for Masonry Bond Beams and Lintels
a. Portland cement, fine aggregate, coarse aggregate, and water are proportioned to
provide a 28-day compressive strength of 14 MPa, and in conformance with
ASTM C109.
6. Air-entraining agents or other admixtures shall not be added to grout materials,
except when approved by to the Royal Commission.
7. Calcium chloride is not permitted in grout mix.
Note: Grout: Include ancillary itens Damp proof, wall ties, joint filers, fire resistance requirement, sealant and
anchors, etc.

4.0 1 CONSTRUCTION METHODS:

A. Storing and Handling Materials:
1. Prevent foreign matter or materials in work.
2. Prevent damage from weather or ground.
3. Deliver and store manufactured materials, such as lime and cement, in original packages, plainly
marked with brand and manufacturer's name.
4. Materials in broken containers, or in packages showing watermarks or other evidence of damage,
shall not be used.
B. Mortar Mixture:
1. Measure materials accurately by volume and mix thoroughly.
2. Do not add water to mortar that has stiffened due to delay in placing.
3. Discard mortar too stiff to place.
4. White cement to be used for mortar in sand-lime block walls.
C. Masonry Construction:
1. Construct walls plumb and true, with courses level, running bond, and having uniform thickness of
joints.
2. Bond and anchor intersecting walls (where applicable).
3. Clean exposed surfaces of set masonry with wire brush and wet lightly before placing fresh
masonry thereto.
4. Remove loose units and mortar.
5. Construct walls in dry weather, and provide waterproof covering if work is suspended.
6. Dampen masonry just prior to laying.
7. Place dry blocks only, in wall.
8. Provide nominal 10 mm mortar bedding to all horizontal and vertical joints.
9. Provide smooth concave exterior joints made with suitable tool after mortar has stiffened.
10. Fill cells solid with grout on either side of openings as shown on drawings and where vertical wall
reinforcement, horizontal wall reinforcement, anchors, metal door frames, balts, fies and other
inserts occur.
11. Remove projecting mortar and other surface irregularities and wash with water.
12. Walls shall be constructed using the Low Lift Grouting Method, grouting in increment between
horizontal construction joints. The limitation for the daily lifts to be not exceeding 1 50m.
C 1 : Construction tolerances:
The Contractor shall erect masonry within the following tolerances from the specified dimensions:
1. Dimension of Elements:
a. Variation from Plumb.
b. True to a Line.
c. Alignment of Columns and walls(bottom versus top.
2. Location of Elements:
a. Indicated in Plan.
b. Indicated in Elevation.
a. In cross section or elevation: - 6 mm, + 13 mm.
3. Elements:
a. Variation from Level.
1. Bed joints: 16 mm in 3 m, + 13 mm max.
2. Top Surface of Bearing walls: + 6 mm in 3 m, +13 mm max.
+ 6 mm in 3 m; + 9 mm in 6 m;
+13 mm max
+6 mm in 3 m: 9 mm in 6 m;
+ 13 mm max
+13 mm for bearing walls
+19 mm for non-bearing walls
+ 13 mm in 6 m; 119 mm max.
+ 6mm in storey height; 19 mm max
D. Masonry Reinforcement:
1. Horizontal and vertical reinforcement in walls shall be placed as indicated on drawings.
2. All cells at corners, edges or at intersecting walls, and all cells adjacent openings shall contain
reinforcing.
3. Reinforcement shall be continuous except at thermal control joints. Laps to be provided as
necessary. See Section 0301 "Concrete Reinforcement" Clause 3.01A2. All reinforcement shall be in
place prior to grouting.
4. The minimum cover over reinforcement of mortar, masonry and grout, treated as a homogeneous
material shall be as required by Section 0301 "Concrete Reinforcement" Clause 3.01C8.
E. Grouting Masonry Walls:

1. Grout shall be placed by pumping or by an approved alternative method and shall be placed before
any initial set occurs.
2. Do not add water to grout that has stiffened due to delay in placing. Discard grout too stiff to place.
3. All cells containing reinforcing, adjacent openings and/or as indicated on drawings shall be filled
solidly with grout.
4. Walls shall be grouted in accordance with the Low Lift Construction Method. Grout shall be
compacted by rodding or usina pencil vibrators.
5. Horizontal construction joints in grout shall be formed 10-20 mm below the top of the uppermost
masonry unit in any lift. The surface of the hardened grout shall be cleaned and all laitance and
loose foreign matter removed prior to laying units for the next lift.
Note: External joinery or metal works bedded against block works / concrete are to be painted with approved silicon
sealant or as appropriate local specification.
4.0 2 INCIDENTAL WORK:

A. Fallow details on drawings as to actual dimensions required for clearances, alignment etc. Install all
reinforcement, anchors, bolts, hangers, nailing strips etc shown or detailed on drawings.
B. Install all wall reinforcement, bolts, anchors, metal flashings, reglets, inserts and other built-in items as
masonry work progresses. Grout solid all spaces around built-in or embedded items.
C. Install all lintels (minimum bearing), gate, door & window frames and all other incidentals as shown or
called for.
D. Clean-up and remove masonry work debris generated during construction and clean up area completely
and thoroughly after completion of work.
E. Scaffolding: No support to be allowed to pass through the walling unless agreed by the Client
Representative.
DIVISION 5:
METALS:
0501 Steel Rectangular Hollow Sections and Small Sections Structural Steel.
0601 STEEL RECTANGULAR HOLLOW SECTIONS AND SMALL SECTION STRUCTURAL
STEEL:
PARTI – GENERAL:
1.0 1 DESCRIPTION:
Work Included:
Supply and Install all ornamental stair and balcony rails, supports etc. as shown on the drawings and as
specified herein.

A. SASO - Saudi Arabian Standards Organization.
B. ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials.
ASTM A276 - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and shapes. ASTM A312M - Standard
Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipes.
C. Qualifications of Installers: Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and
experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and
the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this section.
1.0 3 SUBMITTALS:
A. Samples and workshop drawings showing elevation and details of fixing. Junctions etc for approval by
the owner.
1.0 4 PRODUCT HANDLING:
A. Protection: Use all means necessary to protect the materials of this Section before, during and after
installation and to protect the work and materials of all other trades.
B. Replacements: in the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the
approval of the Client and at no additional cost to the Client.
C. Storage: If the manufactured steel items are stored prior to erection, store in straight and horizontal
position, avoiding any contact with the ground. Protect carefully from weather and from excessive
exposure.
0501 STEEL RECTANGULAR HOLLOW SECTIONS AND SMALL SECTION
STRUCTURAL
STEEL:
2.01 STEEL FABRICATION:
A. Ali steel used in manufacture shall be free from blemish and heavy rust prior to fabrication and
painting.
B. Where shown or indicated all steel assemblies shall be galvanized by hot dip process after all
fabrication and welding has been completed. Take care to avoid distortion and accurately straighten
members where necessary before delivery to job-site. All bolts and other fastenings shall be galvanized
by hot dipping and threads shall be specially cut to avoid binding.
2.02 OTHER MATERIALS:
All other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and prope installation of the work
of this Section, shall be selected by the Contractor subject to and in accordance with accepted engineering
practice and the approval of the Architect.
2.03 HAND RAIL AND BALUSTRADE:

A. Wrought iron grille works for staircase balustrades and handrails, as shown on the drawings.
2.04 METAL RAIL (For window):
A. 500mm high Mild steel rail with paint finish including 25mm x 25mm square tube top. bottom &
vertical rail and rectangular steel tubing with approval color to the designs shown on the drawings or
approval equal.
0501 STEEL RECTANGULAR HOLLOW SECTIONS AND SMALL SECTION STRUCTURAL

STEEL:
3.01 INSTALLATION:
A. Inspection: Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be installed.
Incorrect conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the Work. Do not proceed until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
B. Erection:
1. Erect and install the work of this Section in accordance with the Drawings and all pertinent codes
and regulations.
2. Do not permit temporary construction loads which cause members stresses beyond design limits.
DIVISION 6:
WOOD AND ALUMINIUM:
0601 Carpentry and Millwork.
0602 Cabinet Work.
0601 CARPENTRY AND MILLWORK

PART I – GENERAL:
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
A. Work Included:
This Section covers the furnishing and installation of all carpentry and mill works in wood trim, wood
frames and miscellaneous.
B. Related Work - Specified Elsewhere:
Section 0602 - Cabinet Work

Section 0903 - Painting
1.02 SUBMITTALS:
A. Submit samples and shop drawings of carpentry and millwork materials used for the proposed work.
B. Submit for approval full schedule of all wood specified intended for inclusion in the proposed work
including grades and wood preservative and treatment, their location and finish.

2.01 Wood shall be of select quality of finest species available from around the world. The client reserves the right
to select the wood species to be used throughout.
2.02 Joinery work, doors, wooden hand rail, etc. shall be manufactured by an approved Specialist and shall be of
highest standard of construction and finish commercially available the contractor shall obtain the written
approval of the Client for all details of design, materials, finishes and all items of hardware and fittings. To
obtain this approval the Contractor shall submit all required details of design in form of drawings and
specification and where requested a sample unit. Items not measuring up to the approved specification shall
be resubmitted with the required modifications in order that Client approved standards are met.
2.03 Hardwood for paneled doors, door frames, architraves, etc. shall be selected quality Mahogany finished to
accept polish or clear natural finish.
2.04 Wood veneer for flush doors and flat panels shall be plywood with selected mahogany face veneers, as 2.01
above, or quality grade to accept polish or clear natural finish.
2.05 Adhesives shall be water proof, phenolic type, or other approved.
2.06 Wood for external door frames, architraves and other trim shown as clear finish shall be of same species and
grades as doors in the specified room.
2.07 Cant strips to junctions of roof finishes shall be oil tempered fiberboard.
2.08 External soffit board shall be "Master board" as manufactured by Cape Boards Limited or other equal and
approved.

3.01 The Contractor shall verity dimensions from site prior to fabrication of the work.
3.02 Materials, products and accessories furnished by the Contractor shall be installed and all work shall be
performed in a first class workman-like manner in conformity with the best trade practices. It is specially to
be noted that any finishing work not reaching the highest standards of workmanship shall be removed and
replaced to the satisfaction of the Client
0602 CABINET WORK
PARTI – GENERAL:
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
A. Work Included:
This section covers the furnishing and installation of all counters, vanity units etc and their accessories
all as specified on the drawings.
B. Related Work specified elsewhere:
1. Section 0601 - Carpentry and Millwork.

2. Section 0705 - Joint Sealant.
3. Section 0804 - Finish Hardware.
4. Section 0904 - Painting.
5. Section 1001 - Sanitary Fixtures.
Obtain warranty from the manufacturer for a period of one year for free replacement of defective
components
1.03 SUBMITTALS:
A. The Contractor shall submit samples of materials, fittings, hardware and shop drawings indicating
elevations, details, construction, finishes and hardware.
B. Product data: submit manufacturer's installation instructions for hardware and other materials used in
the fabrication of casework.
C. Shop drawings submit shop drawings for casework, showing location of each item, dimensioned plans
and elevations, large scale details, anchors and other components. Indicate compliance with specified
requirements for materials and workmanship.
D. Samples: submit fully finished samples of the following items required in the casework. Samples will be
reviewed for appearance and finish.
1. Submit samples of each element that will be incorported in the cabinet work.
2. A mock-up sample for kitchen cabinet and vanity laundry/cabinet.
1.04 DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE:

A. Protect casework during delivery, storage and handling to prevent damage, soiling and
deterioration.
B. Deliver casework to the site when adequate facilities for storage are available or when casework can
be installed in finish locations.
C. Store items in enclosed spaces with temperature and humidity conditions similar to those required
in the finished construction.
D. Do not install casework until finish work has been completed including sanitary and electrical
work, painting, floor finishes requiring setting beds, acoustical work and related finishes which
could damage, soil, or deteriorate the casework.
1.05 JOB CONDITIONS:
Casework shall remain materially stable within constructed environments without showing or developing
deterioration including delamination of finish surfaces, warp of board members etc.
0602 CABINET WORK

2.01 MATERIALS:
A. The cabinet work for kitchen, etc., shall be of highest standard of construction and finish commercially
available. The Contractor shall obtain the written approval of the Client for ail details of design,
materials, finishes (both inside and outside the cabinet work, and all items of hardware, fittings, fixings
and gliders, etc.. To obtain this approval the Contractor shall submit all required details of design of
cabinet work in form of drawings and specification and where requested a sample unit. Items not
measuring up to the approved specification shall be resubmitted with the required modifications in order
that Client approve standards are met.
B. Wood shall be as specified on drawings of select quality finish as for Section 0601. For the various parts
and framing of the works shown on drawings, wood shall be dried and treated with, preservatives
against vermin and rot.
C. Plywood shall be of exterior quality water-resistant grade of species to be approved by Client, good both
sides and suitable for receiving stain or clear natural finish.
D. Block board shall have plywood outer sheets with bonded core consisting of solid wood blocks between
7 & 25mm wide.
E. Adhesives shall be waterproof, melamine fortified urea or phenolic type, colour and design to be selected
by Owner.
F. Kitchen counter tops and 100mm high back splash shall be KAFCO Brand with built-in stainless steel
single or double bowl sinks and sinks mixer & accessories. Sanitary fixtures shall be accommodated and
sealed to units according to the written recommendations of the sanitary fixture details from
manufacturer.
G. Base Cupboard units: shall be fabricated 850mm high, 600mm deep, in width-modules of width as
shown on drawings with special infill units. Arrangement of cupboards, drawers and fixed panels shall
be as shown on drawings. Units are to be in 18mm thick MDF panels with approved plastic laminate
finish and post formed pvc edges in approved shade. Cabinet doors shall be flush overlay hung on
spring loaded 180 degree opening concealed hinges and all doors and drawers shall be fitted with
approved finger grips Cabinets shall be fitted with integral back panels and one adjustable shelf 500mm
wide All interior surfaces including backs, shelves and drawers shall have approved bonded white PVC
finish.
H. Wall Cupboard units shall be fabricated 300mm deep in width modules of width as shown on drawings
with special infill units to match bottom cabinets. Units shall be 725mm high and have provision for
future light fittings by the owner and include a spur. Arrangement of cupboards and fixed panels shall
be as shown on drawings. Units are to be in 18mm thick MDF panels with approved plastic laminate
finish and post formed pvc edges in approved shade. Cabinet doors shall be flush overlay hung on
spring- loaded 180 degree concealed hinges and fitted with approval finger grips Cabinets shall be fitted
with integral back panels and three adjustable shelves 12mm thick exterior quality plywood. All interior
surfaces, including backs and shelves shall have bonded white epoxy finish.
0602 CABINET WORK

PART III-EXECUTION:
3.01 PREPARATION:
A. Before proceeding with installation of casework, obtain field measurements and verify dimensions
of shop drawing details as required for accurate fit.
B. Co-ordinate work with other trades affecting the installation of casework.
3.02 INSTALLATION:
A. Install the work plumb, level, true and straight without distortion Screws as required. Install to a
tolerance of 3 mm x 2400 mm for plumb and level including countertops and with 2 mm maximum
offset in flush adjoining surfaces, 3 mm maximum offsets is revealed adjoining surfaces.
B. Discard and replace units which are improperly finished, and which are defective in manufacture
with respect to surfaces, sizes and patterns.
C. Anchorage: provide screws and other anchoring devices of the proper type, size, material and finish
for application indicated to provide secure attachments. Fastenings shall be concealed wherever
possible and shall not be apparent on exposed faces.
Use threaded steel concealed joint fasteners to align and secure adjoining cabinet units.
Install casework hardware in accordance with manufacturer's recommendation and ensure correct
operation. Lubricate operating hardware as recommended by manufacturer.
Ensure that doors and drawers operate smoothly and within acceptable tolerances on nylon side
runners.
3.03 PROTECTION AND CLEANING:
A. Cover Casework with 0.1 mm polyethylene film, for protection against soiling and deterioration during
remainder of construction period.
B. Prior to final acceptance, remove protective coverings and clean surfaces of casework.
DIVISION 7:
THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION:
0701 Waterproofing and Damp Proofing, Vapour Barrier for Slabs.
0702 Building Insulation.
0703 Membrane Roofing.
0704 Flashing and Sheet Metal.
0705 Joint Sealants.
0706 Bituminous Film Coatings.
0707 Concrete Waterproofing.
0701 WATER PROOFING & DAMP PROOFING VAPOUR BARRIER FOR SLAB
PART I – GENERAL:
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
General:
This section covers the furnishing and application of bituminous damp proofing for all concrete surfaces and
film sheeting damp proofing and floor water proofing in wet areas, as specified herein and as shown on the
drawings The Contractor shall furnish all labour, materials, tools and equipment required to complete the
work.

The following codes and standards are intended to provide an acceptable level of quality for materials and
products:
ASTM D41 Primer, for use with asphalt in damp proofing and waterproofing.
D 449 Asphalt for damp proofing and waterproofing.
E 154 Testing materials for use as vapour barrier under concrete slabs and as ground cover in crawl spaces.
Sheet type vapour barrier will have dart impact, tear resistance, tensile strength and elongation as per ASTM
D-1709, D-1004 and D-882 respectively.
1.03 SUBMITTALS:
The Contractor shall submit to the owner consultant the following items for review before commencing
work:
1. Manufacturer's literature indicating the manufacturer's recommended installation instructions.
2. Manufacturer's certification of compliance with specified requirements.
1.04 QUALITY CONTROL:
The Contractor shall be responsible for the quality of all material proposed to be used in the work and shall
maintain a qualified representative on site during bituminous damp proofing operations.
0701 WATER PROOFING AND DAMP PROOFING VAPOUR BARRIER FOR SLAB
PART II – PRODUCT:
2.01 GENERAL:
1. Procurement of all goods and products covered by these specifications must be approved by the
Owner/Consultant.
2. The cold application of bituminous coating to be used for general damp proofing and protective
purposes to the vertical surfaces of perimeter foundations.
3. Damp proofing shall be scheduled so that curing will be accomplished prior to backfilling and so that
backfilling will be accomplished as soon as possible after curing.
4. Primary coat and bitumen materials shall be applied when the ambient temperature is above 5°C.
2.02 MATERIAL PRODUCT:
1. Bituminous Coating: Non-flammable, non-toxic asphalt emulsion, Chemically treated for maximum
adhesion and shall be water and salt resistant type. One of the following product/manufacturer or
equivalent shall be acceptable.
A. BLACK "PU" CMCI products or equivalent approved for wet areas such as toilet &
bathrooms, kitchen, wash areas, laundry, pantry, etc.
B. SK-60, Fosam products or approved equivalent for foundation and structures in
contact to ground.
The mineral Filled asphalt emulsion shall be applied by brush, spray or dipping or
mopping and diluted with proper clean potable water as per manufacturer's
recommendation.
2. Film Sheet Damp Proofing Shall be polyethylene sheeting "Moistop" or approved equal and be not
less than 250 micron high impact strength rating.
3. Floor Waterproofing in Wet Areas: The cold applied one component liquid waterproofing shall be
applied for wet areas such as bathrooms, toilet, kitchen, wash areas, laundry. main and family
entrance porch, etc.
0701 WATER PROOFING AND DAMP PROOFING VAPOUR BARRIER FOR SLAB
3.01 PREPARATION OF SURFACES:
Concrete surfaces to receive damp proofing shall be cleaned of foreign matter and loose particles and shall
be surface dry at the time damp proofing is applied. Surfaces to receive asphalt or fibrous asphalt damp
proofing shall be given a priming coat of asphalt primer. Priming coat shall be applied when the ambient
temperature is above 5°C and at the rate of approximately 0.4 liter per m2, fully covering the entire surface
to be damp proofed.
3.02 INSTALLATION:
Cold Application Method: Surfaces to be damp proofed shall be given zero coat with primer and first coat
with 2 coats black P.U. waterproof. Each coat shall be applied uniformly using not less than 0.5 litres of
asphalt per m2 for each coat. The first coat shall be applied by brush to provide full bond with the primed
surface, and the second coat may be brushed or sprayed over a thoroughly dry first coat The finished surface
shall be uniform thickness and impervious to moisture. Porous spots shall be recoated.
The above procedure shall be followed unless manufacturer recommendation specified
Apply bituminous material to the all wall perimeter up to the height of floor finish
3.03 FILM SHEETING:
Film sheeting damp proofing shall be laid out in accordance with the installation instruction of the
manufacturer. Lap joints minimum 300 mm and seal. Care shall be taken not to disturb or damage the
membrane while concrete reinforcing.
Overlap the sheet edges with minimum of 300 mm to be taped with reinforced tape as specified
Ensure no projections exist above ground which may damage the membrane.
Ensure continuity of covering at junction of horizontal/inclined and vertical membranes, by bonding with an
approved bonding compound or sealing tape, in particular at the corners of footings the primary
polyethylene sheet shall be cut to follow the excavated profile. Continuity of membrane may be ensured by
covering with smaller pieces of polyethylene sheeting and bonding with sealing tape.
Form collars around pipes and projections and seal with sealing tape.
Lay sheets loose on base, lap edge 150 mm and seal with adhesive tape.
Turn up sheets at edges of slab and seal against foundation or slab edge using sealing tape as indicated on
the drawings, ensure surfaces are dry and dust-free at time of applying sealing tape.
Protect sheets and prevent puncturing before or during laying of subsequent covering.
Repair any damage to the membrane with adhesive tape. Ensure a completely puncture free membrane just
prior to concreting.
Ensure that permanent covering is laid as soon as possible after laying sheets.
3.04 WET AREA WATER PROOFING:
Remove all dirt, dust, laitance, oil, grease and loose materials prior to application. Voids and cracks must
also be filled with latex cement mortar The polyurethane membrane shall be applied by brush, squeeze or
airless spray to a minimum thickness of 1 mm and allowed to dry overnight.
Testing Recommendations: Upon completion of waterproofing application the insulated area shall be tested
by pooling water at least of 50 mm depth kept for 48 hours. Owner/Consultant will inspect the ceiling under
slab surface for any leakage and further work can proceed only after clearance from Owner/Consultant.
==== End of Section =====
0702 BUILDING INSULATION
PART I – GENERAL:
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
A. Work Included:
The section covers the furnishing and installation of building insulation for walls and roofs as
shown on drawings.
B. Related Work Specified elsewhere:
1. Section 0302 - Cast-in-place Concrete

2. Section 0402 - Concrete Unit Masonry
3. Section 0601 - Carpentry and Millwork
1.02 SUBMITTALS:
A. The contractor shall submit for the Client's approval samples of each insulation and accessories
proposed for use .
B. Manufacturer's Certificates of compliance with the requirements.

2.01 GENERAL:
A. All goods and products shall be, where available, from an in Kingdom manufacturer or supplier.
2.02 MATERIALS:
A. Roof insulation to lightweight screed (laid to fall) & waterproofing membrane shall be 50 mm thick
extruded polystyrene ngid foam with ship lap jaints or equal approval (refer also to section 0703).
2.03 U-Value Calculation:
A. Roof Deck:
S. No Layers Thichness( R-value (Ft2

m) f/BTU-hr)
1 Inside surface resistance 0 61
2 120 mm Concrete Slab 120 17
3 Light weight concrete screed 75 1.125
4 Double layer of Dermabit wate proofing 5 0.153
membrane
5 50 mm thick rigid insulation (Expanded 50 10
polysterene)
6 25 mm Mosaic tiles (Asphalt Lincolin, Venyle or 25 0.05
rubber
7 Outside surface resistance 0.25
13.88(Ft2-F/BTU-hr
U-value= 0 072 (BTU/ Hr/
Ft2-F)
B. External Wall:

m) f/BTU-hr)
1 Inside resistance 0.68
2 200 mm thick CMU wall 200 1.11
3 Expanded Polysterene (Extruded) 50 0.10
2.47
(Ft2-F/BTU-hr)
U-Value 0.405
= (BTU/Hr/Ft2-F)
C. 200 mm partition Wall:

m) f/BTU-hr)
1 Inside resistance 0.68
2 200 mm thick CMU wall 200 1.11
12.D4
(Ft2-F/BTU-hr)
U-Value 0 083
= (BTU/Hr/Ft2-F)
D.
a. Structural glazing for common lobbies of ground and first floor.
b. Double glazed thermally broken clear glass fixed on point fittings.
Shading coefficient - 0.40
U-value - 0.58(BTU/H/Ft-F)

3.01 Check and clean wall and roof surfaces to receive insulation to ensure freedom from debris, grease, oil or
other items detrimental to insulation.
3.02 Roof. Roof insulation shall be laid in strict accordance with the manufacturer's Instructions (refer also to
section 0703).
3.03 Wall Wall insulation shall be laid in strict accordance with the manufacturer's Instructions.
3.04 Protect insulation from damage in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
0703 MEMBRANE ROOFING
PART I – GENERAL:
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
A. Work Included:
Extent of membrane waterproofing and drainage is shown on drawings and is hereby defined to
include all materials applied with sealed joints and flashings as needed to for concealed
waterproofing system.
B. Related Work Specified elsewhere:
1. Section 0302 - Cast In Place & Pre-cast Concrete

2. Section 0702 - Building Insulation
3. Section 1501 - Sanitary System
1.02 SUBMITTALS:
A. Submit samples of membrane & accessories, data to substantiate compliance with requirements,
installation instructions and general recommendations from the manufacturer for
Owner/Consultant approval.
B. Obtain required waterproofing materials from a single manufacturer.
C. Submit shop drawings showing installation details and waterproofing around roof accessories.
1.03 WARRANTIES:
Membrane roofing is expected to have a serviceable life of 15 years, provided it is designed, used, installed
and maintained in accordance with the manufacturer's Technical Literature. The Contractor shall provide in
writing) the Owner Consultant with a minimum 10 years warranty of all materials and labour provided for
the membrane roofing system and agree to replace repair defective materials and workmanship.
1.04 DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE:
Deliver materials to the site in their original sealed containers and packages bearing the manufacturer's
name, brand and other data to identify the materials Protect materials from damage during shipment,
handling and storage.

2.01 MATERIALS:
A. The design has been based on the use of a Dermabit waterproof membrane or approval equal.
The main membrane shall be Dermabit 4170 and will be double layered. Two coats of Dermaprimer will
be applied prior to installation of the membrane. Skirting will be 4 mm thick Dermabit 4170 slated APP
bituminous membrane fully bonded and shall be installed prior to installation of flashings.
B. The separation layer is to be Typar 3301 or Alyaf 140 gm/sqm.
C. Sealant for flashings shall be Fosroc Nitoseal HP 40 Polyurethane sealant.
D. Flashings shall be aluminium flashing as manufactured by East & West Factory 1.1 mm thick.
E. Roof screed laid to falls shall be lightweight concrete as "MAS Foamcrete" (Manufactured by Mustafa Al
Atrash Est.) having a density of 500 kg/mn laid in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
Cant strips 50 x 50 mm shall be done during the roof screed.
F. The roof deck will be finished with concrete paver tiles (400 x 400 x 50mm) supplied and approved by
an approved vendor fixing on 50 mm thick fine concreting (refer to section 0902) and as detailed on the
drawings.
G. The roof will be finished with gravel ballast in accordance with ASTM D1863 and shall be hard,
durable, opaque and free of clay, loam, sand and other foreign substances. Gravel ballast shall be sized
in accordance with ASTM D448, size 2 to½ in diameter and not less than 15 lbs-sq/ft, or as specified.
H. Roof drain system shall be roof dome type cast iron drain and painted cast iron body with splash pad
with satisfactory draining system and fixation system or approved equal and as detailed on the drawings.
Note: Protection of exposed membrane from ultraviolet (UV) radiation.
1. Protective layer shall be capable of protecting the waterproofing of buildings durably against damaging
influences of static, dynamic and thermal nature. The type of protective layer to be adopted shall be selected
as a function of the anticipated stresses and of local conditions and factors, Movements and deformations of
the protective layer shall not be capable of damnaging the waterproofing. Where joints in the structure exist,
joints shall be provided at the same locations in solid protective layer.
2. Protective measures shall be provided as temporary protection to waterproofing membrane during the
progress of construction work.

3.01 Surfaces to received membrane shall be uniform, plane, dry and clean. They must also be free from dirt,
grease, oil, projections and any other particles likely to be detrimental to the finished membrane system
Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the
installer.
3.02 Prepare surface of screed and apply Derma primer in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
3.03 Install membrane to main roof area in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions using the fully
bonded method.
3.04 At all upstands a layer of slated finish membrane shall be connected to the parapet in accordance with
details and finished with an aluminium flashing fixed in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions.
3.05 All applications and installations shall be those recommended by the manufacturer or supplier of the
products.
3.06 Institute all required procedures for protection of completed portion of waterproofing system during
installation of work over the layers and throughout the remainder of construction period. Do not allow
traffic of any kind on unprotected surfaces.
3.07 Ensure that the membrane has been applied satisfactorily to upstands, around pipes, drains, outspouts,
elevated pads etc.
3.08 Co-ordinate installation of waterproofing materials and associated work to provide complete system and
to match with requirements of other trade.
3.09 Install pre-cast scupper permanently to the substrate, by methods which are adequate for the sizes and
locations of units, as shown on the drawings.

PART IV – TESTING:
4.0 1 TESTING:
A. Testing of completed roofing finish shall be by water flooding to a depth of 100 mm, no leakage of
which shall be visible within the structure after a 72 hour test period. This test shall be applied to each
and every completed roof.
B. In the event of roof membrane test failure that roof shall be repaired and re-tested until found
acceptable, all to the satisfaction of the Owner/Consultant. Flood test shall be repeated until no leakage
is observed.
C. The Contractor should conduct his own 24 hours test and satisfy himself that the work is satisfactory
prior to submission to Owner/Consultant for inspection.
0704 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL
PARTI – GENERAL:
1.0 1 DESCRIPTION:
A. Work included:
This section covers the furnishing and installation of flashing and sheet metal extending into or through
the walls at the locations indicated on the drawings.
1. Section 0705 - Joint Sealants

2. Section 0703 - Membrane Roofing
3. Section 0901 - Solid Plaster rendering Stucco Work
1.0 2 SUBMITTALS:
Submit samples of flashing and sheet metal materials and accessories used for the proposed works for
approval by the Owner.

2.01 Flashing shall be fabricated of 20 gauge aluminium.
2.02 Cement Plaster shall be as indicated on drawings and shall conform with Section 0901.
2.03 Sealant shall conform with Section 0705.

PART II – EXECUTION:
3.01 The Contractor shall examine the conditions of the location where flashing will be installed.
3.02 Flashing shall be built to conform to shape, lines and dimension of the structure as shown on the
drawings.
3.03 Materials shall be installed and all work shall be performed in a fist class workman-like manner in
conformity with the best trade practices.
3.04 All joints and seams shall be fully bedded thoroughly filled and sealed with a rubber based contact
Adhesive type cement.
3.05 Where joints and seams occur provide 75mm overlap to properly interlock and match uniformly and
continuously at each end.
3.06 Provide flashing to give a complete water seal at all openings and roof penetrations for pipes and
conduits etc.
=== End of Section ====
0706 JOINT SEALANTS
PART I – GENERAL:
1.0 1 General:
A. Work included:
This section covers the extent of sealant and caulking work as indicated on the drawings and where
required.
B. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Section 0302 - Concrete Work

2. Section 0602 - Cabinet Work
3. Section 0703 - Membrane Roofing
4. Section 0801 - Aluminium Doors and Frames
5. Section 0802 - Aluminium Windows
6. Section 0902 - Tiling
7. Section 0903 - Painting
8. Section 1001 - Sanitary Fixtures
Obtain materials only from manufacturers who will advise the installer on proper procedures and
precautions for the use of materials
1.0 3 SUBMITTALS:
A. The Contractor shall submit samples of each type of materials proposed for use in the work.
B. Copies of the manufacturer's published recommendations to support the selection of the compatibility
of the various related materials with respect to the types of joint for which each material is intended.
0705 JOINT SEALANTS

2.01 GENERAL:
A. Colour: Provide manufacturer's standard colour range which has the best suitability for the application
shown.
B. Compatibility: Before purchase of each specified sealant, investigate its compatibility with the joint
surfaces, joint fillers and other materials in the system. Provide only materials (variation of the specified
materials), which are known to be fully compatible with the actual installation conditions as shown by
manufacturer's published data and certification.
2.02 ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS:
A. One-part Silicone Rubber Sealant for Exterior Use: Silicone rubber based, one component elastomeric
sealant compound.
B. One-Component Polyurethane Sealant for sealing external joints of pre-cast.
Material:
1. One component polyurethane sealant, single component, gun grade, non-sag and moisture
cure sealant. Track free between 2 and 4 hours at normal conditions and full cure between 24
to 48 hours. Product to conform with ASTM 0-412 for tensile strength and elogation.
Requirement for ASTM C-794 for adhesion will be observed for the chosen product.
Recommended brand is Permaseal DU 25 or Owner/Consultant approved equivalent.
2. Sealant backer rod: Polyurethane or polyethylene non-gassing foamed rod, compressible rod
closed cell designed as backer for sealant to control joint depth.
3. Polyethylene tape or other to be applied for limitation of sealant (masking tape).
4. Joint cleaner when necessary.
C. Interior Silicone Rubber Sealant (I-SR-S): Silicone rubber-based, one-part, non-sag. elastomeric sealant,
resistant to mildew recommended by manufacturer for interior applications, including seal around bath
tubs, other sanitary installations, and similar applications. Provide type recommended by manufacturer
for the porosity of the joint surfaces (non-acid for the porous surfaces, acid for non-porous).
2.03 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS:
A. Provide the type of miscellaneous materials as recommended by the sealant or caulking compound
manufacturer for the joint surfaces as required such as Joint cleaner joint sealing tape, bonding
adhesives, joint sealing compounds (silicone sealant and polysulphide sealant), primers, compressible
fillers, binders and coating compounds.
B. All cauking compound for interior use shall be, furnished in standard colours to be approved by
Owner/Consultant.
0705 JOINT SEALANTS

3.01 GENERAL:
Caulking or sealant shall be provided in joints as indicated or specified. Materials shall conform to the
respective specifications and other requirements specified. The work specified herein shall be performed by
workmen skilled in such work.
3.02 JOINT SURFACE PREPARATION:
The joint design, shape and spacing shall be as indicated. The surfaces of joints to be sealed shall be clean
and dry. Oil, tar, grease, dirt, caulk, particles of mortar, dust, loose rust, loose mill scale and other foreign
substances shall be removed from all joint surfaces to be sealed which would interfere with bond of sealant
or caulking compound Oil or grease shall be removed with solvent and surfaces shall be wiped with clean
cloths.
A. Concrete and Masonry Surfaces. Where surfaces have been treated with curing compounds, oil, or
other such materials, they shall be removed by sand blasting or wire brushing. Laitance,
efflorescence and loose mortar shall be removed from the joint cavity.
B. Steel surfaces to be in contact with sealant shall be sandblasted or, if sandblasting would not be
practical or would damage adjacent finish work, the metal shall be scraped and wire brushed to
remove loose mill scale. Protective coatings on steel surfaces shall be removed by sandblasting or by
a solvent that leaves no residue.
C. Aluminium surfaces of windows and door frames in contact with sealants shall be cleaned of
temporary protective coatings. When masking tape is used for a protective cover, the tape and any
residual adhesive shall be removed just prior to applying the sealant Solvents used to remove
protective coatings shall be as recommended by the manufacturer of the aluminium work and shall
be non-staining.
D. Pre-cast Concrete Panel Joints Surface Preparation; Şurface must be clean, dry and free of foreign
matter, oil or grease. Clean joint surface immediately before installation of sealant. Remove dirt,
sand, laitance, debris, moisture and all other substances that will interfere with bond of sealant The
surface should be free from any unsound or contaminated material. Repair procedure will follow
when needed. Etch concrete joint surface to remove excess of alkalinity when manufacturer's
instruction required using 5% solution of muriatic acid. Neutralised with dilute ammonia solution,
rinse thoroughly with water and allow drying before sealant installation.
E. Roughen joint surfaces on vitreous coated and similar non-porous materials, wherever sealant
manufacturer's data indicates lower bond strength than for porous surfaces. Rub with fine abrasive
cloth or wool to produce a dull sheen
3.03 APPLICATION:
A. After all cleaning operations on the exterior of the building are completed, rake out all joints between
the frames and the masonry walls to remove all loose mortar materials and thoroughly brush clean to
remove all dust and dirt Where no backstop occurs to receive the caulking or sealant compound, fill
joints with filler material as recommended by the caulking or sealant manufacturer.
B. Apply caulking or sealant, and primer, in strict accordance with the printed instructions of the caulking
or sealant manufacturer. Apply primer when and where recommended by the manufacturer.
C. Employ only proven installation techniques which will ensure that sealants will be deposited in uniform,
continuous ribbons without gaps or air pockets with complete "wetting" of the joint bond surface
sequally on opposite sides. Except as otherwise indicated, fill sealant rabbet to a slightly concave surface,
slightly below adjoining surfaces. Where horizontal joints are between a horizontal surface and a vertical
surface, fil joint to form a slight cove, so that joint will not trap moisture and dirt.
D. Paper masking tape shall be placed on the finish surface on one or both sides of a joint cavity to
protect adjacent finish surfaces from or compound smears. Masking tape shall be removed within 10
minutes after joint has been filled and tooled.
E. Bond-preventive materials shall be installed on the bottom of the joint cavity and other surfaces
indicated to prevent the sealant from adhering to the surfaces covered by the bond preventive materials.
The materials shall be carefully applied to avoid contamination of adjoining surfaces or breaking bond
with surfaces other than those covered by the bond-preventive materials. At the option of the
Contractor, backstop material with bondbreaking characteristics may be installed in lieu of bond-
preventive materials specified.
F. Backstops: The back of bottom of joints constructed deeper than indicated shall be packed tightly with
backstop material to provide a joint of the depth indicated.
G. Spillage. Do not allow sealants or caulking compounds to overflow or spill onto adjoining surfaces.
H. Provide size and shape backer rod that will control joint depth for sealant placing. Provide highly
compressible backer to minimize possibility of sealant extrusion when joint is compressed. Place the
backer rod, which will support sealant during application according to the above ratio Do not puncture
the closed cell structure of rod as bubbles could form and migrate to the surface of sealant. Place the
bond breaking tape at the base of the slot to allow movement to be accommodated over the full width of
the sealant. Extrude the sealant firmly into the joint using gun to ensure complete contact with the joint
sides. The sealant will be deposited in uniform and continuous ribbons without any gaps or air pocket.
Fill sealant rabbet to slightly concave surface, slightly below adjoining surfaces. Fill joint to form slight
cover, so joint will not trap moisture and dirt. Do not allow sealant to overflow or spill onto adjoining
surfaces Excess sealant will be dry-wiped from all surfaces while still uncured Remove tape immediately
after filling joint with sealant.
3.04 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING:
Clean and free from stains surfaces of all materials adjoining caulked or sealed joints. Remove excess of
caulking or sealant without damage to adjoining surfaces, in accordance with the caulking or sealant
manufacturer's instructions
3.05 WARRANTY:
Include coverage for installed sealents and accessories which fail to achieve airtight seal, exhibit loss of
adhesion or do not cure.
0706 BITUMINOUS FILM COATINGS
PARTI – GENERAL:
1.0 1 DESCRIPTION:
General:
A. This section deals with the cold application of bituminous coatings for damp-proofing and
protective purposes to the vertical surfaces of perimeter foundations from approximately 150 mm
above ground level down to lap with vapour barrier approximately 250 mm below finished ground.
B. Related works specified eisewhere:
1. Section 0302 - Concrete Work (Cast In Place & Pre-cast)

2. Section 0701 - Waterproofing and Damp-proofing Vapour Barriers for Slabs
1.0 2 SUBMITTALS:
The Contractor shall submit for approval to the Client full details and manufacturer's written literature for
the material and application, before materials are brought on site.

2.01 MATERIAL:
A. Reinforcing cloth.
Tyglass or Marglass 250 open weave fiberglass cloth
B. Coatings.
Foundation coating, brush grade as manufactured by Construction Material Chemical Industries or
similar approved by Client in writing.

3.01 Ensure that all holes, penetrations, cracks, defective joints and other defects in surfaces to be coated have
been made good and are properly sealed. Remove dirt, grease and loosely adhering flakes of materials.
3.02 Apply primary coat in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to dry surfaces after concrete has fully
cured. Lap to polyethylene vapour barrier using reinforcement.
3.03 Prime Coat. High Penetration Asphalt primer at the rate of 2.5 liters per 10m 2.
3.04 Intermediate Coat: Foundation coating, brush grade at the rate of 7.50 liters per 10m2.
3.05 Final Coat: After previous coats are dry apply final application of foundation coating. brush grade at the rate
of 7.50 liters per 10m2.
Protection: When dry back-fill against bituminous film with clean sand well watered down for optimum
compaction.
0707 CONCRETE WATERPROOFING
PART I – GENERAL:
1.0 1 DESCRIPTION:
General:
This section pertains to the provisions of Cemtec, Colas or equivalent waterproofing compound to concrete
decks and dropped floor slabs. The work under this section is intended to be overlaid, generally with cement
mortar bedding and tile work.
Exception:
This section does not include waterproofing to roof decks with habitable spaces below or to faces of ground
floor slab and foundations.
1.0 2 SUBMITTALS:
A. The Contractor shall submit samples of proposed material, printed specifications and application
instructions before any material is brought on site.
B. Manufacturer's Data:
Within 30 calendar days after award of contract submit:
1. Manufacturer's specifications and other data required to demonstrate compliance with the specified
requirements.
2. For information submit three copies of manufacturer's specifications, label analysis and application
instructions. Indicate by transmittal that a copy of manufacturer's instructions has been distributed
to the applicator responsible for carrying out this work.
A. Ensure all surfaces to receive material are clean, dry and sound with no deleterious adherences before
any work under this section is commenced .
B. Ensure work is not applied to surfaces when the ambient temperature is above 35 Degree Centigrade.
C. Protect the work under this section from any damage and avoid subsequent work for a period of not less
than ten days.
D. The product specified under this section shall only be applied by applicators with the written approval of
the manufacturer holder of the licensed trade mark and as approved by the Client.

2.01 MATERIAL:
Black P.U. liquid waterproofing membrane as manufactured by Construction Material Chemical Industries
(CMCI) or similar approved by Client in writing,

3.01 Surfaces to receive waterproofing under this section shall be free from voids depressions, loose material or
foreign matter.
3.02 Do not proceed with application under adverse conditions and surfaces shall be thoroughly dry.
3.03 Prepare and prime surfaces to manufacturer's instructions.
3.04 Apply material to manufacturer's instructions to total thickness of 1.5mm (including prime coat). Water-
proofing to be returned over the top of floor slab 100mm high to the width of wall.
3.05 Protect all surface not intended to be coated against spatter.
DIVISION 8:
DOORS AND WINDOWS:
0801 Aluminum Doors and Frames.
0802 Aluminum Windows.
0803 Glazing and Mirrors.
0804 Wood Flush Doors.
0805 Finish Hardware.
0806 Steel Doors and Frames c/w lexan sheet.
0807 Garage Doors.
0801 ALUMINIUM DOORS AND FRAMES

PARTI – GENERAL:
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
A. Work included:
This section covers the furnishing and installation of aluminum doors and frames and accessories
B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere:
1. Section 0802 Aluminum Windows.

2. Section 0803 Glazing
3. Section 0705 Joint Sealants
4. Section 0805 Finish Hardware
1.02 APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARDS:
A. Frames shall be constructed of extruded Aluminium alloy, with a minimum wall thickness of 2.5mm.
B. Frames shall be 110mm wide with 150mm wide sill to patio doors.
C. Doors shall be equipped with flush type latching and locking hardware.
D. Each moving panel shall have two adjustable pre-assembled ball bearing rollers in the sill section.
E. All open able doors shall have 125mm wide stiles and top rail, bottom rail 165mm.
1.03 SUBMITTALS:
A. Samples and drawings showing elevations, joints, glazing, frames, method of operations and accessories.

2.01 GENERAL:
A. Aluminum doors and frames shall be the product of Alusco, Al wazzani Salumco, Dhahran, Al Arabi or
approved equivalent by the Client.
B. Units shall be suitable for receiving glazing as approved by Owner, or specified on drawings.
2.02 MATERIALS:
A. Frames and door shall be of extruded aluminium alloy with a nominal wall thickness of 2.5 mm and all
aluminium extrusions shall have a powder coated finish and the colour is to be confirmed by the Client.
B. Double sheet sliding aluminurn door with glass panel to be as specified in Section 0803 – Glazing.
C. Door screen shall be fitted to exterior kitchen door and be full length made of 2 mm thick aluminium
frame wired with 18 x 16 mesh alurninium cloth of colour to match with door frame.
D. Door and frames shall have manufacturer's standard weather stripping.
E. Submit samples of all extrusions and finishes to Client for approval.
F. All finish hardware shall be as specified in Section 0805 - Finish Hardware.

3.01 The Contractor shall ensure that door openings conform with dimension and tolerances shown on the
drawings.
3.02 Comply with manufacturer's instructions for installation of units, hardware and fixing of frames into the
wall.
3.03 Set units plumb, level, and true to line, without warp or rack of frames.
3.04 All joints of both frame and door shall be neatly fitted and secured in a manner to utilize the full strength of
the members connected and provide a permanent watertight joint.
3.05 Provide non-setting mastic seals around frames and masonry.
3.06 Protect all frames during construction for finish, bending, scratching and any other deformity.
3.07 Protect all aluminum doors and frames after manufacture in accordance with manufacturers'
recommendations.
0802 ALUMINUM WINDOWS
PARTI – GENERAL:
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
A. Work included:
This section covers the furnishings and installation of aluminum window and accessories in the
locations and quantities shown on the drawings.
1. Section 0801 - Aluminium Doors and Frames

2. Section 0803 - Glazing
3. Section 0705 - Joint Sealants
1.02 DESIGN CRITERIA:
A. Allowable Tolerances:
1. Hollow extrusions :± 0.25mm
2. Size Tolerances: Dimensions within 1.6mm.
B. Quality Control:
1. Air infiltration test: Window units when tested shall have a maximum infiltration of 0.6 liters per
sec, per meter (Grade A) crack length, when the differential pressure is held at not less than 150 Pa.
2. Water Penetration Test: Window units when tested shall have no water penetration for 15 minutes
when subjected to a rate of flow of 0.203 m/min./m2 with a differential pressure across window
unit of 300 Pa.
3. Window Load Test: Window units when tested for a minimum 800 Pa positive and negative load
for 10 seconds shall have a maximum deformation of frame on sash member 002 times the span
length with no damage to fasteners or hardware.
4. All operable windows shall be designed so that exterior glazed surfaces can be readily cleaned from
inside.
5. Sliding windows shall be designed so that accumulation of dust and sand does not impair operation
and the tracks can be easily cleaned.
6. All operable windows shall have provision for rust proof (optional) insect screens, removable from
the inside and supplied by the owner. Allow for track for future fit by the new owner.
1.03 SUBMITTALS:
A. The Contractor shall submit to the Client for approval powder coated samples (colour to be confirmed
by Client) of corner assembly for each type and accessories.
B. Shop drawings showing elevations and details for each different type of window and frame.
0802 ALUMINIUM WINDOWS

2.01 GENERAL:
All aluminum windows shall be the product of Alusco, Al wazzani, Salunico, Dhahran, Al Arabi or approved
equivalent by the Client.
2.02 MATERIALS:
A. Aluminum window members shall be extruded aluminum alloy Frame and sash members shall have
a nominal wall thickness of 2.5mm.
B. All sash shall be carefully machine fitted to hairline joinery standards, mechanically assembled with
screws end sealed in all joints, with appropriate neoprene or similar joint sealant. Sash shall be
equipped with adjustable rollers. All screws fasteners and accessories shall be non- corrosive
material compatible with aluminum; stainless steel will generally be considered suitable.
C. Glazing shall be double as approved by owner and in accordance with Section 0803.
D. Weather strip material shall be neoprene or EPDM compatible with aluminum. Weld corners of
weather strips.
E. Windows shall be provided with a heavy duty finger touch spring loaded positive lock latch
(Germany made).
F. Frames and door shall be of extruded aluminium alloy with a nominal wall thickness of 2.5mm and
all aluminium extrusions shall have powder coated finish as described in Section 0801.
G. Window screens shall be fitted to all windows and be full length made of 2 mm thick powder
coated aluminium frames wired with 18 x 16 mesh aluminium cloth of colour to match with
window frames.
0802 ALUMINIUM WINDOWS

3.01 Comply with manufacturer's instruction for installation of units, hardware and other components.
3.02 Set units plumb, level and true to line, without warp or crack of frames or sash.
3.03 Anchor frames solidly to surrounding construction to prevent distortion or misalignment.
3.04 Adjust movable units to operate smoothly and to be weather tight when closed.
3.05 Lubricate hardware and moving parts.
3.06 Provide non-setting mastic seals around frames and masonry.
3.07 Protect all aluminum windows after manufacture in accordance with manufacturers' recommendations.
3.08 Test installed windows for leak with field water penetration flood test.
0803 GLAZING AND MIRRORS
PART I – GENERAL:
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
A. Work included:
This section covers the products, materials, execution and workmanship of glazing and all associated
accessories.
1. Section 0705 - Joint Sealants.
2. Section 0801 - Aluminum Doors And Frames.
3. Section 0802 - Aluminum Windows.
1.02 SUBMITTALS:
A. The contractor shall submit samples of each type of glass, glazing compound, sealants mirror frames
and accessories.
B. Certification from the manufacturer stating that all glass is in accordance with the provisions of the
specifications.

2.01 GLASS:
A. All glass shall bear the label of the manufacturer American glasses, Al Zamil and shall conform in all
respects with the requirements of the specifications.
B. Double glazed window units to be reflective glass, 6 mm to exterior, 6 mm clear float to interior with 12
mm dried air space in between. Glass for bathrooms to be double glazed obscured (only one pane of
glass to be obscured).
C. All exterior double sheet sliding aluminum doors, with glass panel on both sides.
D. Fixed window for stairs shall be 190 x 190 x 80mm glass blocks.
E. Safety glass shall be used for all human impact situations. (Safety glass is required in all windows where
glazing is located less than 800mm above FFL).
F. Mirrors shall be 6 mm float glass with high quality silvering and copper based electro depositing
protective coating Seal backs with compatible polyurethane seat coat Mirrors to be set in stainless steel
frames.
2.02 Glazing gasket channels and beads of flexible vinyl EPDM or neoprene for all glass to be framed in
aluminum shall be the standard products furnished by the door and window manufacturer to fit their frames
and the glass thickness detailed. All junctions and corners shall be welded.
2.03 Tapes and setting blocks shall be neoprene.
2.04 Glazing compound shall be as recommended by the glass manufacturer for the intended
application.

3.01 Inspect each piece of glass immediately before installation, Pieces which have significant impact damage at
edges, scratches or abrasions of faces, or any other evidence of damage shall not be installed.
3.02 Measure all openings and cut glass and make double glazing units accurately to fit each opening with
minimum edge clearances.
3.03 Clean and remove protective coatings which may cause adhesion failure or interfere with bond sealants.
3.04 Set glass in a manner which produces greatest possible degree of uniformity in appearance. Face all glass,
which has dissimilar faces with matching faces in the same direction.
3.05 Mirrors shall generally be fixed as indicated on the drawings. In all cases mirrors shall be spaced away from
backing by at least 1.5 mm using inert P.V.C setting strips at fixing points.
3.06 Use masking tape.
0804 WOOD DOORS
PART I- GENERAL:
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
A. This section covers the furnishing and installation of wood doors, frames and accessories, in location
and quantities shown on the drawings and as required.
1. Section 0601 Carpentry and Millwork

2. Section 0801 Aluminium Doors and Frames
3. Section 0805 Finish Hardware
4. Section 0903 Painting
1.02 SUBMITTALS:
A. The Contractor shall submit to the Owner/Consultant a sample of each type of door and copies of
manufacturer's technical specifications including installation instructions.
0804 WOOD DOORS
PART II - PRODUCTS:
2.0 1 MATERIALS:
General:
All goods and products shall be as detailed on drawings and from reputable manufacturer approved by
Client. The Client will select the design in the workshop drawings. (manufacturer: AI Bawardi or approval
equal).
2.0 2 WOOD DOORS:
A. Mahogany semi-solid timber panel and solid wood frame with architraves for doors. At the locations
indicated on the drawings.
B. Flush door (60%) and solid wood frame with architraves for doors, at the locations indicated on the
drawings.
C. All wooden doors for toilets and bathrooms shall be laminated with Formica sheets all the entire
intenor surface (Inner side) of the door.
D. Completed doors shall be sound, rigid and free from defects and warp. All edges shall be aligned and
smooth Doors shall be a minimum thickness of 44 mm.
E. The width of the lipping shall equal the thickness of the door and the lipping itself shall not be less
than 10 mm thick. Lipping's shall be glued to the core. Where edges are required to be rebated the
lipping shall be a minimum of 30 mm thick and the rebate shall be formed in the lipping.
F. Joints shall be close fitting, hardwood dowelled or mortised framed and of strength to maintain the
structural properties of members connected, All adjoining faces and edges shall be flush and smooth.
G. Edges shall be rectangular and solid except that the leading edge shall be beveled from front to back.
Rebated edges shall be at least 13 mm deep.
H. Adhesives: all adhesives shall be waterproof, melamine fortified urea type.
I. Door frames shall be of quality grade wood of same species and as detailed on the drawings, Refer to
Section 0601.
J. All locks shall be as specified in Section 0805 - Finish Hardware.
0804 WOOD DOORS

PART III -EXECUTION:
3.01 Contractor shall verily that door frames are of the type required for proper installation of doors in their
respective locations.
3.02 Doors shall be installed in strict conformance with the door manufacturer's written Instructions.
3.03 Do not install doors in frames which would hinder the operation of the doors.
3.04 Install all finish hardware as recommended by the hardware manufacturer.
0805 FINISH HARDWARE
PART I- GENERAL:
1.0 1 DESCRIPTIDN:
A. Work Included:
This section covers the installation of all finish hardware's such as door locksets, door stops,
cabinet handle and door hardware.
1. Section 0102 Quality Control

2. Section 0602 Cabinet Work
3. Section 0801 Aluminium Doors and Frames
4. Section 0804 Wood Flush Doors

A. Manufacturer's unless otherwise approved obtain each kind of hardware i.e. latch and locksets,
hinges, closer etc from one supplier only. Although several may offer products complying with the
specified requirements.
B. Unless otherwise indicated or directed the colour of white powder coated for aluminium work and
satin stainless steel or chrome finish hardware for wooden doors shall match that of the door they
are mounted.
C. Codes and Standards:
ANSI - American National Standards Institute.
156.1 - For butt hinges.
1562 - Locks and lock trim.
156.3 - Exit device.
156.3 - Auxiliary locks and associated products.
156.13 - Mortise locks and latches.
156 16 - Auxiliary hardware.

1.0 3 SUBMITTALS:
Submit samples of materials and manufacturer's literature indicating details of material and installation
instructions.
2.01 Materials:
A. All materials and accessories shall be the product of a manufacturer and supplier regularly engaged in
the same (Manufacturer: YALE or approval equal).
The required type of finish hardware and relaled ilems shall include but not be limited to the following:
1. Hinges.
2. Lock cylinders and keys.
3. Lock and latch sets.
4. Door closers.
5. Door stoppers and door bumpers.
6. Thresholds.
7. Weather strips and seals.
8. Door trims and units.
B. Hardware products and manufacturers:
1. Wood Door Hardware (Except bedrooms):
a. 1½ pairs of stainless steel (butt.) hinges 3.5° x 3.5° Yale SS grade (A).
b. Mortise lock.
c. Single level, hand door (Italia).
d. Door stop.
2. Wood Door Hardware (For Bedrooms):

b. Door stop.
c. Mortise lock.
d. Single level, hand door (Italia).
3. Aluminum Door Hardware:
a. 1½ pairs of stainless steel Dr Hahn hinges 3.5° x 3.5° .
b. Door stop.
c. Marble threshold with weather strip.
d. CES lock and cylinder
e. Single level, hand door (Italia).
4. Wood Door Hardware (Toilet and bathroom):
b. Door slop.
c. Mortise lock.
d. Single level, hand door (Italia).
e. Marble threshold with weather strip.
5. Mail Box:
a. 300 x 300 x 150 mm stainless steel mail box, 1 mm thick with mirror finish.
b. Posting slot on outside, with name card holder, key operated at the side.

3.01 Co-ordinate with other relevant sections as required to ensure proper and adequate provision in door for
installation of the finish hardware in the required location.
3.02 Prior to installation, inspect location of all hardware and verify that all necessary provisions have been
made. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancies until they have been resolved.
3.03 Install all finish hardware with matching screws in the quantities and location shown on the drawings
and in full accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations install hardware firmly in place for
long life under the anticipated usage.
3.04 Install each item in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Whenever
cutting and fitting is required to install hardware onto or into surfaces which are later to be painted or
finished in another way, co-ordinate of removal, storage and reinstallation or application of surface
protection with finishing work elsewhere.
3.05 Set units plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment substrate as necessary
for proper Installation and operation. Separate aluminum and other corridible metal surfaces from
sources of corrosion or electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials Drill and countersink
units which are factory prepared for anchorage fasteners Space fasteners and anchors in accordance
With manufacturer's instructions or as directed.
3.06 Locks and Latches:
A. Unless otherwise indicated or specified, provide latches that comply with ANSI 156.2.
B. Strikes: provide manufacture’s standard wrought box strike for each latch, with curved lip
extended to protect frame, finish to match hardware set.
C. Lock Throw, provide 16 mm minimum throw of latch on pairs of doors.
3.07 Lock Cylinders and Keying:
A. Standard system: the Contractor shall submit to Owner/Consultant and approval a keying
system for the buildings The keying system shall be designed in order to provide the utmost
convenience, safety and security of SAUDI ARAMCO in use of the premises.
B. Metal: construct lock cylinder parts from brass/bronze, stainless steel or nickel silver.
C. Key Material, provide keys of nickel silver.
D. Key Quantity: furnish 3 keys for each locks.
E. Provide each cylinder with series 1000: Escutcheon rose knob and outside in chrome plated
metal.
=== End Section ===
0806 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART I – GENERAL:
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
Extent of standard steel external doors and frames is shown and scheduled on drawings, for main
entrance, family entrance, kitchen service and roof deck access doors.
(Note: Aluminum door for roof central heater room).
o Provide doors and frames complying with Steel Door Institute “Recommended Specifications:
Standard Steel Doors and Frames” (SDI-100) and as herein specified.
o Manufacturer: Provide standard steel doors and frames by a local manufacturer approved by
the Client Representative and specialising in production of this type of work.
1.03 SUBMITTALS:
o Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications for fabrication and installation, including
data substantiating that products comply with requirements.
o Shop Drawings: Submit for fabrication and installation of steel construction, location and
installation requirements of finish hardware and reinforcements. and details of joints and
connections, Show anchorage and accessory items.
o Provide schedule of doors and frames using same reference details and openings as those on
contract drawings.
o Samples: Full range of colour samples for Owner/Consultant selection; 2 samples, 6" square
min. of each colour and texture selected for factory finished doors and frames.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:
o Deliver doors cartoned or crated to provide protection during transit and job storage.
o Inspect doors upon delivery for damage, Minor damages may be repaired provided finished
items are equal in all respects to new work and acceptable to Owner/Consultant; otherwise,
remove and replace damaged items as directed.
o Store doors and frames at building site under cover. Place units on wood sills at least 4” high,
or otherwise store on floors in manner that will prevent rust or damage, Avoid use of non-
vented plastic or canvas shelters which could create humidity chamber. If cardboard wrapper
on door becomes wet, remove carton immediately. Provide ¼” spacers between stacked doors
to promote air circulation.

PART II- PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS:
Galvanised Steel Sheets: Zinc-coated carbon steel sheets of commercial quality, complying with ASTM A
526, with ASTM A 525, G60 zinc coating, mill phosphatised.
Steel door(s) and frame with decorative grille work and break-resistant plastic panel (Lexan) rover for main/
family entrance doors, service doors, guest entrance gate and family entrance gate.
Supports and Anchors: Fabricate of not less than 18 gauge galvanized sheet material.
Inserts, Bolts and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized items to be built into exterior walls. Complying with ASTM
A 153, Class C or D as applicable.
Shop Applied Paint:
Primer: Rust-Inhibitive enamel or paint, either air-drying or baking, suitable as a base for specified finish
paints.
Finish, Manufacturer's standard baking epoxy or enamel paint.
Manufacturer: AI dress or approval equal.
2.02 FABRICATION, GENERAL:
 Fabricate steel door and frame units to be rigid, neat in appearance and free from defects, warp or
buckle. Wherever practicable, fit and assemble units in manufacturer’s plant Clearly identify work that
cannot be permanently factory-assembled before shipment, to assure proper assembly at project site.
 Fabricate exterior doors, panels and frames from galvanized sheet steel. Close top and bottom edges of
exterior doors as integral part of door construction or by addition of inverted steel channels.
 Exposed Fasteners: Unless otherwise indicated, provide countersunk flat Phillips heads for exposed
screws and bolts.
 Finish Hardware Preparation: Prepare doors and frames to receive mortised and concealed finish
hardware in accordance with final Finish Hardware Schedule and provided by hardware supplier
Comply with applicable requirements of ANSI A 115 series specifications for door and frame
preparation for hardware.
 For concealed overhead door closers, provide space, cutouts, reinforcing and provisions for fastening to
top rail of doors or head of frames, as applicable.
 Reinforce doors and frames to receive surface-applied hardware. Drilling and tapping for surface-applied
finish hardware may be done at project site.
 Locate finish hardware as Shown on final shop drawings or, if not shown, in accordance with
"Recommended Locations for Builder's Hardware", published by Door and Hardware Institute.
Shop Painting:
 Clean, treat and paint exposed surfaces of steel door and frame units, including galvanized surfaces.
 Clean steel surfaces of mill scale, rust, oil, grease, dirt, and other foreign materials before application of
paint.
 Apply shop coat of prime paint of even consistency to provide a uniformly finished surface ready to
receive finish paint.
 Apply finish coal to doors Indicated as prefinished by electrostatically spraying and baking, to produce a
paint thickness of 1.25 mils.

3.01 INSPECTION:
The Contractor must examine substrate and conditions under which steel doors and frames are to be
installed and must notify the Owner/Consultant In writing of any conditions detrimental to proper and
timely completion of work, Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
3.02 INSTALLATION:
A. General, Install steel doors, frames, and accessories in accordance with final shop drawings and
manufacturer's data, and as here in specified.
B. Placing Frames' Comply with provisions of SDI-105 "Recommended Erection Instructions For Steel
Frames", unless otherwise indicated.
In masonry construction, locate 3 wall anchors per jamb at hinge and strike levels.
C. Door Installation: Fit steel doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified in SDI-100.
D. Adjust and Clean: Prime cost touch up immediately after erection, sand smooth any rusted or
damaged areas of prime coat and apply touch-up of compatible air-drying primer.
Protection Removal: Immediately prior to final inspection, remove protective plastic wrappings
from prefinished doors.
Final Adjustments Check and readjust operating finish hardware Items, leaving steel doors and
frames undamaged and in complete and proper operating condition.

0807 GARAGE DOORS
PART I- GENERAL:

A. Work Included:
This section covers the furnishing and installation of the Sectional garage door and all
accessories.
1. Section 0705 Joint Sealants

2. Section 1601 Electrical Works
1.02 SUBMITTALS:
All technical brochures, colour samples and shop drawings.
0807 GARAGE DOORS

2.01 MATERIALS:
A. The sectional garage door to be supplied by a local manufacturer approved by the Client Representative
(Manufacturer: AI dress or approval equal).
B. The door is to be remote controlled with manual operation in case of power failure The motor shall
have a built-in auto reverse safety feature.
C. The door shall be factory painted to colour selected by Client Representative.
D. The motor must be American manufacturer with ¾ hours capacity or equally approved.
0807 GARAGE DOORS

PART III- EXECUTION:
3.01 The Contractor shall ensure that the door opening conforms to the dimensions shown on the drawings.
3.02 The door, frame motors etc. shall be fixed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's Instructions.
DIVISION 9:
FINISHES:
0901 Solid Plaster Rendering Stucco Work.

0902 Tiling.
0903 Painting.
0904 Gypsum Wallboard and Ceiling System.
0905 Metal Stud and Ceiling Support Systems.
0906 Marble and Granite Tiling.
0901 SOLID PLASTER RENDERING STUCCO WORK

PART 1- GENERAL:
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
A. Work included:
This section covers the finishing and installation of all internal and external cement plaster, metal
lath and accessories, to complete the work as indicated on the drawings.
1. Section 0402 Concrete Unij Masonry.

2. Section 0705 Joint Sealant.
3. Section 0903 Painting.
1.02 SUBMITTALS:
A. The Contractor shall submit one sample of each accessory and manufacturer’s specification and
installation instructions for each plaster accessory required for Client's review and approval before
any material is purchased.
B. The Contractor shall submit for Owner's review and approval two finished samples of each plaster
onto a typical background measuring not less than one meter square.

PART II- PRODUCTS:
2.01 GENERAL:
A. All goods and products shall be the product of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of all
plastering constituents and accessories including metal lath.
2.02 MATERIALS:
A. Metal Lath:
1. Where detailed and where required to ensure high standards, galvanized steel sellf-furring lath
weighting 1.5 Kg/m2 for exterior stucco. Staggered Identifications spaced 88mm part horizontally
and 50mm apart vertically hold the body of the lath not less than 6mm away from the wall.
B. Wire Ties:
Soft annealed galvanized steel wire, not less than 1.5mm (16 gauge) for tying metal lath to anchor.
C. Plaster Accessories:
1. Corner Beads' Galvanized steel short flange, spring fit angle weighing 75 Kg/300 linear meter.
2. Casing Beads' Galvanized steel of weight 110 Kgl1000 linear meter.
3. Expansion control Joints' Galvanized steel bellows types with expansion flanges weighing 140
Kg/300 m2.
D. Cement Plaster:
1. Cement As per Portland Cement Section 0303.
2. Aggregate: Aggregate shall be clean, hard, durable, sharp particles completely free from all
deleterious salts.
3. Lime: Lime shall be hydrated finished lime; Lime shall not be used for exterior plaster.
4. Water shall be potable, clean and free from deleterious amounts of oils, salts, alkali, organic matter
and other harmful materials.
5. Mix Proportions shall be one (1) part cement, four (4) parts sand and one half (1/2) part hydrated
lime.

PART III-EXECUTION:
Note: Allow different thickness of the plaster for decorative panels as shown the drawing.
3.01 Ensure that all required and necessary insulation has been installed to building surfaces, pipe and other
items.
3.02 Install plaster accessories to plaster bases of substrates with galvanized fasteners.
3.03 Plaster for exterior surfaces shall consist of three-coat work 19mm thickness finished with a fine wood
float.
3.04 Plaster for interior surfaces of masonry walls to be plastered shall be not less than two coats for
thicknesses up to 12mm thickness and three coat work for thicknesses above 12mm and up to 15mm
thickness, Top coat shall be best quality Gypsum and fine sharp sand plaster mixed to manufacturers
recommendations.
3.05 Each coat of cement plaster shall be kept continuously moist for a minimum of 48 hours after
application and shall be protected from direct sunlight for not less than 7 days.
3.06 On surfaces where plaster is to be applied over two differing materials (e.g. concrete block and poured-
in-place concrete and around door, window and arched openings) a strip of metal lath shall be located at
the abutting edge to prevent future plaster cracking. The overlap on each side shall be at least 100mm.
3.07 All plastering shall be done when the temperature is between 13 Degree Centigrade and 35 Degree
Centigrade. No plastering shall be done when the temperature is above 35 Degree Centigrade.
3.08 Finished doors, window frames, all aluminum and other surfaces which do not receive a plaster finish
shall be protected during plaster application.
3.09 3mm thick finishing Coat of gypsum to be applied to all plasterboard surfaces to walls.
3.010 Plaster for interior surface to underside of concrete floor and roof slabs to be three coats to
thickness 15mm finished smooth to received texture coating finish (see Section 0903).

0902 TILING
PART I – GENERAL:
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
A. General:
This section covers the provision and installation of all floor and wall tiling as shown on the drawings
and specified herein.
1. Section 0707 Concrete Waterproofing

2. Section 0901 Solid Plaster Rendering Stucco Work
3. Section 0903 Painting
4. Section 0904 Gypsum Wallboard and Ceiling Systems.
5. Section 1001 Bathroom Fixtures
6. Section 1002 Bathroom Accessories
A. Manufacturer:
The products used in the work of this section shall be produced by manufacturers regularly engaged in
the manufacture of these products and with a history of production and quality acceptable to the
Owner/Consultant.
The quality, colour and design shall be established by samples supplied by the Contractor and approved
in writing by the Owner/Consultant, and it shall be no less quality than the material specified in part II-
PRODUCTS of this section.
B. Installer:
Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary
crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and methods needed for proper
performance of the work in this section.
1.03 SUBMITTALS:
1. Samples:
Within 30 days of contract award, submit complete samples of the complete range of colours and
patterns of tiles from the range 01at least one manufacturer. Not less
than two different colour-ways shall be submitted from both wall and floor tile range, Each colour-way
shall also be capable of being supplied with all ceramic accessones.
2. Shop Drawings:
Indicate tile layout, patterns, color arrangement, penmeter conditions, junctions with dissimilar
materials, control and expansion Joints, thresholds, accessories, and setting details.
1.04 STANDARDS:
The standard required to be met in this section shall be those as defined, and set out in the Tile Council of
America Inc. – “American National Standard Specification for the Installation of Ceramic Tiles".
Ceramic Wall Tiling to: ANSI A108.4.
Ceramic Floor Tiling to: ANSI A108.1.
0902 TILING
PART II -PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS:
A. All materials shall be new and the best "Grade One" of their respective kinds and shall be manufactured
by Saudi Ceramics, RAK or approved equal.
1. Bathrooms & toilets, kitchen, dirty kitchen & store, laundary room, maid's room, water heater and
store room:
a. 300 x 300 x 8 mm, 300 x 600 x 8 mm, 200 x 200 x 8 mm or 400 x400 x 8 mm un-glazed
(non-slip) ceramic tiles for floor.
b. 300 x 600 x 6 mm, 200 x 200 x 6 mm or 600 x 600 x 6 mm ceramic tiles for wall (For
bathroom, toilet and wash areas).
c. 300 x 100 mm high ceramic tile skirting.
d. Colour and decorative design for ceramic tiles to be selected by Owner.
2. Ground floor, first floor and roof deck floor area (Except above mentioned areas).
a. 400 x 400 x 8 mm or 800 x 800 x 8 mm unglazed ceramic tiles for floor.
b. 400 x 100 mm high ceramic tile skirting.
c. Colour and decorative design for ceramic tiles to be selected by Owner.
3. Staircase and landing:
a. 30mm thick marble for stair landing.
b. 30mm thick marble for steps with three cut grooves behind 6mm radius rounded edges and
20mm thick marble riser.
c. 20 mm thick x 100mm high marble skirting.
d. Marble material from grade A or B (refer to section 0906).
4. Roof Deck and Upper Roof Deck area:
a. 250 x 250 x25mm Terrazo tiles for roof deck floor.
b. Gravel ballast finish for upper roof deck floor.
5. Main/Family/Service entrance area:
a. 400 x 400 x 20 mm marble tile (Cecilian /gemco/ omani or other equal marble tiles).
b. 100 mm marble skirting.
c. Granite material from grade A or B (refer to section 0908).
B. Bedding screed shall be 1:3 cement, sand mixed with latex.
C. Cement based adhesive use "Iaticrete" 4237 or similar approved.
D. Grout for wall and floor tiles shall be of matching colour according 10approved samples submitted by
Contractor, Grout shall be pre-mixed as Balfloor/Balwall or equal approved The Contractor to submit
manufacturer's full technical data for approval of the Owner/Consultant.
E. Approved material to be used for installation of wall and floor tiles shall be mixed and used strictly in
accordance with the manufacturer's written recommendations.
2.02 EXTRA STOCK:
Upon completion of this section. deliver to Owner an extra stock of one carton of not less than 25 pieces of
each colour and type of tile used in the building, including all trims and accessories.
0902 TILING
PART III-EXECUTION:
2.01 INSPECTION:
Examine the areas to be done under this section and ensure that all preceding and preparatory work of
other sections IS complete and satisfactory, Correct conditions detrimental to proper and timely
completion of the work, Do not proceed until satisfactory conditions have been achieved.
2.02 INSTALLATION:
Note: Allow for minimal cutting ot tiles on the location of the floor tiling around drains and wall tiling
around sockets, etc.
A. Floors:
Proceed with laying in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and quoted
standard all as approved by the Owner/Consultant. Lay bedding screed to entire area with 10 mm
Foam Polystyrene full depth perimeter breaker strip, carefully maintaining levels and falls where
necessary and where indicated to fall drains. Before bedding has set while still plastic dust with neat
cement, spray fine mist of latex fixative and lay tiles to line, tamping them to form a firm bond true
to levels and falls as indicated avoiding all Voids under tiles Maintain joints and insert temporary
spacer in full depth of expansion and control joints, Any hollowness, hair cracks, chips will not be
accepted and shall be immediately replaced A water flow test is to be carried out prior to grouting
of tiles.
B. Walls:
Wall tiling shall generally be by the adhesive method Set out to allow for sanitary fixtures and
bathroom accessories. Spread adhesive on surface to be tiled with notched trowel of type
recommended by the manufacturer for the surface and type of tile. Cover surface uniformly without
bare spots. Apply adhesive only in areas which can be covered with tile before the adhesive "films"
over. Remove any adhesive that films over and refloat with fresh adhesive. Fastening heads for
Gypsum Linings shall be covered directly with adhesive and tile with no finishing compound Refer
Section 0905.
C. Grout wall and floor tiles without joint voids or skips, with neat grout (colour to be approved), of
creamy consistency, rub well-in and polish off Clean off grout to depth of shoulder of cushion edge.
Rake-out perimeter joints subsequently to receive sealant of matching colour.
D. Movement joints shall be sealed and caulked using silicone at top and bottom of walls, at fillings, at
doors and window frames, and polysulphide for floor, strictly according to the Manufacturer’s
written recommendation and to Section 0705 Use backing breaker strip or foam polyethylene
backing rod to sealed joints.
E. On completion keep tiles moist for 72 hours. Clean off tiles if necessary on unglazed tiles only
using 1:10 dilution of Muriatic Acid at least 10 days after grouting but only under written approval
of the Owner/Consultant. Neutralize, polish and leave clean for final inspection.
F. Avoid usage of tiles less than half tile width.
G. All floors are 10be water tested for level and water tightness.
H. Selling of Ceramic Floor Tile:
Floor tile shall be set generally as for wail tile and in accordance with ANSI A108.2, Use Portland
cement mortar setting for floors on substrates, Use commercial grout for grouting wall and floor
tiles. Colour pigment shall be mineral oxide unaffected by lime, cement or weathering.
Tile shall be pressed and beaten into position to obtain full contact with mortar bed with no Voids
in the mortar.
If tile is rib-backed, a layer of mortar shall be troweled on the back of each tile prior to placing on
the mortar bed.
Paper and glue shall be removed within one hour after tile is set and all tiles that are out of line or
level shall then be adjusted.
Colour of the tile shall be determined by the Owner or his representative.
0903 PAINTING
PART I – GENERAL:
1.0 1 DESCRIPTION:
A. Work included:
Paint and finish all exterior and interior exposed surfaces listed on the Painting Schedule in Part 3 of
this Section, in accordance with the types of finish shown on the Finish Schedules in the Drawings and
as specified herein.
B. Related works described elsewhere:
Priming or priming and finishing of certain surfaces are specified to be factory performed or installer
performed under pertinent other sections.
C. Work not included:
1. Do not include painting which is specified under other sections.
2. Unless otherwise indicated, painting is not required on surfaces in concealed areas and inaccessible
areas such as furred spaces, pipe spaces, and duct shafts, Inside of service rooms and cupboards will
be finished.
3. Metal surfaces of Powder Coated aluminium, stainless steel. chromium plate, copper, bronze, and
similar finished materials will not require painting under this Section except as may be specified
herein.
4. Do not paint any moving surfaces of parts of operating units, mechanical or electrical parts such as
valve operators, linkages, sink ages. sensing devices, and motor shafts, unless otherwise indicated.
5. Do not paint over any required labels or equipment identification, performance rating, name, or
nomenclature plates.
D. Definitions:
The term "paint", as used herein, means all coating systems materials including primers, emulsions,
rubber finish, epoxy, enamels, sealers, fillers, and other applied materials whether used as prime,
intermediate, or finish coats.
A. Standards: Comply with standards specified in this Section.
B. Qualifications of Manufacturer' Products used in the work of this section shall be produced by
manufacturers regularly engaged in manufacture of similar Items and with a history of successful
production acceptable to the Client.
C. Qualification of Workmen:
1. Provide at least one person who shall be present at all times during execution of the work of this
Section, who shall be thoroughly familiar with the specified requirements and the materials and
methods needed for their execution, and who shall direct all work performed under this Section.
2. Provide adequate numbers of workmen skilled in the necessary crafts and properly informed of the
methods and materials to be used.
3. In acceptance or rejection of the work of this Section, the Client will make no allowance for lack of
skill on the part of workmen.
D. Paint Coordination:
1. Provide finish coats which are compatible with the prime coots used.
2. Review other Sections of these Specifications as required, verifying the prime coats to be used and
ensuring compatibility of the total coating system for the various substrata.
3. Upon request, furnish information on the characteristics of the specific finish materials to ensure
that compatible prime coats are used.
4. Provide barrier coats over non-compatible primers, or remove the primer and reprime as required.
5. Notify the Client in writing of anticipated problems in using the specified coating systems over
prime-coating supplied under other Sections.
1.0 3 SUBMITTALS:
A. General:
Comply with provisions of Section 1
B. Manufacturers' Data:
Within 30 calendar days after award of the Contract, submit:
1. Complete materials list of all items proposed to be furnished and installed under this Section.
2. Manufactures' specifications and other data required to demonstrate compliance with the
specified requirements.
3. For information only submit three copies of the manufacturers' specifications, including paint
label analysis and application instructions for each materials specified. Indicate by transmittal
that a copy of each manufacturer's instructions has been distributed to the applicator.
Upon receipt of review comments, make all revisions and corrections, and resubmit if so
required.
C. Samples:
1. Following the selection of colours and finish by the Client, as described In Paragraph 2.10, below,
submit samples for the Client's review.
a. Provide three samples of each colour and each finish for each material on which the finish is
specified to be applied. These samples also become a guide for establishing acceptability of
surface textures.
b. Except as otherwise directed by the Client samples shall be approximately 20cm x 25cm.
c. If so directed by the Client, submit samples during progress of the work of this Section in the
form of actual application of the approved materials on actual surfaces to be painted.
2. Revise and resubmit each sample as requested until the required finish, colour, and texture are
achieved Such samples when approved, shall constitute standards for colour and finish for
acceptance or rejection of completed work.
A. Delivery of Materials:
Deliver all materials to the job site in original, new and unopened containers bearing the
Manufacturer’s name and label showing the following information:
1. Name of title of material.
2. Fed. spec, number, if applicable.
3. Manufacturer's stock number.
4. Manufacturer's name.
5. Contents by volume for major constituents.
6. Thinning instructions.
7. Application instructions.
8. Date of Manufacture/Shelf Life.
B. Storage of Materials:
Provide proper storage to prevent damage to; and deterioration of, paint materials.
C. Protection:
Use all means necessary to protect the materials of this Section before, during, and after installation and
to protect the work and materials of all other trades.
D. Replacement:
In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the approval of the
Client and at no additional cost to the Client.
A. Surface Temperatures:
Do not apply solvent-thinned paints when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and the
surrounding air temperatures are below 7 Degree Centigrade or above 35 Degree Centigrade, unless
otherwise permitted by the manufacturer's printed instructions as approved by the Owner.
B. Weather Conditions:
Do not apply paint In Dust Storms, rain, fog, or mist, or when the relative humidity exceeds 65%. or to
damp or wet surfaces; unless otherwise permitted by the manufacturer's printed instructions as approved
by the Client. Application may be continued during inclement weather within the temperature limits
specified by the paint manufacturer during application and drying periods.
0903 PAINTING
PART II- PRODUCTS:
2.01 PAINT MATERIALS:
A. Design is based on use for texture coatings and paint products manufactured by JOTUN PAINTS
LTD, Equal products of other manufacturers approved in advance by the Client, may be substituted
in accordance with the provisions of Section on Substitutions.
B. General:
Provide the best quality grade of the various types of coatings as regularly manufactured by paint
materials manufacturer's approved by the Client. Materials not displaying the manufacturer's
identification as a standard best-grade product will not be acceptable.
C. Durability:
Provide paints of durable and washable quality. Do not use paint materials which will not
withstand normal washing as required to remove pencil marks. ink, ordinary Soil, and similar
material without showing discolouration, loss of gloss, staining, or other damage.
D. Colours and Glosses: Clear varnish finishes:
1. The Client will select colours to be used in the various types of paint and will be the sole judge
of acceptability of the various glosses obtained from materials proposed to be used by the
Contractor.
2. Colour Schedules: The Client will prepare a Colour schedule with samples for the guidance of
the painter and reserves the right to select, allocate, and vary colours on different surfaces
throughout buildings, subject to the following limitations.
3. Exterior Work: A maximum of 5 different dark tones shall be allowed with variations for trim,
doors, miscellaneous woods, and metal work. Use only light and alkali proof pigments.
4. Interior Work: A maximum of 8 different pigmented colours will be used with variations for
trim and wall surfaces, Ceilings shall be white Wood trim shall be finished where directed in
clear e.g.,. polyurethane varnish.
5. Darktones: Approximately 15% of all in tenor colours will be deep darktones but will be
subject to Client's specific instruction.
E. Undercoats and Thinners: Provide undercoat paint produced by the same manufacturer as the
finish coat. Use only the thinners recommended by the paint manufacturer. And use only to the
recommended limits. Insofar as practicable, use undercoat, finish coal, and thinner material as parts
of unified systems of paint finish.
F. Standards' Provide paint materials which meet or exceed the Paint Industry standards.
2.02 APPLICATION EQUIPMENT:
A. General:
For application of the approved paint, use only such equipment as recommended tor application of
the particular paint by the manufacturer of the particular paint, and as approved by the Client.
B. Compatibility:
Prior to actual use of application equipment, use all means necessary to verify that the proposed
equipment is actually compatible With the material to be applied and that the integrity of the finish
will not be jeopardized by use of the proposed application equipment.
All other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper Installation of the
work of this Section, shall be new, first-quality of their respective kinds, and as selected by the
contractor subject to the approval of the Client.
0904 PAINTING
PART III-EXECUTION:
3.01 SURFACE:
A. Inspection: Prior to Installation of the work of this Section, carefully inspect the installed work of
all other trades and verify that all such work is complete to the point where this Installation may
properly commence. Verify that painting may be completed in strict accordance with the original
design and with the manufacturer's recommendations as approved by the Client. Ensure that high
levels of lighting are provided to allow at any time detailed inspection 0/ surfaces and proper
conditions for application.
B. Discrepancies: Do not proceed in areas of discrepancy until all such discrepancies have been /fully
resolved.
3.02 MATERIALS PREPARATION:
A. General:
1. Mix and prepare painting materials In strict accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations as approved by the Client.
2. Store materials not in actual use in tightly covered containers.
3. Maintain containers used in storage, mixing, and application of paint In a clean condition, free
from foreign materials and residue.
B. Stirring: Stir all materials before application to produce a mixture of uniform density, and as
required during the application of materials Do not stir into the material any film which may form
on the surface. Remove the film and, if necessary, strain the material before using.
3.03 SURFACE PREPARATION:
A. General:
1. Perform all preparation and cleaning procedures in strict accordance with the paint
manufacturer's recommendations as approved by the Clients.
2. Remove all removable items which are in place and are not scheduled to receive paint finish, or
provide surface-applied protection prior to surface preparation and painting operations.
3. Following completion of painting in each space or area, reinstall the removed items by using
workmen skilled in the necessary trades.
4. Clean each surface to be painted until they are completely free from dirt, dust, laitance, oil,
grease and loose materials prior to applying paint or surface treatment
5. Remove oil and grease with clean clothes and cleaning solvents of low toxicity and a flash
point in excess of 38 Degree Centigrade, prior to start of mechanical cleaning.
6. Schedule the cleaning and painting so that dust & other contaminants from the cleaning
process will not fall into wet newly painted surfaces.
B. Preparation of Wood Surfaces:
1. Clean all wood surfaces until they are free from dirt, oil ,and all other foreign substance.
2. Smooth all finished wood surfaces exposed to view, using the proper sandpaper Where so
required, use varying degrees of coarseness In sandpaper to produce a uniformly smooth and
unmarred wood surface.
3. Unless specifically approved by the Client, do not proceed with painting of wood surfaces until
the moisture content of the wood is 12% or less as measured by dry-weight process or a
moisture-meter approved by the Client.
C. Preparation of Metal Surfaces:
1. Thoroughly clean all surfaces until they are completely free from dirt, oil, and grease.
2. On galvanized surfaces, use solvent for the Initial cleaning and then treat the surface
thoroughly with phosphoric acid, etc., remove all etching solution before proceeding.
3. Allow to dry thoroughly before application of paint.
3.04 PAINT APPLICATION:
Note: Application is as per manufacturer's recommendation and specification.
A. General:
1. Touch-up all shop-applied prime coats which have been damaged and touch-up all bare areas
prior to start of finish coats applications.
2. Slightly vary the shade of succeeding coats, Do not apply additional coats until the completed
coat has been Inspected and approved, only the inspected and approved coats of paint will be
considered in determining the number of coats applied.
3. Sand and dust between enamel coats to remove all defects visible to the unaided eye from
distance of five feet.
4. On all screw- fix removable panels and all hinged panels, paint the back sides to match the
exposed sides.
B. Drying:
1. Allow sufficient drying time between coats, Modify the period as recommended by the material
manufacturer to suit adverse weather conditions.
2. Oil-base oleo-resinous solvent-type paints shall be considered dry for re-coating when the paint
feels firm does not deform or feel sticky under moderate pressure of the thumb, and the
application of another coat of paint does not cause lifting or loss of adhesion of the undercoat.
C. Brush Application: Brush-out and work all brush coals onto the surfaces in an even film.
Cloudness, spoiling, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, and other surface
imperfections will not be acceptable.
D. Spray Application:
1. Confine spray application to metal framework and similar surfaces where hand brush work
would be inferior.
2. Wherever spray application is used, apply each coat to provide the equivalent hiding of
brush-applied coats, Do not double back with spray equipment for the purpose of building
up film thickness of two coats in one pass.
E. Completed work shall match the approved sample for colour, texture, and coverage Remove,
refinish, or re-paint all work not in compliance with specified requirements.
3.05 PAINTING SCHEDULE:
A. General:
Painting required under this Section is called for on the drawings, Paint types or equal are
defined below.
B. Exterior Metal:
1. First Coat, Zinc Phosphate Primer
2. Second Coat Polyamide Epoxy Enamel
3. Third Coat: Urethane Epoxy Enamel
C. Interior Finish:
1. On wall surfaces all areas:
a. First Coat: Primer
b. Second Coat: Uotun-"Fenomastic" paint or similarly approved by client
c. Third Coat: Uotun- “Fenomasiic” paint or Similarly approved by client
2. On ceilings to all areas:
3. On Gypsum Board:

4. On metal, use:
a. First Coat: Zinc phosphate pnmer
b. Second Coat: Alkyd Undercoat

c. Third Coat: Alkyd semi- glossy enamel
D. Exterior Finish:
1. On walls of building:
b. Second Coat: Uotun-profile Decor or similarly approved by client
c. Third Coat: Uotun- profile Decoror Similarly approved by client
2. Exterior of boundary wall:
b. Second Coat: Uotun-profile Decor or similarly approved by client
c. Third Coat: Uotun- profile Decoror Similarly approved by client
3. Interior of boundary wall:
b. Second Coat: Uotun Heavytex (hopper gun pressed) or equal approved by client
c. Third Coat: Uotun Heavytex (hopprt gun pressed) or equal approved by client
E. Miscellaneous Surfaces and procedures:

1. Exposed Mechanical Items:
a. Electric panels, access doors, conduits, pipes, ducts, grilles, registers, vents,
and items of similar nature: finish to match the adjacent wall and ceiling
surfaces or as directed by the Client. Refer Sections, Division 15 & 16.
b. Paint visible ductwork and support structures behind vents, registers, grilles
and above dropped ceiling a dark colour as indicated on the colour Schedule
to be issued or approved by the Client during the course of the contract.
F. Exterior Plaster: Refer Section 0901.
G. Interior Woodwork, Natural Finish:
1. Stain as directed by Client using spirit wiping stain.
2. Three coats S.G. moisture cure clear finish a polyurethane varnish.
H. Interior Woodwork, Painted Finish:
1. Remove and fill knots with approved filler or treat knots with approved compound.
2. Apply one coat of Alkyd base primer.
3. Apply one coat of Alkyd undercoat.
4. Apply one coat of Alkyd semi-gloss.
I. Exterior Woodwork, Natural Finish:
Three coats Exterior oil based timber stain, the first coat thinned as recommended by
manufacturer and applied to all faces of each member before assembly.
J. Pain Paint Finish for Callings:
Apply smooth normal plain paint coatings (Fenomastic by jotun) to rendered and plastered
ceilings in strict accordance, with - manufacturer's recommendation and specification to achieve
the desired finish.
0904 GYPSUM WALLBOARD AND CEILING SYSTEM
PART I – GENERAL:
1.0 1 DESCRIPTION:
A. Work included:
Provide all gypsum drywall and accessories, complete, in place, as shown on the drawings, specified
herein, and needed for a complete and proper Installation.
1. Metal stud and ceiling Support Systems - Section 0905
2. Ceramic tiling - Section 0902
3. Painting - Section 0903

A. Standards: Comply with standards specified in this Section as listed in Section 1.
B. Qualifications of Manufacturer: Products used in the work of this Section be produced by
manufacturers regularly engaged In manufacture of similar items and with a history of successful
production acceptable to the Client.
C. Qualifications of Installers: Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and
experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and
the methods needed for proper pet10rmance of the work of this Section.
1.0 3 SUBMITTALS:
A. General:
Comply with provisions of Section 1.
B. Manufacturer’s Data:
Within 30 calendar days after award of the Contract submit:
1. Complete materials list of all items proposed to be furnished & installed under this Section.
2. Manufacturers' specifications and other data required to demonstrate compliance with the specified
requirements.
3. The manufacturer's recommended installation procedures when approved by the Client will become
the basis for inspecting and accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used the work.
A. Protection:
Use all means necessary to protect materials of this Section before, during, and after Installation and to
protect installed work and materials of all other trades.
B. Replacements:
In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the approval Of the
Client and at no additional cost to the Client.
C. Delivery and Storage:
Deliver all materials to the Job site in their original unopened containers with all labels intact and
legible at time of use. Store In strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations as approved
by the Client. Keep off the ground and protect from moisture, protect corners and edges from damage.
0904 GYPSUM WALLBOARD AND CEILING SYSTEM

PART II-PRODUCTS:
2.01 GYPSUM WALLBOARD AND CEILING SYSTEM:

A. General:
All gypsum wallboard systems shall use wall board to conform to ASTM C1396 & SASO 887 and Fed
Spec, SS-L-30d Type VII grade x, taper-edge, 12.5mm unless shown otherwise and of the grade and form
specified below. Supply the gypsum wallboard in 1200 mm widths and in such lengths as will result in a
minimum of joints Alternate vapour barrier to external walls may be incorporated on back face of
gypsum wallboard in form of regular "Gyp-Foil", Refer Section 0702 with skim finish thereafter.
Moisture resistant wail/ceiling board shall conform to ASTC C631 and Fed, Spec SS-L- 30d, type II
grade R, X, W, taper-edged 12.5 mm thick, for Single-ply application in bathroom/Toilet/Wash and
kitchen areas.
12.5 mm thick fiber cement board ceiling in main/family entrance areas (if applicable).
2.02 METAL TRIMS:
A. Metal trim features for gypsum wallboard shall be formed from zinc-coated steel not lighter than
0.55mm nominal thickness (26 gauge and shall conform to Fed, Specification QQ-S775, Type I, Class d
or e.
B. Casing beads shall be channel-shaped with a concealed wing not less than 22mm wide, and an exposed
wing. The exposed wing may be covered with paper cemented to metal and shall be suitable for joint
treatment.
C. Corner beads shall be angle-shaped with wings not less than 22mm wide and perforated for nailing and
joint treatment, or with combination metal and paper wings, bonded together, not less than 32mm wide
and suitable for joint treatment.
D. Edge beads shall be angle-shaped with wings not less than 19mm wide. Concealed wing shall be
perforated for nailing and exposed wing edge folded flat. Exposed wing may be factory finished in a
while colour.
2.03 JOINTING SYSTEM:
A. The jointing system shall include reinforcing tape and compound designed as a system to be used
together and shall be used only as recommended by the manufacturer of the gypsum wallboard Jointing
compound may be used for finishing if so recommended by the manufacturer.
2.04 FASTENING DEVICES:
For fastening the gypsum wallboard in place, use flathead screws, shouldered, especially designed for use
with power-driven tools, not less than 25mm long, with self-tapping threads and sell-drilling points.
All other materials not specifically described herein required for a complete and operable installation of the
work of this Section, shall be new, first quality of their respective kinds, and subject to the approval of the
Client.
0904 GYPSUM WALLBOARD AND CEILING SYSTM

PART III- EXECUTION:
3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS:

A. Inspection:
Prior to installation of the work of this Section, carefully inspect the installed work of all other
trades and verify that all such work is complete to the point where this installation may properly
commence, Verify that gypsum drywall may be installed in strict accordance With all pertinent
codes and regulations, the manufacture's recommendations as approved by the Client, and the
original design.
B. Discrepancies:
Do not install gypsum drywall until all unsati5factory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 INSTALLATION:
A. General:
Install the gypsum wallboard with the separate boards in moderate contact but not forced into
place, At internal and external corners, conceal the cut edge of the board by the overlapping
covered edges of the abutting boards, Stagger the boards so that corners of any four boards will not
meet at a common point except in vertical corners.
B. Ceilings:
Install the gypsum wallboard in largest possible sheet sizes to ceilings with the long dimension of
the wallboard at right angles to the supporting members, except that wallboard may be installed
with the long dimensions parallel to supporting members that are spaced 400mm on centre when
attachment members are provided at end Joints, In installation procedure, the ceiling shall be in
place prior to the wall coverings.
C. Walls:
Install the gypsum wallboard in largest possible sheet sizes to studs at right angles to the furring or
framing members. Make end joints, where required, over furring or framing members.
D. Attaching:
Drive the specified screws with clutch-controlled power screw-drivers, spacing the screws at 250mm
or centers at ceilings and walls.
E. Access Doors:
By careful coordination with the Drawings, install the specified access doors where required,
anchoring firmly into position for long life under hard use and aligning properly to achieve an
installation flush with the finished gypsum drywall surface.
3.03 JOINT TREATMENT:
A. General:
1. Inspect all areas to be joint treated, ascertaining that the gypsum wallboard fits snugly against
supporting framework.
2. In areas where joint treatment and compound finishing will be performed, maintain
temperatures of not less than 55 Degree F. for 24 hours prior to commencing treatment, for
the entire period of treatment, and until joint and finishing compounds have dried.
3. Apply the joint treatment and finishing compound by machine or hand tool.
4. Provide a minimum drying time of 24 hours between coats, with additional drying time in
poorly ventilated areas.
B. Embedding Compound:
Apply to gypsum wallboard joints and fastener heads in a thin uniform layer, Do not cover heads of
fastenings subject to later covering of wall tiling, see Section 0902. Spread the compound not less
than 75mm wide al joints, center the reinforcing tape in the joint, and embed the tape in the
compound, then spread a thin layer of compound over the tape. After this treatment has dried,
apply a second coat of embedding compound to joints and fastener heads, spreading in a thin
uniform coat to not less than 150mm wide at joints, and feather edged when thoroughly dry,
sandpaper to eliminate ridges and high points.
C. Finishing Compound. After embedding compound is thoroughly dry and has been completely
sanded, apply a coat of finishing compound of the whole surface of the wallboard to a maximum
thickness of 3 mm.
3.04 CORNER TREATMENT:
A. Internal Corners:
Treat as specified for joints, except that the reinforcing tape shall be folded lengthwise through the
middle and fitted neatly into the corner, Feather out finishing compound as B.2 below.
B. External Corners:
1. Install a corner bead fitting neatly over the corner and secured with the same type fasteners
used for applying the wallboard, spacing the fasteners approximately 150mm on centers and
driving through the wall board into the framing or furring member.
2. After the comer-piece has been secured into position, treat the comer with joint compound
and reinforcing tape as specified for joints, feathering the joints compound out from 200 to
250mm on each side Of the corner.
3.05 OTHER METAL TRIM:
A. General:
The Drawings do not purport to show all locations and all requirements for metal trim in
connection with the work of this Section, Carefully study the Drawings and the installation; provide
in place all metal trim normally recommended by the manufacturer of the gypsum wallboard used.
B. Installation:
Install the metal trim in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s recommended methods of
installation, providing not less embedment and finishing than specified above for corner treatment.
3.06 CLEANING UP:
In addition to the requirements of Section on Cleaning of these Specifications, use all necessary care
during execution of this portion of the work to prevent scattering of gypsum wallboard scraps and dust
and to prevent tracking of joint and finishing compound onto floor surfaces. At completion of each
segment of installation in a room or space, promptly pick up and remove from the working are all
scraps, debris, and surplus material of this Section.
0905 METAL STUD AND CEILING SUPPORT SYSTEMS
PART I – GENERAL:
1.0 1 DESCRIPTION:
A. Work Included:
The work in this section covers all metal framing members for non-structural walls, wall furring
and ceiling support systems as outlined and defined on the drawings.
1. Section 0904 - Gypsum Wallboard System

2. Section 0702 - Building Insulation
A. Standards: Comply with standards specified elsewhere as listed In Section 1 Ensure all metal
framing components conform 10the requirements of ASTM Standard Grade C446, Grade A or the
requirements of any standard which updates this.
B. Qualifications of Manufacturer:
Products used in the work of this Section shall be produced by manufacturers regularly engaged in
manufacture of similar items and with a history of successful production acceptable to the Client.
C. Qualifications of Installers:
Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the
necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods
needed for proper performance of the work of this Section and following sections.
1.0 3 SUBMITTALS:
A. General:
Comply with Section 1.
B. Manufacturer’s Data:
Within 30 calendar days after award of the contract, submit.
1. Complete manufacturer's data and specifications required to demonstrate the full system and
standards so that it will comply with the specified requirements including accommodation of
utility services.
2. Manufactures' recommended installation procedures.
3. Complete list of all components, materials and fastening systems.
C. The manufacturer's recommended installation procedures when approved by the Client, will
become the basis for inspecting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the work.
A. It is a requirement of the particular system offered that it will accommodate with least possible
modification, all required electrical, sanitary and other service lines and will provide and allow the
firm fixing and anchorage of all fillings and fixtures.
B. Delivery and Storage: Deliver all components and materials to the job site in original unopened
containers with intact labels, Store In accordance with manufacturer's recommendations as
approved by the Client.
0905 METAL STUD AND CEILING SUPPORT SYSTEM

2.01 METAL STUDS AND CEILINGS:

General:
All components shall be of the highest quality galvanized, zinc coated, medium tensile steel cold rolled to
accurate dimension and profile and in long unbroken lengths; all of the one manufacturer unless otherwise
approved by the Client and to nominated standards.
All metal studs and accessories shall moot or exceed the minimum requirements of Fed, Spec. QQ-S-698 and
Fed. Spec. QQ-S-775d, Class d, for the item and use intended.
2.02 METAL STUDS SYSTEM:
Metal studs shall be 75 and 100mm minimum depth, straight, either lipped "Z" sections or lipped channel
section of not less than 0 6mm thickness and shall be in full unbroken lengths from bottom to top track
channels. Horizontal bridging shall be provided where necessary for securing fillings, fixtures and other
framing but in any case shall be at not more than 800mm centers vertically and at intersections of ceilings
etc.
2.03 CEILING SUPPORTS AND HANGERS:
A. Fixing to Cast-In-Situ Concrete Floor concrete panels - purpose made hangers and supports to be fixed
by "impact method" (e g. Hilti studs).
B. Ceiling Supports:
1. Ceiling Section - Shall be top hot section not less than 0.5mm thick, 26mm height and 80mm
wide.
2. Intermediate Channels - Shall be 0 9mm thick. 4Smm high, 15mm face.
3. Perimeter Channels - Shall be O.5 mm thick, 72mm high and 30mm face.
4. Installation - Ceiling Section (Runners) at 600mm centers, channels at 1200mm centers.
5. Hangers: Capable of supporting 40Kg/m2.
2.04 ACCESSORIES:
Provide all accessories including, but not necessarily limited to, tracks, Clips, anchors, fastening devices, and
all other accessories required for a complete and proper installation, and as recommended by the
manufacturer of the steel studs used.
2.05 Fastenings used shall be appropriate to the purpose and be corrosion resistant and fully capable of
resisting all forces imposed on them by subsequent work.
All other materials not specifically described herein but required for a complete and robust installation shall
be new, first quality of their respective kinds and subject to the approval of the Client.
0906 METAL STUD AND CEILING SUPPORT SYSTEMS

PART III-EXECUTION
3.01 CONDITIONS:
A. Prior to installation coordinate with others as necessary and determine the requirements of other
work sections to the need for location of framing and provision for additional fixings, members and
anchor points not shown but required for the completion of the finished work of other sections,
Failure to determine such requirements will not absolve the contractor to provide such provisions in
the finish work, under this Section.
B. Prior to installation of the work of this section, carefully Inspect the Installed work of all other
trades and verify that all such work is complete to the point where this installation may properly
commence. Verify that Metal Stud and Furring may be Installed in strict accordance with all
pertinent codes and regulations, the manufactures' recommendations as approved by the Client,
and the original design.
C. Discrepancies:
Do not Install Metal Stud or Furring until all unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 INSTALLATION:
A. General:
Accurately set out all member before commencing installation, making due allowance for the work
of other Sections. Ensure all members are erected true to line and plumb with all additional
members at corners and Intersection to receive linings and fittings. Ensure set out allows
subsequent linings to button centre lines of members.
B. Stud Work:
Generally set out bottom and top track channels to line and studs at 600mm centers and as
necessary. Bridging shall be set out accurately to horizontal lines at not more than 800mm centers
vertically and as required. Secure bottom tracks with masonry anchors, end and edge studs and top
tracks with screws at not more than 300mm centers Use fastenings appropriate to the location.
C. Ceiling Support System:
Generally set out ceiling sections (runners) and intermediate channels, locate and fix hangers with
anchors, fix ceiling sections and channels to hangers and level to provide horizontal fixing for
plasterboard. Fix perimeter channel to all wall junctions.
D. Coat all surfaces of metal studs in contact with concrete or masonry with suitable damp- proofing
compound.
E. Tolerances:
Align all partition and wall assemblies to a tolerance of one in 200 horizontally and one in 500
vertically.
F. Co-ordination:
1. Space the members as required for compliance with all pertinent regulations, to give proper
support for the covering materials, and as indicated on the drawings.
2. Carefully coordinate all requirements for backing and other support of items to be mounted on
the finished covering.
3. Carefully coordinate all requirements for pipe and other items designed to be housed within
the partitions and wall and ceiling systems.
0906 MARBLE TILING
PART I – GENERAL:
1.0 1 DESCRIPTION:
A. General:
This section covers the provision of installation of marble thresholds, treads and risers to stairs,
main and family entrance as shown on the drawings and specified herein.
A. Manufacturer:
The products used in the work of this section shall be produced by manufacturers regularly
engaged in the manufacture of these products and with a history of production and quality
acceptable to the Client.
The quality colour and design shall be established by samples supplied by the contractor and
approved In writing by the Client and it shall be no less quality than the material specified in Part
II- PROOUCTS of this section.
B. Installer:
necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and methods
needed for proper performance of the work in this section.
1.0 3 SUBMITTALS:
Within 30 days of contract award, submit complete samples of the complete range of colours and
pattems of marbles from the range at least one manufacturer. Not less than two different colour- ways
shall be submitted.
1.0 4 STANDARDS:
The standards required to be met in this section shall be those as defined, and set out in ASTM CS03
and for soundness, with M.I.A. requirements.
0906 MARBLE TILING

2.01 MATERIALS:
A. General:
All materials shall be new and the best grade of their respective kinds and shall be manufactured by
Cecilian / Omani / Gemco or approved equal.
B. 30mm thick marble for treads and landing 20mm thick for risers to stair with three cut grooves
behind the 6mm radius rounded edge for each step with 20mm thick x 100mm high skirting. Shall
be marble from grade (A) material of approval color and design.
C. 30mm thick marble threshold at exterior door and toilet doors.
D. 400 x 400 x 20mm thick marble for main, family and service entrance area, shall be made from
grade (A) material of approval color and design.
E. Bedding screed shall be 1:3 cement, sand mixed with latex.
F. Cement based adhesive use "Laticrete" 4237 or similar approved.
G. Grout shall be pre-mixed as Baifloor / Balwall or equivalent.
0906 MARBLE TILING

OART III- EXECUTION:
3.01 INSPECTION:
Examine the areas to be done under work of this section and ensure that all preceding and preparatory
work of other sections are complete and satisfactory. Correct conditions detrimental to proper and
timely completion of the work. Do not proceed until satisfactory conditions have been achieved.
3.02 INSTALLATION:
A. Thresholds:
Thresholds fixing shall generally be by the adhesive method. Spread adhesive on surface to be tiled
with notched trowel of type recommended by the manufacturer for the surface. Cover surface
uniformly without bare spots Apply adhesive 1only in areas which can be covered the adhesive
"films" over. Remove any adhesive that films over and refloat with fresh adhesive.
B. Treads and rises to stair shall bedded in white cement and sand mix and laid to the correct level
and alignment so as to adhesive equal sizes and threads through the stairway.
C. Marble tiles to main entrance shall bedded in cement and sand mix and laid to the correct level.
DIVISION 10:
SPECIALTIES:
1001 Sanitary Fixtures.
1002 Bathroom Accessories.
1001 SANITARY FIXTURES

PART I- GENERAL:
1.0 1 DESCRIPTION:
A. Work included:
This section covers the supply and installation of all sanitary fixtures including all carriers, supports,
anchors and accessories, in the location and quantities shown on the drawings and as required.
1. Section 1501 - Plumbing Systems.
2. Section 1002 - Bathroom Accessories.
A. ANSI- American National Standards Institute.
A112.19.2 Vitreous China Sanitary Fixtures.
B. 8SI- British Standards Institution.
3402 Quality of Vitreous China Sanitary Appliances.
1.0 3 SUBMITTALS:
A. Submit copies of manufacturer's catalogues containing technical specifications for fixtures proposed
to the Owner/ Consultant for approval.
B. Shop drawings showing the location of fixtures, the method of installation and fittings / accessories.

PART II –PRODUCTS:
2.01 GENERAL:
A. All fixtures shall be SAUDI CERAMIC, RAK or equal approved and furnished by a manufacturer
or supplier regularly engaged in the manufacture or supply Of sanitary fixtures.
B. All fixtures shall be of make and model selected from a high quality available range. See specific
drawings for details of fixtures, equipment and fillings required to be used in conjunction.
1. Western Water Closet:
a. W.C. bowl.
Cistern tank.
Flush system.
b. Seat cover.
c. Complete fixing accessories.
2. Bath Tub:
a. Acrylic bath tub from local manufacturer with bath panel and sliding DUSCHOLUX
enclosure.
b. Set of pop-up waste, overflow & p-trap.
c. Telephone shower, GROHE original.
3. Shower Tray:
a. Acrylic shower fray from local manufacturer.
b. Waste strainer.
c. Telephone shower. GROHE original.
4. Perennial Spray:
a. GROHE original, c/w vacuum breaker, CPL angle stop valve, hose, hand spray &
hook.
5. Pedestal Lavatory:
a. Pedestal wash basin, white vitreous china lavatory with pedestal & centre hole for
faucet.
b. 1 ¼ trap for lavatory.
c. Single lever mixer, GROHE original.
6. Vanity Basin:
a. MAROMIX or similar approved artificial granite counter top with half rounded edges
and 100mm high splash-back, complete with built-in wash basin.
b. 1 ¼ trap for lavatory.
7. Kitchen double bowl stainless steel Sink (Single bowl for dirty kitchen):
a. 20 mm thick artificial granite resin work counter lop with half rounded edges and
100mm high splash-back, complete with built-in double bowl stainless steel Sink.
b. Double p-trap assembly (PVC).
c. Sink disposer, KENMORE (USA).
d. Basket strainer.
e. Single lever mixer, GROHE original.
8. Laundry / Utility Sink (if applicable):
a. Artificial granite counter top with stainless steel sink.
b. With 3 holes faucet drilling.

3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS:

A. All fixtures and equipment shall be mounted level, sure, rigid and flush With wall or floor as
appropnate.
B. Co-ordinate with other relevant sections as required to ensure proper and adequate provision in
framing and wall finish for installation of the selected toilet and bathroom fixtures and accessories
in the required location.
C. Inspect location of all fixtures and accessories and verify that all necessary provisions have been
made, Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancies or where work of other sections is
deficient until they have been resolved.
D. Fastening for all accessories shall be made of the concealed type where available.
3.02 Furnish and set all hangers, support, brackets etc for proper Installation of all fixtures and
equipment. Supports shall be in accordance with recommendations of fixture manufacturer, and if built
into partitions walls, shall be installed as wall construction progresses. Contractor shall be responsible
for stability of all fixtures and furnishing all drain carriers on other laterals, necessary to accomplish this.
Exact mounting height shall be as shown on the drawings.
3.03 Water supplies to all fixtures shall be valved at fixture.
3.04 All fixtures shall be left thoroughly clean, defect-free and free from all marks, foreign substances
and sticking papers etc.
3.05 Provide one isolation stop valve for each toilet/ bathroom space.
3.06 Caulk around all fixtures and adjacent surfaces with a white silicone, fungicidal type.
1102 BATHROOM ACCESSORIES
PART I – GENERAL:
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
A. General:
This section covers the provision and installation of all bathroom accessories, as shown on the
drawings specified herein.
1. Section 1001 - Sanitary Fixtures.
2. Section 0803 – Glazing.
3. Section 0902 - Tile Work.
A. Qualification of Manufacturer:
Products used in the work of this section shall be produced by manufacturer's regularly engaged in
the manufacture of similar products and with a history of successful production acceptable and
approved by the Owner/Consultant.
B. Qualification of Installer:
necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and methods
needed for proper performance of the work of this section.
1.03 SUBMITIALS:
A. Product Data:
The following material/document should be submitted for review and approval of the
Owner/Consultant prior to start procurement process.
1. Manufacturer's recommended installation procedures.
2. Manufacturer's specifications.
B. Samples:
1. Accompanying the above submittals, submit samples of each toilet/bathroom accessory
proposed to be furnished and installed under this section.
2. Samples will be returned to the Contractor at the site of the work and may be incorporated
into the finished work, provided they are identified and their locations noted.

2.01 PRODUCTS HANDLING

A. Protection:
Use all means necessary to protect the materials before, during and after installation and to protect
the work and materials of all other trades.
B. Replacements:
In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and/or replacements necessary, to the
satisfaction of the Owner/Consultant and at no additional cost to the Owner.
2.02 MATERIALS:
A. General:
1. Anchors and Fasteners:
Provide anchors and fasteners capable of developing a retaining force commensurate with the
strength of the accessory to be mounted, and well suited for use with the supporting
construction. Where exposed fasteners are permitted, provide oval head fasteners with finish
matching the accessory.
2. Design:
Materials are based on use of products from GROHE or GERMANY as shown on the
drawings.
B. Bathroom Mirrors:
600 x 900 x 6 mm thick or approved equal bathroom mirror (bevelled edge) with light and glass
shelf as shown on drawing.
C. Bathroom & Toilet Accessory Items:
Bathroom & toilet accessories shall be from GROHE or GERMANY made only and shall be
designed to fit 200 x 200 mm tiles. The location of accessory is as shown in the detailed drawings
and as follows:
1. Toilet roll (tissue paper) holder with chrome cover GROHE or GERMANY.
2. Soap dish holder – chrome GROHE or GERMANY.
3. Towel rail I Towel ring – chrome GROHE or GERMANY.
4. Shampoo and soap shower basket – chrome GROHE or GERMANY.
5. Towel rack-chrome GROHE or GERMANY.
6. Perennial spray GROHE original.
7. Telephone shower for bath tub and shower tray GROHE original.
8. Bath tub & shower enclosure DUSCHOLUX.

PART 111-EXECUTION:
3.01 INSPECTION:
Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this section will be installed. Correct conditions
detrimental to proper and timely completion of the work Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions
have been corrected.
3.02 CO-QRDINATION:
Throughout construction of substrate surfaces, use all means necessary to ensure proper and adequate
provision for concealed support devices and for finished openings to receive the work of this section.
3.03 INSTALLATION:
Install in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations as approved by the
Owner/Consultant, anchonng all components firmly into position for long Iile under hard
use.
DIVISION 11:
APPLIANCES:
1101 Schedule of Kitchen and Other Appliances.
1101 SCHEDULE OF KITCHEN AND OTHER APPLIANCES

PART I – GENERAL:
1.0 1 DESCRIPTION:
General:
This section covers the supply and installation of kitchen and other appliances, namely electric water
heaters, washer, dryer, refrigerator/freezer, food disposer, cooking range, extract hood.
1101 SCHEDULE OF KITCHEN AND OTHER APPLIANCES

PART II- PRODUCTS:
2.01 GENERAL:
A. All appliances to be new, of the latest model and delivered to the site in the manufacturer's packing
labeled clearly to indicate date of manufacture.
B. Colours of trim to be selected from the manufacturer's standard range of colours and trim.
C. All colours and trim for the appliances to be matching in each dwelling.
2.02 PRODUCTSHANDLING:
A. Protection: Use all means necessary to protect the materials before, dunng and after installation
and to protect the work and materials of all other trades.
B. Replacement: In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and/or replacement
necessary, to the satisfaction and at no additional cost to the Owner/Consultant.
2.03 DESCRIPTIONOFAPPLIANCES:
1. Electric water heater for Drivers Room, 50 liters capacity by Ariston or approval equal, (as per
drawing details).
2. Centralized electric water heater, 300 liters capacity by A.O. Smith or approval equal, (as per
drawing details).
3. Kenmore 30" slide in type, self-cleaning, coil elements electric range.
4. KDK range hood - 72 watts, 700mm wide, 150cfm, 230V/1P/60Hz.
5. Kenmore disposer - heavy duty ¾ HP.
6. Kenmore 25 cu. fl. Refrigerator.
7. Kenmore washer - 16.0 kg capacity.
8. Kenmoredryer-160kg capacity.
DIVISION 15:
MECHANICAL:
1501 Plumbing system.
1502 Description of HVAC system.
1503 Fire protection system.
0501 PLUMBING SYSTEM

PART I – GENERAL:
1.0 1 DESCRIPTION:
A. Work included:
This section covers the furnishing and Installation of all plumbing systems in the location and
quantities shown on the drawings.
1. Section 1001 – Sanitary Fixtures and Accessories.
2. Section 0204 - Underground Piping & Utilities pits.
1.0 2 QUALITY STANDARDS:
A. Comply with all requirements of the National Plumbing Code (NPC), Saudi Arabian Codes and
Standards, and International Plumbing Code (IPC)..
B. ASTM D2665-78 Specification for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Drain, Waste, Vent Pipe and
Fittings.
C. ASTM B88, Types K and L (ASTM 888M, Type A and B), water tube annealed temper or type M
hard temper.
ASME A40.8-55 National Plumbing Code. Minimum Requirement for Plumbing.
D. ASTM - American Society for Testing & Materials.
D1785 - PVC Plastic Pipes sch 40,80,120.
D1784 - Compounds for PVC and CPVC.
D2466 - PVC Plastic Pipe Fittings (Schedule 40).
D2464, D2467 - PVC Sch. 40, 80, 120 - PVC sch, 40 Socket Type, PVC Sch.80.
ASME B16 18, Cast copper alloy fittings.
ASME B16 22 wrought copper, solder joint fittings.
ANSI/ASME B16.26, Cast copper alloy fittings for flanged copper tubes.
ANSI/ASME B16.29, Wrought copper and wrought copper alloy solder joint drainage fittings.
E. American Water Works Association (AWVVA).
B300 Series Standards – Disinfection.
F. Saudi Arabian Standards:
SAS 11- Electric Water Heaters.
SASO 14' Unplasticized poly vinyl chloride (u PVC) for potable water.
SASO 15: Methods of testing of Unplasticized poly vinyl chloride (u PVC) pipes for potable water.
G. The plumbing system shall be tested in accordance With the material standard plumbing code
procedure.
1.0 3 HEALTH AND SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS:
All works undertaken in relation to this specifications are to be completed in full accordance with the
respective health and safety requirements established by the following:
King don of Saudi Arabia's legislation, Regulation, Standards and Codes.
1.0 4 SUBMITTALS:
A. Submit product data, manufacturer's certificate and certificate of compliance to Specification,
QA/QC certificates reference codes and standards on each item of equipment for all materials
specified, for the Owner/Consultant review and approval prior to procurement.
B. Submit descriptive literature for fixtures and equipment specified herein.
C. Submit written procedure for solvent welding of plastic piping joints.
D. Submit written procedure for copper piping brazing methods.
E. Operation and Maintenance Manuals for appliances and fixtures.
F. Sample of the different sizes of pipes, fittings, hangers to cover all the waste and venting system.
G. Submit shop drawings showing all Internal and external water supply system in isometric with all
associated fittings and specialties and enlarge layouts and sections of wet areas.
H. Prior of testing the plumbing and water system the Contractor should submit for review and
approval of Owner/Consultant the manual of testing procedure for the different request tests under
this Section.
1501 PLUMBING SYSTEM

2.01 COLD WATER SUPPLY PIPING MATERIAL:

A. Pipe (below and above groul1d):
Cold water supply piping shall be PPR Type 3 pipe as per SASO-14, Din 8062 and ISO 161/1 -
class 5.
B. Fittings:
Fittings to match pipe used and where possible from the same manufacturer or schedule 80 or class-
5 confirming to ASTM D2464, D2467.
C. Joint solvent:
Use fast-drying solvent for 32 mm sizes and smaller Solvent to be furnished by manufacturer of
pipe used.
D. Flanges where it is required shall be cast bronze with flat ground face and bolt holes spot faced.
Flanges shall be rated for 1MPa water working pressure.
E. Gaskets shall be of a material suitable for the fluid, temperature and pressure for
which they will be used.
2.02 HOT WATER PIPING MATERIALS:
A. Hot water supply - pipe shall be PPR Type 3 Schedule 80 as per ASTM 02846. All domestic hot
water supply and return shall be PPR Type 3 pipes, with rubber or approved insulation.
B. Fittings:
Fittings to match pipe used and where possible from the same manufacturer or Schedule 80 or class
5 confirming to ASTM F437 and F439.
C. Joint Solvent:
For use in Joints of PPR Type 3 pipes to be furnished by manufacturer of pipe used.
2.03 ACCESSORIES:
A. Flexible pipe connectors shall be chrome plated. Connectors shall be minimum of 300 mm in
length with threaded male or flanged ends as required for proper installation.
B. Water hammer arrestors shall be provided in the location shown on drawings and be according to
the Plumbing and Drainage Institute of the United States.
C. Vacuum breaker shall be of type for indoor exposed type in accordance to Plumbing and Drainage
Institute of the United States.
2.04 VALVES AND SPECIALTIES:
A. Hose bibs with built-in vacuum breaker shall be rough brass short pattern, indexed tee handle
(Saudi ceramics, Grohe or other equal and approved), 12 mm male inlet, 12 mm hose threaded
outlet, Single for concealed piping.
B. Vacuum breaker for internal fittings shall have chrome plated brass body, as Saudi Ceramics,
Grohe or other equal or approved.
C. Furnish and install all valves with the required strainers in domestic water system wherever
required for the control and servicing of the system of piping.
a. All mains, branch mains, sub branch mains which supply four or more fixtures and all
risers shall be valved in such a manner that it will permit their isolation from the system
of piping they are part of.
b. Each item of equipment shall be individually valved.
D. All check valves in horizontal piping shall be swing type check valves. All check valves in vertical
piping shall be Silent "non-slam" type.
E. Pressure reducing valve shall have bronze body construction, stainless steel integral strainer
renewable stainless steel seat, with pressure gauge, suitable for pressures up to 300 Ibs, set for 50
Ibs.
F. Water-Hammer Arresters:
1. Water-hammer arresters shall be commercially manufactured products consisting of bellows
arranged to absorb the energy of pressure waves generated by valve closure in a line in which
the water is flowing. Arresters shall be nonferrous construction, shall be rated as to capacity,
and shall be certified in accordance with POI WH 201.
2. Install in water supply lines to plumbing fixtures as required by POI WH 201.
3. Install in upright position, in locations and of size in accordance with standard POI WH-201,
and elsewhere as required.
G. Automatic Air Vent:
1. Automatic air vents on pumps, mains, and where indicated on the drawings shall be of ball
float construction. Vent inlet shall be not less than 19 mm and the outlet shall be not less than
6 5 mm orifice shall be 3.2 mm. Trim shall be corrosion-resistant steel confirming to FS QQ-S-
S763 or FS QQ-S- 766. Vent shall be fitted with try-cock Vent shall discharge air at any
pressure to 1034 kpa (150 psi). Outlet shall be copper tube routed as indicated and approved.
2. Automatic air vents shall have a cast iron body and cap, asbestos gasket, heat treated chrome
steel valve and valve seat for purpose of hardness and wear resistant seats, stainless steel float.
2.05 WATER HEATERS:
A. Water heaters Will be comprised of two different capacities as shown on the drawings.
Note: Capacity of water heater as specified in the drawing.
a. Central water heater (vertical, floor standing) for centralised water heating located in
the roof deck floor.
b. Water heater (vertical, wall mounted) for driver's room.
B. Electrical loading for water heaters shall be as shown and indicated on the drawing. Brand is to be
A. 0. Smith, Ariston or Kenmore for 300 liter and 50 Liter capacity water waters and approved by
the Owner/Consultant.
C. Water heaters shall be provided With two stage heating elements one at top and one at the bottom
of vessel container.
D. The water heater interior surface will be glass lined and the sides and top of the tank outside shall
be covered with thick lining of Insulator to retard heat loss. Each unit will be furnished with
magnesium anode rods rigidly supported, and will be furnished with combination temperature and
pressure relief valve.
E. Voltage and combined wattage of the heating elements shall be as required to satisfy the loading.
Wiring shall be so arranged that, when required by thermostats, both heating elements will operate
simultaneously.
F. Heaters shall be furnished with adjustable mounting supports.
G. Water heaters shall be provided with circulating pump including thermostat automatic 110-170° F
{44°C-77°C) temperature range and required thermo-sensors, pressure vessel for expansion and
back flow preventer.
Pump shall be bronze fitted. Install line size butterfly, ball, or gate valve and strainer on pump
suction, Install line size spring loaded check valve and butterfly, ball, or gate valve on discharge.
H. Backflow preventers :
Bronze body, stainless steel and brass trim.
Relief ports and test cocks.
Tight seating check valve assemblies.
If the valves are flanged, flange bolts and rubber gaskets shall be provided for attachment of valves
to each end of backflow preventer.
Means to service backflow preventer while installed in pipe, shall be provided.
Suitable melting flanges, unions, or nipples shall be provided as necessary for installation of back
flow preventer.
The dimensions, connection Sizes, capacity, and pressure drop at design capacity.
2.06 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS:
Type hangers 10 mm diameter galvanized steel hanger rods space on 1,5 meter on centers for pipe
13mm diameter or less, 1.8 meter on centre for pipes up to 25 mm diameter. Inserts shall be provided in
the concrete floor slabs for supporting the piping.
2.07 SLEEVES:
a. Pipe sleeves shall be installed and properly secured in place at all points where pipe
pass, through masonry or concrete panels, except unframed floors on earth.
b. Pipe sleeves (except sleeves through footing) shall be of sufficient diameter to provide
approximately 6 mm clearance around the pipe or insulation.
c. Pipe sleeves in floors/walls shall be PVC pipe, Sch. 40. Sleeves In floor shall extend
not less than 25 mm and not more than 50 mm above and the space around the pipe
shall be packed with plastic material and made watertight.
d. Pipe sleeves in footings shall be PVC and shall be not less than 100 mm larger In
diameter than the pipe to be installed.
e. Flashing sleeves shall be installed where pipes pass through water proofing
membrane, floor slabs and walls. The sleeves shall be provided with an internal
flashing flange or clamping device to which a flashing shield be of sixteen ounce, soft
sheet copper, shall extend not less than 200 mm from the sleeves and flashing flanges
and shield be thoroughly mopped to the membrane.
f. The space between the pipe and sleeves shall be made weather tight by inserting a
picked oakum gasket and filling the remaining space with weather proof sealant.
2.08 SANITARY SOIL, WASTE AND VENT PIPE AND FITTINGS:
a. All soil, waste and vent pipe lines shall be polyvinyl chloride (PVC) Sch. 40 and size
of pipes and fittings shall be according to International Plumbing Code.
b. All joints shall be air and water tight. For joining PVC pipes, use PVC cement.
c. Floor Drains:
I. Floor drains shall comply with ANSI A112 21.1.
II. The contractor shall provide all gaskets and accessories required to install floor
drains In PVC drain pipe.
III. Open hub drains for Indirect or equipment waste shall be as indicated on the
Contract Drawings.
IV. Floor drains serving water heater areas shall be of deep seal type or shall be
discharged to the indirect waste funnel (IWF).
V. Floor drains shall be supplied With.
Body material: Gray iron.
Seepage Flange: Required.
Clamping Device: Required.
Outlet: Bottom.
Top or strainer material. Nickel bronze.
Top of body and strainer finish: Satin Nikaloy.
Top shape, Round.
Top loading Classification: Light duty
Inlet fitting: Gray iron, with threaded inlet and threaded or spigot outlet.
Trap Material: Cast iron.
Trap pattern: Deep-seal P-trap.
Trap features: Trap seal primer valve drain connection.
Bottom inside caulk connection suitable for PVC pipe connection.
Flashing clamp and waterproofing membrane.
Leveling adjustment.
Floor drain / cover Top
I. 150 mm diameter, polished bronze, for rest rooms, toilets,
laboratory rooms and first aid areas.
II. 220 mm diameter, cast iron equipment rooms.
VI. Floor cleanouts:
Floor cleanouts shall be supplied with:
I. Cast iron body with adjustable housing.
I. Inside caulk connection suitable for PVC or other drain pipe
connection.
II. Closure: Brass plug with straight threads and gaskets.
III. Adjustable housing material: Cast Iron with threads.
IV. Frame and cover material and finish: Nickel- bronze, copper or
stainless steel to suite room finish.
V. Frame and cover shape Round.
VI. Ferrule with plug.
VII. Round polished brass top, secured.
d. Floor drain to be cast brass or aluminum-bronze body with integral trap and
adjustable nickel-alloy polished strainer, side outlet, diameter of strainer 100 mm,
chrome finish.
e. Cleanout to be floor cleanout spigot or hub connection with internal gasket and cast
nickel. Allow polished covers where inside and cast brass where located outside.
f. Drain pipe slope shall not be less than 2%.
g. Fittings to match pipe and where possible to be from same manufacturer.
2.09 ROOF DRAIN (RAINWATER) SYSTEM:
Roof dome type cast iron drain and painted cast iron body with splash pad system, as per detail shown
in architectural drawing.
1501 PLUMBNG SYSTEM

3.01 GENERAL PIPING AND INSTALLATION:

A. Piping:
1. Conceal all pipe installations in pipe chases, utility spaces, below grade of floors, etc unless
otherwise indicated.
2. Install all piping free of sags or bends and with ample space between piping for proper
maintenance.
3. Install piping at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal or bent piping will not be
permitted.
4. Protect all piping from entrance of dirt or other foreign materials during the construction period.
At the completion of the project, all dirt and foreign matter in piping shall be removed completely.
5. Piping passing through exterior building walls shall be caulked.
6. Provide drain lines from all relief valves and condensate pans and run drain line full size to the
nearest floor or equipment drain.
7. Water piping shall be securely anchored to insure proper direction of expansion and contraction.
8. Verify existing grades, inverts and topographic conditions prior to any trenching, excavation, or
installations. In the event existing conditions prevent installation in accordance with contract
documents, immediately notify the Owner/Consultant.
9. Horizontal piping shall slope uniformly without sags or humps to provide for complete drainage of
systems and elimination of air.
10. Piping shall be cut accurately to measurements established at the site, worked into place without
springing or forcing, and shall clear all Windows, doors and other openings. Cutting or other
weakening of building structure to facilitate piping installation is not permitted, install to permit
free expansion and contraction without damage.
11. Provide necessary temporary connections, valves, oversize flushing connections, etc as required to
properly clean and test systems.
12. Co-ordinate piping installations with structure, lighting, electrical conduit and all other materials
and equipment.
13. provide flanges on all valves, apparatus and equipment having 75 mm and larger connections.
B. Joints:
1. Any leaking joint shall be completely disassembled and replaced with new materials.
2. All sockets and pipe ends of PVC shall be cleaned and solvent cement applied for full
circumferential cover.
3. Copper Joints shall be made using 95-5 Tin-Antimony solders ASTM B32.
C. Accessibility:
Locate all equipments that must be serviced, operated, or maintained, in fully accessible positions.
Deviations from the drawings may be discussed with the Owner/Consultant and proceed after
approval.
D. Mechanical Cutting and Patching:
1. Contractor shall be responsible for all the cutting, fitting, or patching of his work which may
be required to make its several parts come together properly and fit It to receive, or be received,
by work of other trades. Cutting of structural members shall not be done without approval of
Owner/Consultant.
2. Place sleeves through all walls, floors and ceilings during the initial construction where it is
necessary for piping to go through. When this is not done, do all cutting and patching required
for the installation of the work. Any damage caused to the building by this cutting and
patching, shall be corrected at no additional cost.
3. Patching of all openings for new Installations and all openings resulting from the removal or
relocation of any installations shall be done by craftsmen skilled in the particular trade affected,
with same materials as of adjoining openings.
3.02 SOIL WASTE AND VENT PIPING SYSTEM:

1. Horizontal lines shall be supported by well secured heavy-strap hangers. Vertical lines shall be
secured strongly by hooks to the building frame and a suitable bracket or chair shall be provided at
places where they start.
2. All main vertical soil and waste stacks shall be extended full size to and above the roof line to act
as vents, except where otherwise specifically indicated.
3. Vent pipes in roof spaces shall run as close as possible to underside of roof, with horizontal piping
pitched down to stacks without forming traps. Vertical pipes may be connected into one main vent
riser above the highest vented fixtures.
Where an end of circuit vent pipe for any fixtures or line of fixture is connected to vent line serving
other fixtures, the connections shall be at least 1200 mm above the floor on which the fixtures are
located to prevent the use of any vent line as waste.
Horizontal waste lines receiving the discharge from two or more fixtures shall be provided with
vents before the last fixture unless separate venting of fixtures is noted.
4. Rough-in for pipes and fixtures shall be carried along with the building construction. Correctly
located openings of proper sizes shall be provided where required in the walls and floors for the
passage of pipes.
5. All changes in pipe sizes on soil, waste and drain lines shall be made with reducing fillings or
reducers.
All changes in direction shall be made by the appropriate use of forty five degrees wyes, or long
sweep bends, except that sanitary tees may be used on vertical stacks and short quarter bends or
elbows may be used in soil and waste lines where the change In direction of floor is from the
horizontal to the vertical and on the discharge line from the water closet.
6. All vent pipes passing through the roof shall be flashed as indicated on the drawing.
7. Sail and waste below grade shall be 2% minimum towards flow for 4" diameter and below and 1%
for pipes above 4" diameter unless otherwise specified. Install immediately after excavation, Lay
pipe so that entire length bears on firm soil. Excavate for hub. Do not backfill until installation has
been observed and approved by the Owner/Consultant. Verify elevations of the sewer line at
different point before installation.
Soil and waste above grade shall be as below grade piping. Hang each entirely to its slope. Support
vertical stacks at each floor, both horizontally and vertically.
Vents slope up to high paint, connect multiple vents to single vent before penetrating roof. Hang
each length of vent pipe from structure to grade.
8. All vertical piping shall be supported at each floor level with clamps and spring hangers The
maximum spacing for horizontal pipes of 100 mm diameter or larger shall not exceed 2.0 meters.
For pipes less than 100 mm diameter the spacing of hangers shall be maximum of 1.50 meters on
centers.
9. Sleeves shall be provided for pipes passing through walls, partitions or floors and fitted into place at
time of construction Each sleeve shall extend through its respective wall, floor, and shall be cut
flush with each surface except where clamping flanges are used.
10. AII stacks shall be provided with accessible cleanouts positioned above the flood level of the
highest fixture.
3.03 POTABLE WATER PIPING SYSTEM:
A. Installation:
1. All supplies, hardware, trim, traps, etc to fixtures and equipment shall be chrome plated if
exposed to view.
2. No underground or underslab waterpiping within building shall be permitted unless
specifically approved by the Owner/Consultant.
3. Water pipes shall not be run or laid in the same trench with building sewer or drainage piping.
The bottom of water pipe at ail points shall be at least 300 mm above the top of sewer line
when crossing occur.
4. Devices installed in the potable water supply system for protection against backflow or back
siphonage shall be maintained in accessible position and installed In the direction as specified
by the manufacturer.
5. Domestic water systems shall be flushed free of all foreign material prior to usage. Sterilization
shall be performed in accordance with the AVWVA recommendation.
B. Testing and Balancing Procedure:
1. The Contractor shall completely test all water system as part of work. The term "water system"
shall be understood and intended to mean all cold and hot water connections and associated
equipment connected to the system including the building irrigation system.
2. The testing work shall be supervised by certified personnel experienced in testing procedure.
3. All water system piping shall be tested for maximum working pressure equivalent to 344 5 Kpa
(50 PSI) air pressure or 150% of the area working pressure, valves shall be tested for maximum
working pressure equivalent to 230 Kpa air pressure as specified by International Plumbing
Code and Regulation of Saudi Building ~ code.
3.04 TESTING PLUMBING AND WATER SYSTEM:
A. Test, Flushing and Sterilisation:
1. The plumbing system shall be tested In accordance with the National Standard Plumbing
Code Procedures.
a. Sewage systems - 3 meter head from the last highest fixture/fitting for 24
hours duration.
b. Hot and cold water supply -10 bars pressure for 24 hours duration.
B. Defective Work:
If inspection or test shows defects, such defective work or material shall be replaced or repaired as
necessary and inspection and test shall be repeated. Repairs to piping shall be made with new
materials. No caulking of screwed joints or holes will be accepted.
C. Operational Test:
Upon completion of and prior to acceptance of the installation, the Contractor shall subject the
plumbing system to operating tests to demonstrate satisfactory functional and operational efficiency.
Such operating test shall cover a period of not less than 24 hours for each system and shall include
the following Information in a report with conclusion as to the adequacy of the system.
a. Time, date and duration of test.
b. Water pressures at the most remote and the highest fixtures.
c. Operation of each fixture and fixture trim.
d. Operational of each valve and faucet.
e. Temperature of each domestic hot-water supply.
f. Operation of each floor drain by flooding with water.
g. Operation of each vacuum breaker and backflow preventer.
D. Slerilization of Hoi & Cold Water System:
After pressure test have been made, the entire domestic hot and cold water distribution system to
be sterilized shall be thoroughly flushed with water of sufficient velocity until all entrained dirt and
other foreign material have been removed, before Introducing chlorinating material. The
chlorinating material shall be either liquid chlorine conforming to AWWA 8301 or hypochlorite
conforming to AVWVA 8300, Water chlorination procedure shall be in accordance with AVWVA
M20.
E. Hot & Cold Water System Flushing:
After tests are completed, potable water piping shall be flushed In general, sufficient water shall be
used to produce a minimum water velocity of 0.76 mps through piping being flushed. Flushing
shall be continued until discharge water shows no discoloration. System shall be drained at low
points. Strainer screens shall be removed, cleaned and replaced in line, After flushing and cleaning,
systems shall be prepared for service by immediately filling water piping with clean, fresh potable
water Any stoppage, discoloration, or other damage to finish, furnishings, or parts of the building,
due to the Contractor’s failure to properly clean the piping system, shall be repaired by the
Contractor. When the work is complete, the hot-water system shall be adjusted for uniform
circulation. Flush valves and automatic control devices shall be adjusted for proper operation.
3.05 WARRANTY:
The Contractor must provide a 3 year warranty for plumbing work from the date of final acceptance.

1502 DESCRIPTION OF HVAC SYSTEM
PART I – GENERAL:
1.0 1 DESCRIPTION:
This section covers the furnishing, testing, shipment, installation, and placing in satisfactory service of
the air conditioning equipment as specified herein and as shown on the Drawings.
Specification and standard referenced in this specification (including addenda, amendments and errata
listed) shall form part of this specification to the extent indicated by reference thereto In case of
difference between reference specifications or standards and this specification, this specification shall
govern.
AHRI Air-conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute.
ASHRAE American Society of Heating. Refrigerating and Air conditioning Engineers.
SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air-conditioning Contractors National Association Inc.
ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
UL Underwriters laboratories Inc.
ASTM American Society of Testing and Materials
ANSI American National Standard Institute.
NEC National Electric Code.
NFC National Fire Code.
NFPA National Fire Protection Association.
All regulations and standards shall be of the latest issue unless governing authorities require on earlier
issue.
Units will be rated In accordance with the latest edition of ANSI /AHRI Standard 210/240: 2008.
Units will be certified for capacity, efficiency, and listed in the latest ARI directory.
Unit construction will comply with latest edition of ANSI/ASHRAE and with NEC.
Units will be constructed in accordance with UL standards and will carry the UL label of approval.
Units will have a c-UL approval.
Unit cabinets will be capable of withstanding Federal Test Method Standard No. 141 (Method 6061)
500-hr salt spray test.
Air-cooled condenser coils will be leak tested at 150 psig and pressure tested at 300 psig.
1.0 3 SUBMITIALS:
A. Shop Drawings and Samples:
1. Contractor shall submit shop drawing, engineering data and samples of materials for approval
by the Owner/Consultant.
2. Shop drawings shall include schedule of all materials, detail drawings of the Installation,
assembly construction, methods of attachment, size of components and positions as well as
relations with other trades e.g. electrical, plumbing etc.
3. Contractor shall install according to approved shop drawing and shall be only approved
equipment and materials.
4. All materials and equipment shall be brand new.
B. As-built Drawings, Operation and Maintenance Manual, Instructions:
1. The Contractor shall record all changes arising during the execution of the work so that as-
built drawings can be prepared accordingly. These drawings shall detail all relevant data
concerning makes, types, number, code numbers, capcities, quantities.
2. After the approval by Owner/Consultant, the Contractor shall submit two (2) sets of prints
and one (1) set of soft copies of drawings in a compact disc.
3. Contractor shall supply three (3) copies of complete maintenance and operation instructions
manual of each piece of equipment, for the approval of the Owner/Consultant. These
instruction shall not consist of manufacturer's advertising literature or catalogues, but shall be
genuine and clearly written instructions that will guide In the proper operations of the
equipment.
4. The Contractor shall supply the as-built drawings and the operating and maintenance
instructions as soon as possible, but not later than (8) weeks after practical completion of the
works.
5. Included with the Instructions manual shall be a maintenance schedule for the pnncipal Items
of equipment furnished under this contract and complete diagrams of all installations.
1.0 4 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:
A. All materials required for the Installation of the villa including window air conditioning units, DX
Mini split units and ventilation system shall be delivered in time to avoid any delay In progress of
the work.
B. Materials shall be delivered to the site in their original wrappings or boxes with unbroken seals
bearing the name of the manufacturer and the brand.
C. The Contractor shall consult the Owner/Consultant and shall arrange with him for the allocation
of sheds and storage areas on site for the Contractor's materials and equipment. The Contractor
shall not store materials in areas other than those set aside for the purpose.
D. All materials shall be stored so as to protect them from damage or deterioration before fixing.
Materials stored in the open shall be suitably covered to protect against rain, excessive heat or
sunshine.
The installation of conduits and cables, distribution panels and temporary lightings on site needed
by the Contractor is on his account and shall be made only in concern with the building contractor.
E. Damaged or defective materials shall be replaced at no cost to the Owner.
F. Handle materials and equipment carefully to prevent damage.
1.0 5 REQUIREMENTS:
A. Materials and equipment furnished under this specifications shall be of standard products of
manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such materials or equipment and shall be the
manufacturer's latest standard design that complies to the requirements of this specifications.
B. Materials or products specified by name of manufacturers, brand or trade name or catalog reference
shall be the basis of final agreed price, and furnished under the contract. Where two or more
materials or products are named, the choice of these shall be optional with the Contractor Should
the Contractor wish to use materials or products other than those specified, he shall so state prior
to commitment of contract, naming the proposed substitutions and indicating what difference if
any, will be made in the based price, including changes it cost of all work affected thereby.
C. Contractor shall procure all equipment and materials specified In the drawings or In this
specifications and shall install the window air conditioning units and mini split units until
completion and according to conditions, graphic or verbal descriptions that appear In the drawings
or in this specifications. All electrical equipment must be designed specifically for 60 Hertz electrical
supply.

2.01 GENERAL:
All equipment brand shall be the product of LG or approval equal and delivered to the work site In
perfect condition.
2.02 CONTRACTOR FURNISHED MATERIALS:
Mini DX Split Air Conditioning Units:
A. General:
The unit shall be complete, consisting of evaporator units(indoor unit) and remote air cooled
condensing unit (outdoor unit).
Indoor unit shall be either horizontal or vertical draw-through construction and shall either be
free air blow or ducted type as required.
The separate assemblies shall be designed to be used together and ratings are based on
matched assemblies.
The outdoor control panel in NEMA class 4 enclosure shall be designed for easy connection
with terminal blocks clearly identified for easy termination of power and control wiring with
the indoor unit.
The outdoor unit shall be assembled on a heavy - gauge Integral steel base. designed for
outdoor installation, complete with weather proof control panel.
B. Direct expansion split type air conditioner includes support hangers, control fillers, refrigerant,
refrigerant piping and insulation, electrical wiring connection, condensate drain lines, anchor,
thermostats and vibration isolator.
Condenser Fans - Condenser fan will be direct-drive propeller type, discharging air upward or
horizontally.
Condenser fan motors will be totally enclosed, 1-phase type with class B insulation and
permanently lubricated bearings. Shafts will be corrosion resistant Fan blades will be statically
and dynamically balanced. Condenser fan openings will be equipped with PVC- coated steel
wire safety guards.
Compressor - Compressor will be hermetically sealed The compressor type shall be air cooled
reciprocating / rotary and it shall be mounted on rubber vibration isolators.
Condenser Coil - Condenser coil will be air cooled. Coil will be constructed of aluminum fins
mechanically bonded to copper lubes which are then cleaned, dehydrated, and sealed.
Evaporators Fans - Evaporator fans shall confirm to AMCA 210 and shall be forward curved
type or backward inclined centrifugal type specially designed and suitable for the operating
pressure. Fan motors shall confirm to NEMA MG2. Motar starters shall confirm to NEMA ICS
1. Motors shall be totally enclosed type. Motar starters shall be magnetic across- the line type
with weather-resistant enclosure.
Direct expansion coils - Direct expansion coils shall be fin-and-tube type constructed of
seamless copper tubes of minimum thickness equal to 0.63 mm and the aluminum fins of
minimum thickness equal to 0.19 mm, mechanically banded or soldered to copper tubes.
Casing and tube support sheets shall not be higher than 1.52 mm (16 gauge) galvanized steel,
farmed to provide structural strength. When required, multiple tube supports shall be provided
to prevent the tube sag Each coil shall be tested at the factory under water at not less than 2070
kap air pressure and shall be suitable for 1380 kpa working pressure. Coils shall be mounted
for counter flow service. Coils shall confirm to ARI 410.
Refrigeration Components - Refrigeration circuit components will include liquid line shutoff
valve with sweat connections, suction line shutoff valves with sweat connections, system charge
of refrigerant R22, and compressor oil.
Controls:
Complete packaged control system shall be provided as required for the safe and proper
operation of each unit including high and low pressure cutout witches and "fan-auto-on"
switches on the thermostat. All other controls Including motor starters and safety controls shall
be mounted inside the enclosure and all wiring thereof shall be factory wired.
Condenser controls:
a. Head pressure control shall be provided to ensure condensing temperature for proper
system operation at all ambient temperatures down to 0°C.
Air Volume Control:
b. Solid state variable speed fan motor controller may be provided In lieu of volume
dampers to control air-flow over coil, Control shall be set for a minimum of 35°C
saturated refrigerant condensing temperature.
Condenser Start-Up Control:
a. Condenser with start-up control package which permits start-up of compressor
regardless of low ambient temperatures shall be provided. Package shall temporarily
bypass system low pressure-state to permit start-up whenever minimum ambient
temperature is below design evaporator coil suction temperature.
Refrigerant Circuits:
a. Entire refrigerant circuit shall be dehydrated, purged and charged with refrigerant and
oil at factory, charges shall be the full amount required for operation.
2.03 PACKAGED ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONING UNITS:
A. General:
1. Roof type air conditioners shall be designed, constructed, assembled, rated and tested in
accordance with ARI 210/240 and 340/360 and ANSI. Unit shall have capacities to meet
the design conditions specified or indicated.
B. Description:
1. Factory assembled and tested; designed for exterior installation; consisting of compressor,
indoor and outside refrigerant coils, Indoor fan and outside coil fan, refrigeration and
temperature controls, filters and dampers.
C. Performance Rating:
1. Cooling capacity of unit shall meet both the sensible heat requirements and total heat
requirements indicated. In selecting unit size, true allowance shall be made for "sensible
to total heat ratio" to satisfy required sensible cooling capacity.
2. Submittals shall include catalog selection data which accounts for sensible to total heat
ratio, entering air-conditions at evaporator and condenser entering air conditions.
3. Energy Efficiency Ratio (EER) should not be less than 10.
D. Casing:
1. Galvanized-steel conforming to ASTM A53M, construction with enamel paint finish,
removable panels or access doors with neoprene gaskets for inspection and access to
internal parts, minimum 12.5 mm (½ in.) thick thermal insulation, knockouts for
electrical and piping connections, exterior condensate drain connection and lifting lugs.
E. Indoor Fan:
1. Forward curved, centrifugal, belt driven with fixed or adjustable motor sheaves, grease-
lubricated ball bearings and motor.
F. Return/Exhaust-Fan:
1. Forward curved, airfoil or airfoil plug, centrifugal, belt driven with adjustable or fixed
motor sheaves, grease-lubricated ball bearings and motor. Mount fan and motor assembly
on base with rubber in shear isolators. Mount fan and motor assembly on base with spring
isolators having 50 mm (2 In.) deflection.
G. Outside Coil Fan:
1. Propeller type, directly driven by permanently lubricated motor.
H. Refrigerant Coils:
1. Aluminum-plate fin and seamless copper tube in steel casing with equalizing type vertical
distributor. Provide phenolic epoxy corrosion- protection coating to both coils.
I. Compressor:
1. Hermetic or semi-hermetic compressors with integral vibration isolators, Internal over-
current and over-temperature protection, internal pressure relief and crankcase heater.
J. Refrigeration System:
1. Compressor.
2. Outside call and fan.
3. Indoor coil and fan.
4. Four-way reversing valve and suction line accumulator.
5. Check Valves.
6. Expansion valve with replaceable thermostatic element.
7. Refrigerant dryer.
8. High-pressure switch.
9. Low-pressure switch.
10. Thermostat for coil freeze-up protection during low-ambient temperature operation or loss
of air.
11. Independent Refrigeration circuits.
12. Brass service valves installed in discharge and liquid lines.
13. Charge of refrigerant.
14. Hot-Gas Bypass:
a. Factory-installed valve.
15. Timed Off Control:
a. Automatic-reset control shuts compressor off after 5 minutes.
K. Filters:
1. 50 mm (2 in.) thick, fiberglass, pleated or throwaway filters in filter rack.
L. Heat Exchanger:
1. Aluminized steel or stainless steel construction for natural or propane-gas-fired burners
with the following controls:
a. Redundant dual gas valve with manual shutoff.
b. Direct-spark pilot ignition.
c. Electronic flame sensor.
d. Induced-draft blower.
e. Flame rollout switch.
M. Outside-Air Damper:
1. Linked damper blades, for 0 to 25 or 0 to 100% outside air, with manual slide and fully
modulating, spring-return damper motor and hood.
N. Economizer:
1. Return and outside air dampers with neoprene seals, outside- air fitter and hood.
a. Damper Motor:
1. Fully modulating spring return with adjustable minimum position.
b. Control:
1. Electronic-control system uses outside-air temperature, mixed-air and outside-air
temperature, outside-air enthalpy, mixed-air temperature and selects between
outside-air and return-air enthalpy to adjust mixing dampers.
c. Relief Damper:
1. Gravity actuated with bird screen and hood.
O. Power Connection:
1. Provide for single connection of power to unit with unit-mounted disconnect switch
accessible from outside unit and control-circuit transformer with built-in circuit breaker.
P. Unit Controls:
1. Solid-state control board and components contain at least the following features:
a. Indoor fan on/off delay.
b. Default control to ensure proper operation after power interruption.
c. Service relay output.
d. Unit diagnostics and diagnostic code storage.
e. Field-adjustable control parameters.
f. Defrost control.
g. Dehumidification control with dehumidistat.
h. Economizer control.
i. Gas valve delay between first- and second-stage firing.
j. Indoor-air quality control with carbon dioxide sensor.
k. Low-ambient control, allowing operation down to -17,78°C (O°F).
l. Minimum run time.
m. Night setback mode.
n. Return-air temperature limit.
o. Smoke alarm with smoke detector installed in supply air.
p. Low-refrigerant pressure control.
q. Digital display of outside temperature, supply-air temperature, return-air
temperature, economizer damper position, indoor-air quality and control
parameters.
Q. DDC:
1. Install stand-alone control module providing link between unit controls and DDC
temperature control system Control module shall be compatible with temperature-control
systems as specified in SECTION 15910.
R. Electromechanical Thermostat:
1. Staged healing and cooling on sub-base with manual system switch, on-heat-auto-cool and
fan switch auto-on.
a. Night setback operation with single-stage healing control with 7-day or 24-hour
lime clock with battery backup.
b. Fan-proving switch to lock out unit if fan falls.
c. Dirty-filter switch.
S. Thermostat:
1. Programmable, electronic; with heating setback and cooling setup with 7- day
programming; and the following:
a. Touch sensitive keyboard.
b. Automatic switching.
c. °c (°F) readout.
d. LED indicators.
e. Hour/day programming.
f. Manual override capability.
g. Time and operational mode readout.
h. Status indicator.
i. Battery backup.
j. Sub-base with manual system switch (on-heal-auto-cool) and fan switch (aula-
on).
k. Fan-proving switch 10lock out unit if fan fails.
l. Dirty-filter switch.
T. Optional Accessories:
1. Cold-Weather Kit:
a. Electric heater maintains temperature in gas burner compartment.
2. Service Outlets:
a. Two, 115 V, ground-fault, circuit-interrupter type.
3. PVC or copper condensate drain trap.
4. Dirty-filter switch.
5. Coil guards of painted, galvanized-steel wire, Hail guards of steel, painted to match casing.
6. Step-down or flush diffuser with aluminum grilles, insulated diffuser box with flanges and
interior transition.
7. Power exhaust fan.
8. Vertical vent extension.
U. Roof Curb:
1. Steel with corrosion-protection coating, gasketing and factory-installed wood nailer;
minimum height of 350 or 600 mm (14 or 24 in.).
V. Horizontal Discharge Roof Curb:
1. Steel with corrosion-protection coating, insulation, gasketing and factory-installed wood
nailer and configured to convert from down flow to horizontal airflow: minimum height of
650, 750, 925 or 1025 mm (26, 30, 37 or 41 in.),
W. Isolation Curb:
1. Rigid upper and lower steel structure with vibration isolation springs having 50 mm (2 in.)
static deflection and vertical and horizontal restraints; with elastomeric waterproof
membrane.
2.04 VENTILATION FANS:
1. Refer to the equipment schedule for ratings, capacities, and motor voltage requirements
Brand is to be Green heck, KDK, XPELAIR or approval equal for exhaust fans on kitchen
and fan type shall be belt drive centrifugal inline.
2. Toilet fans shall be wall mounted propeller fan, Provide solenoid operated outdoor louver
shutter for all wall mounted fans and louver color shall match With the wall color The
brand shall be KDK, XPELAIR or equal approved.
3. Fans shall be licensed to bear the "Air Moving and Conditioning Association, Inc."
Certified ratings seal. Ratings shall be not less than the values indicated, and shall be based
on 21 Degree Centigrade standard air.
4. Construction shall be in accordance with the AMCA classes of construction.
5. Fan wheels shall be statistically and dynamically balanced.
6. Furnish all accessories indicated.
7. Fan shall be direct drive motor designed for continuous operation with flexible aluminium
duct wall connection.
2.05 PIPE VALVES AND FITTINGS:
1. Furnish and Install all piping fittings, and specials shown, noted on the drawings, specified, or
required for the complete and operable mechanical installation.
2. Pipe shall be type and class and joined as described below:
a. Condensate Drainage:
1. Condensate drainage pipe shall be PVC schedule 40.
2. Provide a deep seal P-trap at each air fan coil unit.
b. Refrigerant Pipe:
Type "L" hard drawn copper joined by wrought copper sweat fillings made up with
95-5 solder and a suitable flux.
3. Valves: Fumish and install valves shown, noted or required for piping systems.

3.01 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION:

A. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer's installation recommendations, Install
items requiring removal for servicing with adequate clearance so as not to require removal or
damage of other items to permit their own removal.
B. Provide supports and hangers required for proper Installation of equipment.
C. Refrigerant piping shall be installed as shown in the equipment detailed drawings.
D. Refrigerant piping insulation shall be provided as shown in the equipment detailed drawings.
E. Testing, Balancing and Start-up:
1. Testing, adjustment. and start-up of mechanical systems shall be performed as
described below All necessary test equipment, instruments, materials, and labour
required for performing all the test described in these specifications shall be
provided as a part of the work of this Section.
2. Test, balance and adjust all the system to the drawings and specification, In
accordance with the intent and requirements of the ASHRAE Guide - Testing,
Adjusting and Balancing (Chapter 37, 2003 ASHRAE Application Handbook).
3. Test all condensate drainage piping from air treatment and handling equipment
by plugging outlets and filling to high point of each such drain.
3.02 WARRANTY:
The Contractor must provide a 3 year warranty for pipe installation for gas and drain from the dale of
final acceptance and 5 year for compressor and 1 year for other parts of the mini spill units.
1503 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM
1. This section covers the selection, installation, inspection and testing of fire protection equipments
for housing projects as specified herein and as shown on the Drawings. Portable fire extinguishers
are intended as a first line of defense to cope with fires of limited size.
2. This specification contains minimum design requirements, safety considerations and mechanical
equipment requirements based on the reference standards listed above.
3. The contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, tools and equipment required to make the work
complete and ready.
4. Provide fire extinguishers of type, size and capacity for each cabinet and other locations Indicated.
2.0 REFERENCES:
NFPA National Fire Protection Association

NFPA10 Portable fire extinguishers
NFPA17 Dry Chemical Extinguishing Systems
ANSI/UL American National Standard institute / Underwriter's Laboratories
ANSI/UL 299 Standard for Dry chemical fire extinguishers
3.0 FIRE FIGHTING EQUIPMENT

1. Fire extil1guishers:
A. The classification of the fire extinguishers shall consist of an alphabet that indicates the class of
fire on which a fire extil1guisher has been found to be effective, proceeded by a rating number
(class A and B only) that Indicates the relative extil1guishing effectiveness.
B. Portable fire extinguishers shall be maintained in a fully charged and operable condition and
shall be kept ill their designated places at all times when they are not being used.
C. Fire extinguishers shall be conspicuously located where they will be readily accessible and
immediately available in the event of fire. Preferably, they shall be located along normal paths
of travel, follow the design drawings for appropriate location of installation.
D. The minimum number of fire extinguishers needed to protect a property shall be determined as
per NFPA 10, chapter 5. Frequently, additional extinguishers can be installed to provide more
suitable protection.
E. Fire extinguishers shall be provided for building protection can be considered also for the
protection of occupancies having a class A fire potential.
2. Material:
1. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet:
Carbon steel, complying with ASTM Al008M, commercial quality, stretcher leveled, temper
rolled.
3. Mounting Brackets:
1. Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure extinguisher, of sizes required for types and
capacities of fire extinguisher indicated, with plated or baked-enamel finish.
4.0 EXECUTION:
1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing fire extinguishers and mounting
brackets.
2. Mounting Height:
a. Install extinguishers at a height Indicated below.
i. Install fire extinguishers mounted on hangers or brackets attached to a wall so
that the top of the extinguisher is not more than 1.067 m above the floor.
ii. In no case shall the clearance between the bottom of the fire extinguisher and
the floor be less than 100 mm.
3. Locations:
A. Install extinguishers at locations below:
a. Install fire extinguishers at locations specified on the drawings or as directed by the
authority having jurisdiction.
b. Fire extinguishers shall be conspicuously located, along normal paths of travel,
including exits from areas. Extinguishers shall not be obstructed or obscured from
view.
c. Install portable fire extinguishers on the hanger or in the bracket supplied or placed
in the fire extinguisher cabinets provided. Verify that the extinguisher operating
instructions face.
DIVISON 16:
ELECTRICAL:
1601 ELECTRICAL WORK.
1602 LIGHTING FIXTURES.
1603 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM.
1604 TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM.
1601 ELECTRICAL WORK

PART I – GENERAL:
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
A. Scope of Work Included:
This Section covers the supply, installation, testing and putting into operation of all mentioned electrical
installation as specified herein, complete and in perfect working order, notwithstanding any item or
system component not mentioned in the drawings / specifications but necessary for system operation
shall be provided by the contractor The Contractor shall be responsible for locating exact position of the
equipment, upon the written approval of the Owner/Consultant prior to installation. Wherever details
are lacking, working drawings shall be submitted by the Contractor to owner/ consultant for approval.
Workmanship shall be of the best accepted standard practice for such installation.
A. Applicable Codes and Standards:
1. Saudi Arabian Standards Organisation – SASO.
2. STC (Saudi Telecom Company) Ministry of Communications, KSA.
3. Ministry of Industry and Electricity,KSA.
4. BICSI (Building Industry Consulting Service International).
5. Saudi Electricity Company (SEC).
6. Saudi Building Code.
7. National Electnc Code US – 2011.
8. Ministry of Communication, KSA.
B. All electrical work shall be carried out in accordance With the latest issue of National Electric Code,
regulations for the Electrical equipment of build published by IEEE, where not in contradiction with the
local power supply authority requirements.
All equipment and materials specified under this section must be manufactured in strict compliance
with approved specifications Acceptance test shall conform to the requirements of approved codes and
standards. All materials to be used shall be subject to the approval of the Owner/Consultant before
being ordered or Installed. Samples shall be submitted along with the technical material submittal for all
systems' components. The Contractor however shall make sure that the different materials of each
system fit together and form a homogeneous installation irrespective of the Owner/Consultant prior
approval.
Any work which is not In accordance with the local authority regulations or upto the satisfaction of the
Owner/Consultant shall be removed and repaired at the Contractor’s own expense. All materials
supplied must be standard factory finished or painted to the requirements of the Owner/Consultant.
1.03 SUBMITTALS:
A. Complete technical submittals of materials and equipment proposed for incorporation in the work
including the following:
1. List shall include manufacturer's name and material or equipment identification such as styles,
types or catalog numbers for complete identification purposes, country of origin.
2. Include complete set of catalogs (original) covering these submittals.
3. Compliance statement shall indicate compliance with appropriate standard as specified and must be
part of technical submittal.
B. Shop drawings shall be submitted for equipment not readily identifiable by information named above
and will be submitted for, but not limited to abinets, panel boards, supports etc.
C. Installation and testing / commissioning method statements.
D. As built drawings in soft and hard copies.
E. Submit samples of each type of material intended for the proposed work.

2.01 GENERAL:
All goods and products covered by this specification shall be from manufacturers and suppliers regularly
engaged in the manufacture or supply of electrical materials and accessories.
2.02 MATERIALS:
A. WIRE, CABLE AND CONNECTORS:
1. Provide electrical wires, cables and connectors, which conform to the relevant specification,
made of manufacture's standard materials, designed and constructed as recommended by
manufacturer and as required for the installation. (Manufacture: Riyadh cables or approved
equal).
2. Provide colour coding for single conductor as follows ( as per Saudi Building Code Table 51-2):
ØA ØB ØC Neutral
230 Volts and Brown Brown Black Grey Blue
Insulated equipment ground green and yellow,
3. Building wire shall not be less than 4,0 mm 2 for power and 4.0 mm2 for lighting tinned copper
annealed class B standard, 600 Volts, Shall be PVC insulated wires with 70° C.
4. Main and sub-main cables shall be multiple stranded, tinned, copper for sized as indicated in
drawing; rated 90°C for XLPE (cross linked polyethylene) 600V/1000V or approved equal and
these shall be constructed and tested according to IEC 60227 and BS-6004.
Thermostat cable shall be 2.5 mm2 tinned copper, 7 conductors, 600 Volt, vinyl jackets, IPCEA
color coded.
B. RACEWAY SYSTEM:
1. Non-metallic Conduit: Conduit shall be rigid PVC, schedule 40, moisture resistant, flame
retardant, resistant to impact and crushing. (Manufacture. NEPRO, FABCO, SAPPCO or
approved equal).
2. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT):
1. Electrical metallic tubing shall be manufactured in accordance with ANSI C80.3.
2. Electrical metallic tubing larger than Trade Size 2 shall not be used.
3. It shall generally be used for routing lI1e cables for branch circuits, control circuits and
signal circuits, except for the following conditions and locations:
a. Locations where there are a possibility of crushing and damaging during
installation or utilization.
b. Damp and wet locations or conditions.
c. Corrosive locations or conditions.
d. Hazardous classified areas.
3. Flexible Steel Conduit: Conduit shall be flexible steel, zinc coated, thread less, liquid-tight and
moisture-proof, conforming to ANSI C33 92, safety standard for flexible metal conduit Fittings
shall be as recommended by the conduit manufacturer, thread less hinged clamp type,
galvanized or cadmium plated malleable cast iron. Conduits and fittings used in wet areas shall
be extruded with Black or Grey Thermoplastic cover.
4. Conduit Supports: Conduit hangers and supports shall be galvanized cast malleable iron or
structural steel, with galvanized nuts and bolts. Supports shall be as recommended by the
conduit manufacturers.
5. Electrical Accessories: Electrical accessories, including switches, junction boxes, pull boxes and
socket outlets, shall be in accordance to relevant IEC/ SASO standards.
C. WIREWAYS, CABINETS & BOXES:
Materials:
a. Cabinets: Provide cabinets constructed of code-gauge steel minimum 2 mm thick,
for surface or flush mounting as Indicated on the drawings. Unless scheduled
otherwise on the drawings, use NEMA Type 3R galvanized cabinets in outdoor
location, and use primed and grey bake-on enameled NEMA 1 cabinets in dry, indoor
areas.
b. Boxes: 1. This is applicable for back boxes for switches & socket outlets, tap, Junction
and pull boxes.
2. Boxes shall be suitable for use in ambient temperature up to at least 55 degree Celsius. In
all other respects they should conform to IEC 60670.
3. Terminations In junction, switch and outlet boxes shall be of screwed type.
4. Provide switch, outlet, tap, junction and pull boxes with screw-fastened cover. Where
required, provide weatherproof boxes, NEMA Type 3R enclosures, with gasketted covers
and flanges designed to prevent entrance of rain water. Junction and pull boxes shall be
cadmium or zinc coated sheet metal for indoor application.
5. Where required watertight boxes, provide watertight boxes constructed of galvanized cast
metal with gasket, bolt-on covers, with tapped holes in bosses or hubs for conduit
entrances With integrally cast mounting lugs.
c. Wire ways: Provide wire ways assemblies of the sizes and configurations indicated.
D. PANELBOARDS:
1. General: The Contractor shall furnish and Install at locations as shown on the drawings
approved panel boards of a type indicated and specified herein. Panel boards shall comply with
the applicable sections of NEC and NEMA and shall be as manufactured by General Electric,
Westinghouse Electric Corporation, Legrand, Siemens, ABB or equivalent approved.
2. Dead front safe type, panel boards conforming to NEMA and SASO Standards are to be
provided. The copper bus size, the number of branch circuits, their amp rating and number of
poles for each panel board is noted on the drawings. Panel boards should have solder less lugs,
or connectors, in the correct number and sizes for conductors, on Incoming side and on the
load side of each branch circuit, and on ground and neutral bars.
Provide an insulated neutral bus and a bonded equipment ground bus, mounted at the
opposite end of the structure from the mains, and having numbered screw or lug terminals for
connection of wires.
3. Interiors: Interiors shall be completely factory assembled with Screw or Bolt-on Main
Breakers / Isolators and DIN rail mounted Branch Circuit Breakers. They shall be designed
such that switching and protective devices can be replaced without disturbing adjacent units
and without removing the main bus connectors.
4. Bus bars:
Main bus bars shall be plated copper, sized in accordance with standards to limit temperature
rise on any current carrying part to a maximum of 50°C above an ambient of 40°C maximum.
(A ground bus shall be included in all panels.).
Unless otherwise noted, full size insulated neutral bar taps for panels with single pole branches
shall be arranged for sequence phasing of the branch circuit devices. Neutral busbar shall have
a suitable lug for each outgoing feeder requiring a neutral connection.
5. Circuit breaker:
a. Branch and main circuit breakers shall be bolt-on type and shall have frame sizes, trip
settings, and number of poles as indicated on the drawings.
b. All circuit breakers shall have their trip rating clearly marked and visible. Branch and
main MCGBs rated 400 Volts shall have an interrupting rating of not less than 25 KA
rms symmetrical/or as shown In the drawings, at rated voltage and shall be calibrated
at 50°C.
c. MCCBs should conform to IEC 60947 - 2. They should be provided with thermo
magnetic trip releases as per ratings indicated In the drawing. Thermal releases
adjustable from 0.7 to 1 of nominal current and fixed magnetic trip at 10 time's of
nominal current.
d. MGB are to be provided with thermal release and Instantaneous magnetic release type
C. they should have an Interrupting capacity of not less than 14 KA. MGBs should be
as per lEC 60898 -1.
e. Manufacturers: Provide breakers manufactured by one of the following (breakers
selected should be compatible with panel board selected): General Electnc, Legrand,
Schneider Electric, Siemens, ABB, Westinghouse, Mitsubishi Electric.
6. Enclosures: Ready to use panel board cabinets shall be constructed of sheet steel minimum 2
mm thick and shall be of suitable size to provide adequate space around the perimeter for risers
and outgoing circuits. The enclosures should be fitted with DIN rails, plates, and face plates.
Outgoing MCCB or MCBs are to be fitted in a row.
A directory frame with transparent cover shall be furnished and installed on the inside of the
door of each panel board.
All cabinets shall be lockable and supplied with master keys.
Enclosure degree of protection should be NEMA 1 - indoor type.
A directory card with clear plastic cover shall be supplied mounted on the inside of each door.
Directory should be Arabic and English. Provide an engraved nameplate for each panel section.
At least four interior mounting studs with adjustable nuts shall be provided.
Enclosures shall be provided with removable blank ends.
E. WIRING ACCESSORIES:
1. Includes all receptacles, switches, wall plates, flexible cable outlets & spur units. Equipment
should be Legrand, General Electric, ABS, Siemens, Pass & Seymour or equivalent make.
2. Switches:
a. Switches shall be flush mounted with the operating handle in upward position when
in the "ON" position.
b. Switches used on lighting branch circuit shall be quick make, quick break, with silver
alloy Contact, rocker, operated with quick operating mechanism rated at 16 amperes,
250 volts AC or higher capacity as required by the circuit controlled in accordance
with the drawing.
c. Switches shall be single, duplex, triplex, two way flush mounted type as indicated on
the drawings.
d. Plates:
i. Plates shall be of rectangular shape to the approval of the Owner/Consultant.
ii. Fixing screws shall be chromium plated and polished. Screw head shall be
finished to suit plate.
iii. Plates shall be designed to match associated devices. Plates for multigang switches
shall be provided as required/ indicated in the drawings.
iv. Plates for all electrical devices on walls shall be impact resistant plastic, and of the
same pattern and color throughout.
3. Receptacle outlets:
Provide single or duplex type receptacles, 13 amperes, 250 Volts, with metal plaster ears, side
wiring, as per BS1363: Part 2. Outlets can be switched or without switch, as indicated in the
drawing.
4. Special purposes power receptacle outlets:
These shall be single, rated 13 A, 45 A, 50 A, 250 Volts, polarized, 3 or 4 wires grounding type,
flush mounted, as per BS 1363: Part 2, as shown in the drawing.
5. Range Receptacles:
Range receptacles shall be single, 50 amperes, 250 volts polarized, 3 wire grounding type, flush
mounted.
6. Flexible cable outlets:
Flexible cable outlets shall be conforming to BS 5733 fitted with clamp and outlet membrane as
required in the drawing.
7. Weatherproof switches and receptacles:
Weatherproof Switches shall consist of acceptable flush mounting switches as specified herein
NEMA type 4 gusseted through a shaft in the matching cast metal boxes. Switch enclosures
shall be type MC or MCC, made by Crouse hinds Co, Syracuse, N.Y or equivalent. Gusseted
and weatherproof cover including corrosion
resistant fasteners shall be provided Weatherproof receptacles shall be standard single flush
receptacles as specified herein gusseted cast metal NEMA type enclosures, with gusseted cover
screw.
F. SAFETY/DISCONNECT SWITCHES:
1. General: Provide safety and disconnect switch with rating and sized as shown on the drawings.
2. Enclosures: Provide NEMA I, for indoor enclosures and NEMA 3R/4 for outdoor enclosures
for switches.
G. MOTORS AND MOTOR STARTING EQUIPMENT:
1. Motor Operating Characteristics:
Motors shall be rated for 60 HZ operation at the following voltages:
Motor Size Voltage Phase
1.5 hp and smaller( as per equipment 230 Single- phase

std.)
230 V single phase may by used for Kitchen equipment, pumps and major appliances.
Motors shall have a horsepower rating based on continuous operation at full load, 50°C
maximum ambient, and 1.0 service factor without exceeding the requirements of NEMA.
2. Magnetic Starters:
Magnetic starters shall be weather proof with 50 degree Celsius operating
temperature, as specified in NEMA ICS, Industrial Controls and Systems, and shall
be fitted with ambient compensated thermal overload relays, sized for nameplate
amperes and service factors. Overload relays for starters shall have normally closed
contracts that are manually reset with the compartment door closed.
Starters for single-phase motors shall be manual type with two pole-toggle units for
across-the-line-starting, and fitted with one overload element. Starters shall be
surface or flush mounted.
The control voltage for all starters and for all control circuits shall be 230 V unless
otherwise specified.
3. Controls:
Unless otherwise indicated or required by the driven equipment, all starters shall be
provided with heavy duly start-stop push buttons, one red pilot light, one green
pilot light and one reset pushbutton. Push buttons shall be a one unit momentary
contact "START” or "STOP" with normally open and normally closed contacts as
required by the wiring diagrams and with lockout attachments. All devices, such as
push buttons, selector switches and pilot lights shall be the heavy-duly-type.
All starter pushbuttons shall be labeled in Arabic and English, stating which
machine they control, and the functions of the various buttons. Words such as
START and STOP shall be used.
4. Enclosures:
Individually mounted starters shall be totally enclosed in a metallic enclosure of the
required NEMA lype4. It shall not be possible to open the enclosure door with the
starter energized.
5. Motor Features:
a. Insulation:
The motor windings shall be epoxy-coated or otherwise suitably treated so that
the insulation is moisture-resistant and non-hydroscopic. Motor windings shall
have class B insulation as specified in NEMA MG-1 for specified operating
conditions, Class F insulation may be used when approved.
b. Enclosures:
Motor enclosures shall be severe duly, totally-enclosed fan-cooled (TEFC) or
totally-enclosed non-ventilated (TENV), whichever is standard for the rating. It
should be as per standard of pump manufacturer but should be suitable for
installation in underground pump room.
6. Finish:
Motors shall be painted as specified In the manufacturer's standard specifications
for hot and humid conditions. The color shall be grey.
7. Identification:
All motors shall have a stainless steel nameplate giving a complete motor
description as specified in NEMA MG1, including AFBMA bearing replacement
numbers. The direction of rotation, in reference to the phase sequence terminal
marking, when viewing the motor from opposite the drive end, shall be shown.
H. GROUNDING:
1. Low voltage distribution system shall be provided with a separate green and yellow insulated
grounding conductors for each single or three-phase feeder. The required grounding
conductors shall be Installed in common conduit with the related phase and/of neutral
conductors Single phase branch circuits required for 230 Volts lighting, receptacle and motors
shall consist of phase neutral and ground conductors installed in common conduit.
2. The electrical system ground and equipment ground shall be connected to the common ground
base. All equipment metal frames shall be adequately connected to the ground bus. Ground
rods of copper-clad 16 mm diameter, 3.0 m long shall be installed as shown in the drawings.
High electrical conductivity with soft-drawn bare-stranded copper wire ground cable should be
used to form the ground grids. PVC insulated copper conductors shall be for final connections
of formed ground grids to structures, equipment etc.
3. All grounding medium shall be bonded together This shall include electric, telephone and TV
antenna system ground and other underground metallic piping, where they enter into the
building The common ground connections shall be made by using main size conductors and
connectors. Grounding system shall be as shown on the drawings.
4. If a total ground resistance of 5 ohms or less is not obtained with tile ground rod, a longer rods
or additional rods shall be installed until a combined ground resistance of 5 ohms or less is
obtained.
I. OTHER RELATED WORK:
A. The Contractor shall furnish all materials, labor, equipment and perform all operations
necessary for the installation of hand holes and manholes.
a. Provide excavation, shoring, bracing, backfilling, grading etc in accordance
with the applicable portions of the specification. Concrete shall be 25 N/mm 2
concrete and shall not be constructed until final conduit grading has been
determined, including any field changes required by underground
interferences. Shop drawings shall be submitted for all hand holes and
manholes.
b. Cable racks are to be heavy duty type with adjustable arms, and free moving
porcelain saddle Insulators. Pulling in irons shall be provided opposite each
duct entrance and as detailed.
B. Metering Equipment:
a. Contractor shall coordinate with SEC for power supply and metering arrangements,
Owner will be responsible for all the required fees.
b. Kilowatt hour meter opening at boundary wall shall be provided as required and
approved by SEC.

PART III - EXECUTION:

A. Materials, products and equipment furnished by the Contractor shall be installed and all worn
shall be performed in a first class workman-like manner and should have structural cabling
system certificate In conformity with the best trade practices, to produce satisfactory results, in
a safe, neat, orderly appearance and to facilitate operating, servicing, maintaining and
repairing.
B. The Contractor shall provide chases, holes and openings for installation purposes and carefully
fit around, repair, patch and otherwise make this worn acceptable.
C. Prior to starting the electrical and structured cabling system approved plan for installation, the
Contractor shall verify the correct voltage, phases and current consumption of all utilization
equipment to be connected. Branch circuit wiring, voltage and circuit breakers must be
adequate in each case. Construction should be well understood and all scheduled before the
approved materials are obtained.
D. RACEWAY SYSTEM:
1. Install all sight exposed conduit parallel to building lines.
2. Do not locate outlet boxes or conduit In structural columns, except as shown on the
drawings.
3. All conduit field bends shall be made using approved bending machine.
4. Conduits shall be offset where necessary to enter boxes, fitting and etc in order to
improve appearance of the work.
5. Installation of conduit shall comply with the following:
a. Supports shall be provided at a maximum spacing of 1 80 m on centers.
b. Conduits shall not be supported by wire.
6. Do not support any conduits from duct work, mechanical or plumbing piping equipment
etc.
7. Any run of conduit between outlet and outlet, between fitting and fitting, or between
outlet and fitting shall not have more than the equivalent of four quarter bends including
those bends located Immediately at the outlet or fitting,
8. Provide pull boxes as required in accessible locations.
E. WIREWAYS, CABINETS AND BOXES:
1. All boxes shall be rigidly secured in place, not supported by the conduit.
2. Front edge of box in concealed wiring system shall be flush with finished wall or
ceiling.
3. Except as otherwise noted on the drawings, cabinets (panel board) shall be installed
200 cm (6 feet 6 inches) from finished floor to top of cabinet. Home network cabinet
shall be installed as shown in designed drawings.
4. Use grounding bushings/cable for all wire/cables at termination points.
F. INSPECTION AND TESTING:
1. After the electrical and telecom structured cabling system installation is complete, tests shall be
made to demonstrate that the entire system is in proper working order and in accordance with
the drawings and specifications. Insulation, ground resistance UTP cable test shall be made
before operating tests. The Contractor shall submit the test report of insulation, UTP cable and
ground resistance.
2. The cost of all tests shall be paid by the Contractor, including expense incident to retests
resulting from the failure of any equipment or a part which cannot meet the required
specification. All wiring and equipment found defective, or failing to meet the specified
requirements shall be replaced by Contractor without charge, unless written acceptance for
repair is given.
3. The Contractor shall provide suitable cabling and electrical instrument including voltmeter,
ammeter, tachometer and/or other testing tools as required with a up to date valid calibration
certificate.
G. GUARANTEE AND ACCEPTANCE OF WORK:
1. The Contractor shall warrant whatever equipment and material he provides to be in
perfect condition and to replace entirely at his own expense any portion of the equipment
or material which show defect or faulty workmanship for a period of one year after the
acceptance of the system.
2. All systems, herein specified and/or shown on the drawings shall be in operating condition
satisfactory to the Owner and applicable codes and standards.
1602 LIGHTING FIXTURES
PART I – GENERAL:
1.0 1 DESCRIPTION:
A. To supply, install, connect and test lighting fixtures:
The work includes the provision of labor, material, equipment, transportation and services required to
completely furnish, install, connect, test and commission to operate In proper order all lighting fixtures
as shown on the drawings and herein specified and as required.
Section 1601- Electrical Work.
A. Lighting fixture shall be of type and manufacturers as as specified In the “schedule of lighting Fixtures”,
except products of similar type and features of approved equal manufacturers are acceptable.
1. The fittings have to be of good quality and the housing thereof must be made of lacquered
metal or as per specified product details. The fittings must comprise rotor lamp sockets and a
ground terminal has to be provided.
2. All fixtures and lamps shall be new components of the same type, Size, rating, functional
characteristics and make should be interchangeable.
1.0 3 APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARDS:
The following codes and standards are intended to provide an acceptable level of quality for materials and
products. The Contractor may propose alternative codes and standards provided they are of equal or better
quality than the referenced codes and standard and are submitted for review and approval.
SAUDI ARABIAN STANDARDS ORGANISATION:
SASO 54 PVC Insulated flexible cords with circular copper conductors.

SASO 56 Methods of test for PVC-insulated cables and cords with circular copper conductors.
SASO 79 Aluminium products Part I. Sheets, strips, plates. Bars and structural sections.
SAS080 Testing methods of aluminium products Part I, sheets, strips, plates, bars and structural sections.
SASO 138 Methods of test for tubular fluorescent lamps for general lighting service.
SASO 139 Tubular fluorescent lamps for general lighting service.
SASO 146 Methods of tests of ballasts for fluorescent lamps.
SASO 147 Ballasts for fluorescent lamps.
ASTM - AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS:
ASTM A507 Steel Sheet. Minimum thickness 1 25mm.

A53 Type S Steel Pipe.
A276 Type 316 Stainless Steel.
B209 Alloy No. 3003-1114 or 5005-H14
Aluminium Sheet and Plate. Minimum thickness 1.25mm.
B221 Alloy No. 6063-TS Extruded Aluminium
Minimum Thickness 2.78mm.
B85 Alloy No. G8a Die-Cast Aluminium
Minimum thickness 4.75mm.
D635 Rate of Burning or Self-Supporting Plastic.
D2240 Hardness of Plastics.
D1026 Flexible Cellular Materials of Expended Rubber.
D1400 Measurement of Dry Film Thickness.
B117 Salt Spray Testing.
B137 Weight of Coating on Anodic ally Coated Aluminium.
B244 Measurement of Thickness of Anodic Coatings.
B136 Measurement of Stain Resistance of Anodic Coatings on Aluminium.
A386 Zinc Coating on Assembled Steel Products.
AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE:
ANSI C7B Lamps

C8.24 Ballasts
1.0 4 SUBMITTALS:
a. Shop drawings and manufacturer's literature including: Electrical ratings, dimensions, mounting details,
materials, required clearances, terminations, wiring & connection diagrams, Photometric Curves for
each fixture type, color, watts, volts etc for each lamp type for each fixture, diffuser & controls, List of
Manufacturers - whose fixtures have been offered by the contractor.
b. Manufacture's catalogue, installation, operation and maintenance instruction and recommended spares
list with prices.
c. Factory test report.
d. The contractor shall submit field test report, after completion of testing & commissioning.
1.0 5 PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING:
Provide on each fixture and its components a recognized mark of the testing authority.
Ship each unit securely wrapped packaged and labeled for safe handling in shipment and to avoid damage or
distortion.
Store lighting fixtures in a secure and dry storage facility.
1.0 6 HEALTH & SAFETY REQUIREMENT:
All works under taken in relation to this specification are to be completed in full, in accordance with established
health & safety requirements of Kingdom of Saudi Arabia.

2.01 GENERAL:
All goods and products covered by these specifications shall be, when available, from an in-kingdom
supplier. Make of the lighting fixtures should be Inara, Philips, Thorlux, Saudi lighting Co., Oppel
lighting with lamps Osram, Philips, Opple lighting, National lighting, Nardeen or approved equivalent.
2.02 REQUIREMENT FOR LIGHTING FIXTURES:
Lighting fixtures, body, housing, diffusers and reflectors shall be of the shape, size and material shown
on drawing or other approved documents.
2.03 LAMPS:
All lamps shall conform to ANSI C78.
Fluorescent Lamps shall operate on 230 Volts, 60 Hz supply with the Following requirements:
Walt rating: As shown.

Type: Rapid start for 30 Wand 40 W.
trigger start for 20 W.
Bulb size: T -S, T-8 to T-12 or equivalent and length as shown In the drawings.
Base: Upto & including 40W: Medium bi-pin.
Above 40W: Recessed double Contact.
Compact fluorescent lamps shall be having built in ballast.
2.04 LAMPHOLOERS AND STARTERS:
Lamp holders, starters and starter holders for fluorescent lamps shall conform to IEC 60400 and shall be
with automatic type starter with holder or combination lamp holder and starter holder rated 660W,
250V.
White thermosetting phenolic compound base and body, silver plated phosphorous bronze contacts,
self-aligning neoprene gasket face.
2.05 BALLAST:
a. Ballast for fluorescent lamps shall be thermally protected type, high frequency electronic ballast.
b. Operate on 230 Volts, 60 HZ, supply, load rating Suitable for the lamps.
c. The ballast shall operate the lamps in a manner that will not adversely curtail the normal life of the
lamp. The light output shall not vary by more than +/- 5% for a variation of +/- 10% variation of
the Input voltage about the central design voltage. Light output shall remain constant for a +/- 5%
variation of the input voltage.
d. The noise level, from 600mm from the installed fixture, shall not exceed 3Odb.
e. The ballast shall have high power factor and shall not be less than 95%.
2.06 DIFFUSER:
The diffuser shall be made of one piece Virgin acrylic, clear acrylic, or polycarbonate plastic or as
specified in the' Schedule of lighting fixtures' and shall have the following characteristics:
a. Inner surface of the diffuser shall be diffusing type while outer surface shall be smooth.
b. The diffuser shall be self-extinguishing type as determined by ASTM D635
c. It shall be resistant to shrinking, warping, crazing, cracking or discolonng, either in service or when
stored In normal condition in the manufacturer's standard shipping containers.
2.07 CONSTRUCTION OF LUMINNAIRES:
1. The metal parts of luminaries shall be formed to prevent warping and sagging. Housing and other
parts of the frame, shall be true, straight (unless intentionally curved) and parallel to each other as
designed.
2. Wire ways and fittings shall be free of burrs and sharp edges and shall accommodate internal and
branch circuit wiring without damage to the wiring.
3. Luminaries shall be made from minimum 0 91 mm (20 gauge) housing. Minimum 0.76mm (22
gauge) housing shall be acceptable provided they have strengthening embossed rib and break
formations, which give the equivalent rigidity of 0 91mm housing.
4. When installed, any exposed fixture housing surface, frame etc. shall be free of light leaks.
5. Ballasts shall be serviceable while the fixture is in its normally installed position and shall not be
mounted on removable reflectors or wire ways.
6. Hinged door closure frames shall operate smoothly without bending when the fixture is in the
installed position and latches shall function easily by finger action without the use of tools.
7. All lighting fixtures shall be provided with a specific means for grounding their metallic parts to an
equipment grounding conductor.
2.08 GASKETS:
Keyed Gasket:
One piece extruded solid neoprene having Type A durometer hardness of 30 plus or minus five when
tested in accordance with ASTM D2240.
Self-retaining Gasket:
One piece closed cell sponge neoprene, soft or medium density, with the following additional
requirements:
Resistant to aging, heat, ultra-violet light, water, oil weathering and setting as determined by ASTM
D1056 and shall be cemented to components with resilient neoprene sealing compound compatible with
the finish. Adhesive shall not be applied to the diffuser.
Heavy duty stainless steel latches. catches, release mechanism, hinges, rivets.
screws, bolts, studs. nuts, additional washers and springs with the following
requirements
Latches and catches Captive type
Operating hardware Self-retaining type
2.09 FINISH:
Baked Enamel:
Non-specular finish consisting of six-stage hot cleaning wash, phosphate coat, prime coat and finish coat of
sprayed white or other color acrylic enamel, baked at 177°C (350°F) for a minimum of 30 minutes, with the
following additional requirements:
Dry film thickness per ASTM D1400 1: 1.25 mm (minimum).
Undercutting of enamel film from scored line after exposing to 10 per cent salt spray for 1.500 hours, per
ASTM 3117 1.6 mm (1/16 inch) maximum.
Baked white enamel after 100 hours exposure to fadeometer: 86 percent, minimum reflectance factors, no
appreciable visual colour change.
Porcelain Enamel:
Opaque fused vitreous surface flush with 88 percent average reflectance factor.
Alzak coating 14 stage process for permanently sealed specular or semi specular finish, as shown in
accordance with patented electrolytic process.
Anodic Coating:
AA-M22C22A41, minimum coating thickness, 08 mm, coating weight 0.054
milligrams per mm2 hot water seal overall, tested in accordance with the following requirements:
Coating weight: ASTM B137
Coating thickness: ASTM B244
Sealing test: ASTM B136
Undercutting of anodic film from scored line after exposing to 10% salt spray for 1,500 hours, per ASTM
BII7:1.6 mm (1/16 Inch) maximum.
Zinc Coaling: ASTM A386
Factory Painting:
Consisting of through chemical cleaning wash, phosphate coat, coat of trust inhibiting primer and finish coat
of sprayed Federal Colour No, 20040 Paint.
Field Painting:
Not permitted without Client approval.
2.010 LIGHTING FIXTURES:

Lighting fixtures shall be furnished and installed complete with necessary parts, lamps, all as herein
specified and as shown on the drawings. All lighting fixtures shall operate on 230 Volts, 60 Hz, power
supply, unless otherwise shown.

3.01 GENERAL:
Except as may be described in Part II and Part III of this Section refer to the applicable provisions of
Section 1601.
3.02 INSTALLATION:
Furnish, assemble, install and wire up complete, all lighting fixtures Fixtures shall be complete with
lamps, lamp holders and all necessary accessories. All fixtures shall be wired in accordance with
temperature limitations.
Fixtures shall be rigidly mounted by approved means. Pendant-hung fixtures shall be equipped with
approved ball type aligners.
Provide adequate protection for fixtures during construction. At completion of work, all fixtures clean
and free from foreign materials.
Before starting the manufacture of any fixtures under this Section, the Contractor shall submit complete
technical of each fixture specified The Contractor shall submit a complete sample of all of the fixtures
specified.
The Contractor shall note that proper framing of the ceiling shall be provided for all recessed fixtures.
All fixtures recessed in plaster ceilings shall be provided with plaster boxes. The ceiling installation, air
diffusers etc must be in line and present a neat and orderly appearance. Recessed fixtures shall be
removable from below to allow access to an outlet in the ceiling.
Furnish and set all inserts, anchors, studs and hangers for the support of lighting fixtures and respective
equipment and make all necessary adjustments required thereto Where fixtures are surface mounted,
neat holes shall be cut in the hung ceilings as required for the fixture supports. All supports, hangers,
channels, bolts etc shall be galvanized. Two supports shall be provided for each fluorescent fixture, one
at each end of the fixture.
1603 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

PART I- GENERAL:
1.0 1 DESCRIPTION:
A. The work covered under this Section consist of furnishing and installing a complete fire alarm system
including functional components shown on drawings and as described in these specifications.
B. Applicable Codes and Standards:
1. Saudi Arabian Standards Organization – SASO.
2. N F P A (National Fire Protection Association of U.S.A).
3. National Electrical Code U.S.A.
4. Underwriters Laboratory.
1.0 2 SUBMITTALS:
Submit samples of each type of material intended for the proposed work.

2.01 BIDDER QUALIFICATIONS:

A. The system shall be installed, connected and tested under the supervision of an authorized
manufacturer's representative normally engaged in this type of work and shall have performed such
work for at least the past three years and shall be prepared to furnish such evidence to Architect /
Engineer if requested.
2.02 INSTALLATION:
A. The equipment furnished under this specification shall be the standard product of one
manufacturer.
All components and the system as a whole shall conform to applicable standards. All work in
conjunction with this installation shall meet the provisions of the National Electrical Code.
2.03 SERVICE FACILITIES:
A. The equipment manufacturer's service department must stock parts for the equipment installed and
shall provide factory trained personnel.
2.04 TESTING:
A. Before shipment, each piece of equipment shall be tested to ensure proper operation and
conformance with manufacturer's published specifications.
Notification of completion of testing shall be provided.
B. Before acceptance, each unit of the alarm system shall be tested by the manufacturer's factory
trained representative in the presence of Architect /Engineer. Tests of smoke detectors electrical test
and a smoke test. The smoke test conducted shall be similar to the UL test as performed under the
requirements of UL 167 and shall be as follows:
1. Shredded paper, 1f4Kg, 6mm to 9mm wide, 150mm to 600mm long, strips of newspaper
placed in the hardware cloth receptacle; 150mm openings, approximately 300mm diameter,
600mm high, 150mm clearance between shelf and bottom, ignition by match at bottom centre.
2. Units being tested must respond within two minutes maximum.
C. Contractor will supply all materials and equipment for tests and shall conduct the tests.
D. Contractor shall inform to Architect/Engineer the system is ready for testing and the Architect/
Engineer shall set the test date.
2.05 FINAL ACCEPTANCE:
A. Before final acceptance all detectors shall be tested In the presence of the Architect/Engineer, and
certify that the units are in satisfactory operating condition.
B. The complete fire alarm system shall operate satisfactory before final acceptance.
2.06 MATERIALS:
General:
A. Contractor shall supply and install a complete and ready- to- use fire alarm system as described
herein and shown on the drawings. The intent of these specifications IS to provide a complete and
satisfactorily operating system complete with all equipment and installation materials required,
whether or not enumerated here In or shown on the drawings.
B. It is the intent of this specification for a single source fire alarm manufacture to supply all detectors
in the system.
C. Upon completion of system installation and before final inspection, Contractor shall thoroughly
check the fire alarm system. He shall certify in a letter to Architect / Engineer that each smoke
detector and complete system have been checked and are as specified, that all items have been
prepared and Architect / Engineer has been instructed in the fife alarm system.
D. Upon acceptance of fire alarm system, equipment manufacturer shall assume complete
responsibility for replacement of any defective equipment during warranty period of one year at no
cost to Owner.
E. Primary power source shall be 220 V, 60HZ as provided (See drawings). System operation shall be
24V DC unless specified otherwise.
F. Equipment manufacturer shall furnish wiring diagrams and equipment specification submittals for
Architect / Engineer approval prior to installation.
G. System wiring shall be installed in accordance with this specification manufacturer’s
recommendations as shown in relevant drawings and shall be run in conduit as required by this
specification, sizes, as recommended by the equipment manufacturer and in strict accordance with
the NEC, systems shall be test free from ground opens or short circuits. Circuitry shall be two wire,
Class B supervised. All wiring to be colour coded.
H. The equipment herein described and specified establishes a minimum set of standards for product
quality. Contractor shall be required to submit information on the equipment for approval.
2.07 EQUIPMENT:
A. SMOKE DETECTORS:
Smoke detector shall be products of combustion detection devices and shall be installed in locations
as shown on the plans or called for in the specifications. The following generic wording of fire
alarm devices is included and made a part of this specification.
1. All products of combustion detectors shall be as follows:
a. Detectors shall be of the solid state photo-electronic type, long life LED and shall
operate on the light scattering, photodiode principle.
b. Detectors shall have an accessible control for field adjustment of sensitivity. (Delay
timing and delay circuits are not considered to be sensitivity adjustment).
c. Detectors shall be fully self- compensating for the effects of velocity, changes in
temperature, humidity and atmospheric pressure.
d. Detectors shall be capable of operating with ambient temperatures of 320 to 1200F.
e. Detectors shall incorporate a visual indication to indicate normal or alarm condition.
f. All detectors shall be Underwriters, Inc. and/or Factory Mutual approved and shall
have passed the UL long-term stability test.
g. Housing of all units shall be metal or plastic material of industrial type specifically
designed to protect the unit from rough handling.
h. Manufacturer's descriptive, specifications, cuts and diagrams shall be submitted for
approval prior to purchase and Installation.
i. Replacement of any detector shall be at the expense of the manufacturer and shall not
result in any charge, whatsoever, to the Owner.
j. Qualified manufacturer's representative will instruct the company Engineer In
maintenance, operation and adjustment of the units.
1. Contractor shall supply copies of all pertinent manufacturer's literature on
system, bound in hard cover binders.
D. BATIERY MODULE:
The fire alarm control unit shall be provided with a standby power in the event of commercial
power failure. The module shall consist of maintenance- free, sealed lead cells and 24V DC supply.
The battery module shall have a size to meet 10 hours (minimum) standby capacity and 15 minutes
of alarm. The battery module may be housed on a separate module enclosure similar to the fire
alarm control unit enclosure.
E. CONDUCTORS:
Conductors shall be sized to prevent excess voltage drop and shall be colour coded.

PART III –EXECUTION:

A. Materials, products and equipment furnished by the Contractor shall be installed and all work shall
be performed in a first class workman-like manner, in conformity with the best trade practices, to
produce satisfactory results, In a safe, neat, orderly appearance and to facilitate operating, servicing,
maintaining and repairing.
B. The Contractor shall provide chases, holes and openings for installation purposes and carefully fit
around, repair, patch and otherwise make his work acceptable.
C. Prior to starling lI1e fire alarm system installation, the Contractor shall verify the correct voltage,
phases and current consumption of all equipment to be connected.
D. PVC conduit shall be used where embedded in concrete and galvanized rigid steel or EMT conduit
shall be used to run through hollow wail/ceiling spaces.
3.02 OPERATION AND FUNCTIONS OF THE SYSTEM:
A. A representative of the equipment manufacturer shall instruct the site personnel in the operation
and functions of the system with the presence of Clients' statutory agency representative for
approval.
1604 TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM

A. VIDEO INTERCOM SYSTEM:
1. Video intercom system consists of entrance door stations and villa main station and sub stations. The
system also includes an electric door opening system.
2. Door Intercom systems can be a press-to-talk system allowing speech between the door station arid villa
main station and communication between villa stations.
3. The integrated loudspeaker and microphone shall be for tropical conditions and shall be frost and
weather protected.
a. Door Station:
1. The door station box shall be made of galvanized sheet steel and shall be provided with rubber gasket to
assure weatherproof attachment of the cover.
2. The metal front plate shall include illuminated nameplate and push-button, an Indicating lamp for
"ready to communicate".
b. Master Station:
1. The master station shall be wall mounted type and shall be capable of calling any station In the system
and receiving calls from all stations.
2. The master station shall have the following minimum features:
 On-off switch for turning the system on and off.
 LED light to show whether the system is on or off. This will appear on the master arid the slave
stations.
Volume contral to regulate the listening and talking volume.
The master station shall operate from 230v, single phase, and 60Hz supply.
Telephone type handset for communication.
Ability to call one handset at a time and selectively a number of handsets.
The master station shall have a visual and audio indicator to show when any telephone handset is
calling.
 Push button to release the entrance electric door latch.
c. Sub Station:
1. Substation handsets shall be capable of accepting calls from master stations and making calls to the
master station.
2. Handset shall be wall mounted type.
d. Execution:
1. Furnish and install the intercom system complete including all conduits, wires and accessories as
shown in the drawing.
2. The Intercom system shall be located and installed as shown and as specified herein and on the
drawings unless otherwise directed.
3. Submit for approval before any materials are delivered to site/installed, with complete shop
drawings and technical material submittals.
4. Equipment shall be as manufactured by AIPHONE, Samsung, LG, or from any approved
equivalent.
B. DATAITELEPHONEIIPTV DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM:
1. Furnish and install telecom distribution system complete With all conduits, wires and related
accessories.
2. All telecom distribution system shall be located and installed as shown in the drawings.
3. Outlets shall be single, wall flush mounted using standard type boxes complete with terminal
units and cover plates. (Face plate standard color: white).
4. All telecom distribution system materials including cables, splicing materials, conduits and
fittings, terminals, boxes or boards, grounding materials, installation wiring and other
appurtenance shall be supplied by the contractor unless otherwise noted.
5. Submit for approval before any materials are delivered to site/installed, with complete shop
drawings and technical material submittals.
a. Cables and Conduits:
1. Data/ Telephone/ lPTV distribution cables - category 6 UTP plenum cables shall be
O,63mm , solid copper conductor, polypropylene insulation, full color coding, 4 pairs.
Non- hygropylene jacket, 0.24mm aluminum inner shield, 0.15mm outer shield
polyethylene modified petrolatum filling compound, polyethylene outer jacket.
2. A separate grounding wire shall be installed in all conduits, all distribution boxes and
cabinet; and bond the main telecommunication grounding cable to the common
electrical grounding grid with not less than a 6AWG grounding cable.
3. Conduits to outlets shall be minimum 25 mm, per outlet unless otherwise specified on
the drawings. All conduits shall be rigidly installed, adequately supported and
properly reamed at both ends. Sections of conduit shall be joined with approved
couplings and conduit terminations in outlet boxes, pull boxes etc and shall he made
using approved fittings.
4. Outside conduits should be installed as per the drawings. All the empty ducts should
be equipped with 6mm nylon rope and closed properly with suitable duct plugs at
both ends.
5. Submit for approval before any materials are delivered to site/installed, with complete
shop drawings and technical material submittals.
6. Cables shall be as manufactured by bolden cables, or from any approved equivalent.
b. Socket outlets:
1. Data/Telephone/IPTV socket outlets shall be flush mounted in wall using standard
type boxes with RJ45 modular jack, bracket, and face plate with mounting screws.
Standard color white.
2. Provide boxes, conduits and pull boxes as specified in section 1601 2.02 B & C.
3. Materials shall be as manufactured by Legrand, ABS, AI fanar or from any approved
equivalent.
4. Home network cabinet / Network enclosure shall be (NEMA type 1):
 Flush mounted enclosure type with hinged cover;
 horizontal and vertical module mounting holes for maximum flexibility.
 Provision to mount power strip and lock kit.
 Material: 20-18 gauge steel.
 Finish: White, powder coat.
 Cabinet shall be as manufactured by net select Hubbel or any approved
equivalent.
5. Submit for approval before any materials are delivered to site/installed, with
complete shop drawings and technical material submittals.
C. SMATV DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM:
1. Furnish and install SMATV distribution system complete with all conduits, wires and accessories.
2. The SMATV distribution system shall be located and installed as shown on the drawings.
3. Outlets shall be single, wall flush mounted using standard type boxes complete with terminal units and
cover plates. (Face plate standard color: white).
4. SMATV distribution system materials including cables, splicing materials, conduits and fittings,
terminals, boxes or boards, grounding materials, installation wiring and other appurtenance shall be
supplied by the contractor unless otherwise noted.
5. A separate SMATV distribution system shall be provided in driver's quarter as shown in the drawings.
6. Submit for approval before any materials are delivered to site/installed, with complete shop drawings
and technical material submittals.
a. Cable, conduit and splitter:
1. Provide co-axial cable RG6 type with 75 Ω characteristic impedance, construct with
polyethylene low--density dielectric core, aluminum alloy braid over aluminum foil
tape for 100% shielding and covered with polyethylene protective jacket insulation.
2. Splitter: Indoor/outdoor type, stainless steel, non-corrodible, waterproof housing with
glide path spring loaded connectors, 75Ω required One entry terminal will be labeled
as the input connection All other terminals shall be
used as outputs. Un-used outputs shall be fitted with suitable matched termination.
Based on the dish type can use LNB with splitter type also.
3. Conduits to outlets shall be minimum 25 mm, per outlet unless otherwise specified on
the drawings. All conduits shall be rigidly installed, adequately supported and
properly reamed at both ends. Sections of conduit shall be joined with approved
couplings and conduit terminations in outlet boxes, pull boxes etc and shall he made
using approved fittings.
b. Socket outlets:
1. SMATV socket outlets shall be flush mounted in wall using standard type boxes with
a female RF connector modular jack, bracket, and face plate with mounting screws,
Standard color white.
2. Provide boxes, conduits and pull boxes as specified in section 1601 2.02 B. & c.
3. All materials shall be as manufactured by Jerrold Electronic, Legrand, ASB, Al fanar,
or from any approved equivalent.
4. All installation shall be in accordance with RC telecommunication standards.
DIVISION 17- REFERENCES I ABBREVIATIONS:
A. In conjunction with the requirements of Special Condition "Standards and Codes", the listings below are
acceptable standards.
B. References to recognized standards are by use of the abbreviations listed below.
C. References to standards are not limited to those mentioned below.
D. Local/ Gulf Standards.
E. International Standards:
1. GSMO Standard and Metrology Organization for G,C C.

2. MPWH Ministry of Public Works and Housing.
3. RCAC Royal Commission Architectural Code.
4. RCBC Royal Commission Building Code.
5. RCCA Royal Commission Administration Codes.
6. RCEC Royal Commission Electrical Code.
7. RCEM Royal Commission Engineering Manual.
8. RCFC Royal Commission Fire Code.
9. RCMC Royal Commission Mechanical Code.
10. RCPC Royal Commission Plumbing Code.
11. RCSC Royal Commission Structural Code.
12. SASO Saudi Arabian Standard Organization.
13. SCS Saudi Electric Company Construction Standards.
14. SDS Saudi Electric Company Distribution Standards.
15. SES Saudi Electric Company Engineering Standards.
16. SMSS Saudi Electric Company Material Specification Standards.
17. STC Saudi Telecommunication Company.
1. AA Aluminium Association, Inc.

2. AABC Associated Air Balance Council
3. AAMA Architectural Aluminium Manufacturers Association
4. AAN American Association of Nurserymen, Inc.
5. AASHTO American Association of State Highway & Transpiration Officials
6. AATCC American Assoclallon of Textile Chemist and Colonst.
7. ABPA Acoustical and Board Products Association.
8. ABMA American Bearing Manufacturers Association.
9. ABMA American Boiler Manufacturers Association.
10. ACI American Concrete Institute.
11. ACIL American Council of Independent Laboratories.
12. ACPA American Concrete Pipe Association.
13. ADC Air Diffusion Council.
14. AFBMA Anti-Friction Bearing Manufacturing Association.
15. AGA American Gas Association.
16. AHAM Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers.
17. AI The Asphalt Institute.
18. AIA American Institute of Architects.
19. AIHA American Industrial Hygiene Association.
20. AISC American Institute of Steel Construction.
21. AISE Association of Iron and Steel Engineers.
22. AISI American Iron and Steel Institute.
23. AITC American Institute of Timber Construction.
24. AMCA Air Moving and Control Association, Inc.
25. ANSI American National Standards Institute, International.
26. AOAC Association of Official Analytical Chemists.
27. APA American Plywood Association.
28. API American Petroleum Institute.
29. ARI Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute.
30. ASA Acoustical Society of America.
American Society of Architectural Hardware.
31. ASAHC Consultants.
 See Door and Hardware Institute.
32. ASC Adhesive and Sealant Council.
33. ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers.
34. ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and
Air- Conditioning Engineers, Inc.
35. ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
36. ASQ American Society for Quality.
37. ASPE American Society of Planning Engineers.
38. ASSE Architectural Society of Sanitary Engineers.
39. ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials.
40. AWI Architectural wood work Institute.
41. AWPA American Wood-Preservers' Association.
42. AWPB American Wood Preservers Bureau.
43. AWPI American Wood Preservers Institute.
44. AWS American Welding society, Inc.
45. AWWA American Water Works Association, Inc.
46. BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association, Inc.
47. BIA Brick Institute of America.
48. BS British Standard.
49. CABO Council of American Building Officials.
50. CAGI Compressed Air and Gas Institute.
51. CAUS Color Association of United States.
52. CCITT International Telegraph and Telephone Consultative Committee.
53. CDA Copper Development Association, Inc.
54. CFFA Chemical Fabrics and Film Association.
55. CER Code of Federal Regulations.
56. CGA Compressed Gas Association.
57. CIM Chlorine Institute Manual.
58. CIRIA Construction Industry Research and Information Association.
59. CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute.
60. CPPA Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe Association.
61. CPSC Consumer Product Safety Commission.
62. CRI Carpet of Rug Institute.
63. CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel institute.
64. CS Commercial Standards of NBS (U.S. Department of Commerce) - See NIST.
65. CSI Construction Specifications Institute, Inc.
66. CTI Cooling Tower Institute.
67. DHI Door & Hardware Institute.
68. DIN Deutsches Insitut fur Normung.
69. DIPRA Ductile Iron Pipe Research Association.
70. DOT Department of Transportation.
71. EIA/TIA Electronic Industries Association / Telecom Industries Association.
72. EJMA Expansion Joint Manufacturer Association.
73. EPA Environmental Protection Association.
74. FCI Fluid Control Institute.
75. FGMA Flat Glass Marketing Association.
76. FM Factory Mutual Engineering Corporation.
77. FM Factory Mutual System.
78. FS Federal Specifications.
79. FSSM Food Services Sanitation Manual.
80. GA Gypsum Association.
81. HEI Heat Exchanger.
82. HEI Heat Exchange Institute.
83. HFES Human Factored Ergonomics Society.
84. HI Hydraulic Institute.
85. HI Hydronics Institute.
86. HMI Hoists Manufacturers Institute.
87. HPMA Hardwood Plywood Manufacturers Association.
88. IBC International Building Code.
89. ICBN International Code of Botanical Nomenclature.
90. ICBO International Conference of Building Officials.
91. ICC International Code Council.
92. ICNCP International Code of Nomenclature of Cultivated Plants.
93. IEC International Electro technical Commission.
Mm Millimeter
Cm Centimeter
M Meter
Schedule B- LM Linear meter Attachment III
In. Inch
Issue for construction (IFC)
Ft Foot
Drawings Sq.mm Square millimeter
1. Issue for Sq.cm Square centimeter construction Drawing
Sq. m Square meter
shall be provided through separate
Sq. ft Square feet
print out with Cu.m Cubic meters stamp and signed by
SAUDI G Grams ARAMCO.
ENDOF Kg Kilogram SCHEDULE B-
ATTACHMENT Ib Pound III
C Centigrade (Celsius)
Schedule B- F Fahrenheit Attachment IV
A Ampere
Technical & commercial Bill of
V Volt
Quantity (BOQ) Kv Kilovolt
Hr Hour
1. Technical & Commercial Bill of
Kg/ sq. cm Kilogram per square centimeter
Quantity shall be KN/m Kilo newton per meter referred to Schedule
C Attachment II kPa Kilopascal (1.0, 2.0, 3.0, 4.0,) in
this Contract for MPa Mega pascal villa Type B, C, D
and Psi Pounds per square inch Preliminaries.
Psig Pounds per square inch gage
END OF DB Direct Burial SCHEDULE B-
ATTACHMENT IV Ppm Parts per million
TDS Total dissolved solids
Scope of work AC Alternating current
DC Direct current
Procurement & Construction of
GE General Electric
three Local No. Number Mosques- (2) 450
Capacity and (1) Min minimum 650 Capacity
Max. maximum
REVIEWED BY: % percent
Date and Signature
TABLE OF CONTENTS Page
1. OVERVIEW ……………………………………………………………………………………. 4
2. DESCRIPTION OF THE AREA …………………………………………………………. 4
3. SCOPE OF WORK …………………………………………………………………………. 5
3.1 General ……………………………………………………………………………… 5
3.2 Mobilization and Temporary works ………………………………… 7
3.3 Temporary water, electricity, firefighting and sewage ...….. 8
3.4 Engineering ………………………………………………………………………… 9
3.4. 1 Civil and site preparation work …………………………… 9
3.4. 2 Architectural work ……………………………………………….. 13
3.4. 3 Structural Work …………………………………………………… 16
3.4. 4 Mechanical Work (HVAC, Plumbing and Fire Protection System) 16
…………………………………………………….
3.4. 5 Electrical Work …………………………………………………….. 27
3.4. 6 Telecommunication Work ……………………………………. 29
3.4. 7 OA/ QC Plan …………………………………………………………. 32
3.4. 8 Reporting …………………………………………………………….. 32
4. PROJECT SCHDULE AND COORDINATIONPC CONTRACT …………….. 32
4. 1 Project Schedule ……………………………………………………………. 32
4. 2 Project Duration ……………………………………………………………. 32
5. PERMITS ………………………………………………………………………………………. 33
6. PROJECT CLOSEOUT …………………………………………………………………….. 33
7. LIST OF SPECIFICATIONS ……………………………………………………………….. 35
8. ATTACHMENTS …………………………………………………………………………….. 37
1. OVERVIEW:
This project, B1-28-10012, provides for the Home Ownership Lot Development, Phase I, at Al- Mutrafiah, Jubail
Industrial City in the Eastern Province of the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia.
This Contract will accommodate 491 house units, in total, with varying lot sizes for sectors F1-1, F1-2 and F1-3
and the construction of three (3) Duplex type houses for the Imam & Muazzin to be built on three (3) lots to be
selected by Saudi Aramco, in addition to three (3) Local day mosques.
The site is located in the Mutrafiah District of the Jubail Industnal City residential area.
Sketch No 1. Site Location Map.
Sketch No. 2 Master plan and Location of Mosques.
Mutraflah District is a new development within the Jubail Industrial City residential area SAUDI ARAMCO has
been granted a total of 491 villas.
development shall be completed once the houses are constructed.
3. SCOPE OF WORE:
3. 1 GENERAL:
3.1. 1 Construct the Three (3) Dally Mosques as per the IFC drawings and in accordance with
Royal commission requirements.
3.1. 2 Description of the Mosques.
Type Bullt- up- Area No. to be constructed

2
450 Prayer capacity 1092 m 2
2
650 Prayer capacity 1575 m 1
3.1. 3 PC Contractor’s Responsibilities:
The PC contactor shall be responsible:
i. To be aware, well versed and complying with Royal Commissions requirement.
ii. To supply all agricultural soil required in green areas (planting works is excluded and
only optional) within the lot for each of the aforementioned villa types including all
associated boundary walls.
iii. To coordinate with the Statutory Authorities i.e. Marafiq, SEC and STC on the basic
requirements for tie-ins and other interfaces With existing and/or future facilities at
lot boundaries, are to be coordinated with the Statutory Authorities i.e. Maraflq, SEC
and STC, Permanent connection fees for power and water Will be paid by SAUDI
ARAMCO.
iv. To obtain all approvals from the related utility authorities to obtain the necessary
building permit for temporary facilities and permanent buildings.
v. For all the necessary coordination and support in the supply and Installation of wall-
hour meter by SCECO.
vi. For all the necessary coordination and support in the supply and installation of water
meters by Maraflq.
vii. To have investigated and acquainted itself with all general, local, climatic, physical,
geological, and sub-surface conditions at the site and assumes full responsibility for all
mailers relating to works arising out of the bid documents.
viii. To provide all temporary facilities on site Without any cost to SAUDI ARAMCO
including but not limited to site offices, storage area, safety, security, water, power,
telephone, office & pantry consumables, office cleaning and maintenance, toilet
consumables, scaffolding etc as well as facilities for all domestic subcontractors and
SAUDI ARAMCO/Project Management Consultant Office.
ix. To provide trash bins and skips to manage waste items, location and distribution of
skips will be as per Royal Commission approval.
x. To keep the construction site clean and tidy by providing sufficient trash bins and
skips that meet Royal Commission requirements and will dispose of the waste to a
designated landfill area by Royal Commission. SAUDI ARAMCO will not accept any
uncleanness and untidiness within the construction site, If so, SAUDI ARAMCO will
require the PC Contractor to provide additional bins at their cost.
xi. To provide perimeter fence during the construction penod. Materials to be used shall
be as per the approved specification from Royal Commission, otherwise the PC
Contractor have to comply with Royal Commission Material Specification without
any cost to SAUDI ARAMCO.
xii. For all builders work in connection with any works related to the civil, electrical,
mechanical (HVAC), plumbing/sanitary/sewage included in the scope of work and
shall be included in the lump sum price. This includes but not limited to:
a. Concrete equipment bases/pads.
b. Pipe supports, plinths including embedment as necessary.
c. Hollow core slabs, support beams, columns and the like, together with
necessary waterproofing (membrane, elastomeric, integral type)/damp
proofing/ vapor barriers.
d. Roof access ladder.
e. Access panels in the false ceiling or shaft (if applicable).
xiii. To coordinate the requirements for all builders' work. No holes or fixings shall be cut
or formed without the pnor approval of SAUDI ARAMCO/Project Management
Consultant. No claim will be entertained for any abortive work executed due to lack
of coordination. Any changes made in the field verbally will be followed by written
agreement between Client's representative and that of PC Contractor's representative
duly signed by agreeing parties.
xiv. To submit complete set of as-built drawings for mosque (three hard copies + two soft
copies) and refer to Item 6.3.1 of this document.
xv. Upon completion of all fields testing, The PC Contractor to submit to SAUDI
ARAMCO/Project Management Consultant not limited to three (3) copies of
Operation and Maintenance Manuals In accordance to a pre-approved manual
structure and refer to Item 6.3.1 of this document.
xvi. To furnish all necessary labor, materials, tools and equipment to complete the work.
xvii. To provide sufficient technical manpower and workforce to deliver the project as per
schedule.
xviii. In case the PC Contractor doesn't meet the project schedule of delivery, SAUDI
ARAMCO has the right to oblige the PC Contractor to provide additional technical
manpower and workforce to meet the schedule without any cost to SAUDI
ARAMCO.
xix. To provide a house keeping pad for all floor mounted equipment. Pad shall be 100
mm minimum in height from finished floor/roof level.
3. 2 MOBILIZATION, TEMPORARY WORKS & PERMANENT WORKS:
3.2. 1 The PC Contractor shall be deemed to have allowed for any necessary mobilization and
relocation of such temporary works dunng the construction period as may be required in order
to complete the permanent works. Any proposed change In location or relocation of any
temporary works must be preceded by the submission of drawing(s), indicating such change to
SAUDI ARAMCO/Project Management Consultant for his approval.
3.2. 2 All temporary works shall be constructed with the standard for similar permanent facilities
and shall comply with the applicable rules, regulations and requirements of local authorities
having jurisdiction.
3.2. 3 Temporary facility shall be designed and constructed as per SAUDI ARAMCO's Space
requirement. See attached Scope of work for Temporary Facility in Attachment.
3.2. 4 The mobilization should commence in line with the General Conditions of Contract
(GCC) after the Notice to Proceed (NTP), letter of acceptance or date of signing the contract
and upon its issuance.
3.2. 5 Within seven (7) calendar days of the date of commencement of the mobilization period.
PC Contractor shall submit for approval fully dimensioned plans and details showing the
proposed location and layout on the site of all necessary temporary buildings Including SAUDI
ARAMCO/Project Management Consultant office accommodations (located apart from PC
Contractor's offices), materials stores, messing facilities etc., as such, plans and execution shall
also include (but not limited to) the following without any cost to SAUDI ARAMCO:
a. PC Contractor shall provide temporary access routes to, from, and upon the site.
Access should be well paved and passable at all times with proper markings and signs
for safety and convenience in identification especially by suppliers/vendors and other
entities that have business in the project.
b. PC Contractor shall provide temporary fencing, gates, and other security
requirements. The materials for the temporary fencing shall be approved by Royal
Commission.
c. PC Contractor shall provide covered or open areas designated for materials storage
with proper markings and signage whether for informative or warning.
d. PC Contractor shall provide area for Equipment and for construction light & heavy
vehicles parking (like: bobcat, dump trucks, bulldozer, backhoes and etc.).
e. PC Contractor shall provide vehicle parking for PC Contractors' personnel, covered
parking area for SAUDI ARAMCO/Project Management Consultant staff.
f. PC Contractor shall provide refuse storage arid collection points during the execution
of temporary and permanent works. Distribution of trash bins shall be as per Royal
Commission requirement.
g. PC Contractor shall provide project sign boards. safety signs, and accesses signs,
Signage shall be placed at strategic locations only, designated and approved by SAUDI
ARAMCO.
h. PC Contractor shall provide security services. The Contractor Security group shall be
duly responsible of safe keeping and preventing any trespassing within the entire
project and should have a close coordination SAUDI ARAMCO.
i. All the above mentioned services shall be provided and undertaken by PC Contractor
3. 3 TEMPORARY WATER, ELECTRICITY, FIREFIGHTING AND SEWAGE:
The Contractor shall:
3.3. 1 Provide fresh water supply, showing location of potable drinking water storage tanks,
tanker fill points.
3.3. 2 Provide temporary water lines of distribution within the project for the temporary facility
during the project execution.
3.3. 3 Provide temporary water supply for execution of permanent works until the temporary or
permanent water supply from Marafiq is acquired.
3.3. 4 Provide temporary power generation, temporary switch boards etc. for all temporary
facilities as required until the temporary or permanent power supply form SEC is acquired.
3.3. 5 Provide temporary power generation, temporary switch boards etc. for all execution of
permanent works as required until the temporary or permanent power supply form SEC is
acquired.
3.3. 6 Provide temporary fire protection facilities, showing location of the firefighting water
storage tanks, tanker fill points, pumping and fire hose stations plus fire extinguisher as per
Royal Commission requirement, within the project for the execution of permanent works.
3.3. 7 Pay all the bills of temporary electricity and water bills during the execution of works.
3.3. 8 Provide sewage disposal and surface water drainage for the temporary facility during the
project execution.
3.3. 9 Provide Telephone services & full IT Equipment in the temporary facility. (Not limited to
Computers, printers, scanners & Projector In the meeting room.).
3.3. 10 Provide the garbage collection and disposal services, this shall include collecting and
dumping of the bins from the site to RC land fill area as required.
3.3. 11 All the above mentioned services shall be provided and undertaken by the Contractor
3.3. 12 PC contractor shall provide smoking area for workers.
3. 4 ENGINEERING (- GENERAL REQUIREMENTS):
The Contractor shall be deemed to have scrutinized, and satisfied itself as to the completeness, accuracy
and sufficiency of the engineering deliverables for the purposes of carrying out and completing the work
requirements and passing the tests at completion. Any data or information received by the Contractor
from SAUDI ARAMCO/Project Management Consultant or otherwise, shall not relieve the Contractor
from Its responsibility for the execution of the works.
3.4. 1 Civil and Site Preparation Work (- General Requirements and Site Works):
3.4.4.1 The Contractor shall supply and construct all necessary works such as but not
limited to:
a. All surveying and setting out including provision and protection of local reference
survey stations. Survey monuments and survey control monuments and/or
benchmarks for setting out of the works are to be established on the work site and
described in the drawings. The Contractor shall carefully preserve all monuments,
benchmarks and reference points The Contractor will be charged with the expense of
replacement of any such items destroyed and shall be responsible for any mistake or
loss of time that may be caused. Permanent monuments or benchmarks which must
be removed or disturbed shall be protected until they can be properly referenced for
relocation The Contractor shall furnish materials and assistance for the proper
replacement of such monuments or benchmarks. Any approved changed that have
been made to all the referential markings should be reflected In the drawings and
revised drawings should be immediately and properly disseminated/coordinated to
the builders in the field to avoid costly mistake.
b. Site Preparation - Prepare site prior to construction of the proposed development. It
involves removal and disposal of all existing construction materials, debris and
unsuitable materials present in the site. Clearing and grubbing for not less than 200
mm from the natural existing level.
c. Soil Improvements works are required, as Indicated in the attached Geotechnical
Investigation report. Contractor shall appoint an approved soil improvement
specialist to detailed engineering and construction of the necessary soil improvement
recommendations from Fuguro Suhaiml (Geotechnical Report SA13-1443 Rev. 2).
The work shall be executed by an approved Geotechnical Specialist construction
Contractor.
d. Specifically, the Contractor is to:
a. . Complete a detailed and substantiated design for the necessary geotechnical
works to be completed.
b. Execute and the approved soil improvement works in line with the approved
design.
c. Substantiate the works through an approved testing programme.
e. Dispose all of the above-mentioned materials off the site to an approved Royal
Commission, Jubail dumping area. Disposal activities shall comply with RC
Environmental Regulations which require hazardous and non-hazardous waste
generators to obtain RC Pre-approval and complete waste manifests for transportation
of waste away from generator's facility.
f. The project area will require fill to match the elevation of the existing adjacent streets
and provide appropriate slope along the driveways and parking areas. Significant fill is
expected to occur on the area and should be compacted based on the recommendation
of geotechnical Investigation report and standard requirements. The grading for this
project will also take into consideration the existing topography of the area, adjacent
street elevations and the overall storm water drainage requirements for the parcel area.
g. Site Layout - A site development plan for the proposed mosques has been prepared
based on the requirements of the project. Coordinates, dimensions, and site layout
shall be subject for review and approval by SAUDI ARAMCO and Royal Commission
(RC) and shall be In conformance with the approved master plan for mosques.
h. Driveways and Parking Spaces:
o The horizontal design for the asphalt paved driveways and parking areas
shall conform to the approved site master plan for the mosques. The vertical
alignment shall have smooth curves and the least possible number of grade
brakes. Driveway and parking spaces configuration and grading shall take
into consideration the adjacent street paving final elevations. Driveways will
have a longitudinal slope of (3.00%) maximum and (0.20%) minimum, with
generally (1.5% to 2%) cross slope. The proposed driveway and parking
plans including geometry are shown on Drawings.
o Pavement Design - Structural design of the pavement shall be In accordance
with the requirements of the Royal Commission Standard and Specification
and AASHTO Guide to Design of Pavement and Structures. Driveways,
parking areas and pavement subject to vehicular traffic shall be designed for
AASHTO H-20 loading.
o Sub-grade - Sub-grade surface shall be compacted not less than 95% of the
maximum dry density and shall not differ by more than 2,00% from the
calculated optimum moisture content. The sub-grade materials to be used
shall not be less than (A-2-4) per AASHTO M-145. The California Bearing
Ratio (CBR) for the soaked sample shall not be less than 25% and the
minimum thickness shall be in accordance to the requirement per Royal
Commission standards and general specifications.
o Sub-base - The materials shall be capable of forming a durable and stable
sub-base layer after being wetted and compacted. The aggregate shall be solid
water resistant materials from natural resources or crushed rocks. A sub-base
with a minimum CBR of 50% will be provided with a minimum thickness of
25 cm. The quality of compaction of sub-base shall be 100% of the
maximum dry density at uniform moisture content (not to differ by more
than 2% from the calculated optimum moisture content). Field density
determination shall be made in accordance with AASHTOT-191.
o Aggregate Base course for roadways will have a minimum thickness of 20
cm The materials shall be crushed coarse or fine aggregates or furnace slag
after being broken and screened to achieved the required gradation and
verify its density. The California Bearing Ratio (CBR) value of the aggregate
base coarse shall not be less than 65% and the quality of compaction of
aggregate shall be 100% of the maximum dry density at uniform moisture
content will not differ by more than 2% from calculated optimum moisture
content. Field density determination shall be made in accordance with
AASHTOT-191.
o Emulsified Asphalt Treated Base - The asphaltic emulsion treated base and
surface course shall have a minimum thickness of 12 cm. The surface prior
to emulsified treated base shall be provided with prime coat in accordance
with the requirements specified in the Royal Commission standards and
specification and be allowed to cure for at least 48 hours.
o Asphalt Pavement Restoration - Where excavation for utility installation will
take place on the existing asphalt paved area, restoration of such pavement
shall be in compliance with the requirements per Royal Commission
standards and specifications.
i. Storm Water Drainage System - The storm water at the premises of
the proposed mosques surface flow towards the adjacent streets.
The proposed storm water drainage plan shall be based in the
approved Drawing/s, The storm water drainage system for the
mosques site shall be designed and to be constructed in accordance
with Royal Commission Standards in reference to the calculated
storm water run-off rates, storm return frequency and rainfall
intensity. Contractor shall connect to stub out left by Initial
Development Contractor.
ii. Water Supply and Fire Water Distribution System - The water
distribution shall be designed to meet the total demand
requirements of the Mosques including the firewater requirements.
The proposed water distribution system shall be based in the
approved Drawing/s. The proposed water distribution system will
be supplied from the main line. Connections have been left at lots
by initial development contractor The main loop and all fittings will
be Reinforced Thermosetting Resin Pipe (RTRP)/High Density
Polyethylene (HOPE) pipe materials for diameters up to 200 mm.
The water system shall be constructed in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendation and in accordance with the Royal
Commission requirements and standards. Specifications for fittings
shall be the same as the corresponding pipes. Contractor shall
supply and install meters and valves as required by RC and connect
to stub out left by Initial Development contractor.
k. Waste Water Collection and Disposal System - The waste water collection
system will compose of gravity main sewer pipes. The proposed underground
gravity sanitary sewer plan and manholes shall be based in the approved
drawing/s. The wastewater collection system from the mosques will be
connected main sewer. Contractor shall connect to stub out left by Initial
Development contractor. Gravity sewers for 200 mm and larger diameter will be
Fiberglass (GRP) type of pipe materials.
l. Irrigation System - The landscape areas will be provided with a new irrigation
system consisting of bubblers, drip emitters, and sprinkler system as applicable.
The required bubblers, drip emitters, and pop-up sprinklers for the irrigation
system will be connected to automatic controllers, solenoids control valves
backflow preventers, pressure regulator valves gate valves and isolation valves
as may be required. This project scope covers the entire Irrigation requirement
including all associated appurtenances. The main source of the irrigation water
supply for planting areas within the mosque site will be from the main irrigation
line. Contractor shall connect to stub out left by Initial Development contractor
and complete the system. Distribution mains and all fittings for the Irrigation
system will be uPVC Class 5 per SASO 8S14/15 pipe materials while for the
lateral pipe shall be High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) pipe materials.
Irrigation system design and construction shall also subject for approval of the
Royal Commission (RC) Jubail. The Contractor shall be responsible in obtaining
all the necessary design approvals from the Royal Commission.
m. The PC Contractor shall protect all existing infrastructure at all times and shall
be responsible for any or all damage to other contractors work already on site or
any adjoining property.
n. Testing of all materials as specified.
o. Interlock paving tiles including all consumables to complete the work.
p. Alterations to footpaths and sidewalks including modifications to ramp
entrances.
q. Temporary work, including removal and reinstatement at completion.
r. Onsite underground services and utilities, including potable water, sanitary
sewer lines, telecom and power complete with testing. Whilst the bid documents
show a typical site utilities coordination layout for each house type, The PC
Contractor is responsible to make the necessary allowances for each specific
house and submit the associated shop drawings.
s. Utility tie-ins to existing off-site services, The PC Contractor shall liaise with the
statutory authorities to agree on the location/details of tie-ins.
t. Trenching for electrical and telecommunication cables.
u. Chambers to underground services, including manholes, draw pits and valve
boxes, duct banks, catch basin and the like.
v. Underground storage tanks and their accessories.
3.4. 2 Architectural Work:
The PC Contractor shall supply and construct all necessary works such as but not limited to:
a. Preparation of shop drawings for buildings based on architectural system and details
shown on drawings. The PC Contractor shall submit shop drawings when required
for SAUDI ARAMCO/Project Management Consultant review and approval.
b. The floor plan requirements are indicated in construction drawings as listed in
drawing list no 711-Y01-20JI-GE-701 & 711-Y01-20JI-GE- 801, documents and
applicable RC Jubail standards and specifications.
c. Building Components & Finish Material (Finishes as specified on the drawings
prevail, where not specified on drawings finish as specified in Scope of Work for
Houses to be utilized).
o Provide and construct all external periphery walls with Concrete Masonry
Units as per wall type "Y" mentioned on Architectural drawing 711-Y01-
20JI-AE-701 & 711-Y01-20JI-AE-802 to AE- 803. Size of CMU block shall be
400x200x150 on both faces with 75 mm thick high density extruded
polystyrene Wall mate and or approved equal insulation.
o Interior walls and partitions shall be as wall types, ''V; X; X1; W" as
mentioned in Floor Plans drawing 711-Y01-20JI-AE-701 & 711-Y01-20JI-AE-
802 to AE-803. Type X1 walls shall be 2 hour fire rated Type Z shall be for
Concrete works.
o Provide and install granite tiles for Main and side entrances as mentioned
on Dwg. Nos. 711-Y01-20JI-AE-722 &711-Y01-20JI- AE-823.
o Provide and Install 200x200 and 300x300 non- slip unglazed ceramic tiles to
all wet areas as defined In floor plans Dwg. Nos. 711-Y01-20JI-AE-711 &
711-Y01-20JI-AE-812 and Floor finish Dwg. Nos, 711-Y01-20JI-AE-722 and
711-Y01-20JI-AE-823.
o Provide and install hardened concrete floor as and where mentioned on
floor plan dwg. 711-Y01-20JI-AE-701 and 711- Y01-20JI-AE-802 and floor
finish dwg. Nos. 711-Y01-20JI-AE- 722 and 711-Y01-20JI-AE-823.
o Provide and Install anti-static carpet for main prayer halls and women
prayer halls as mentioned in floor plans and floor finishes drawings (711-
Y01-20JI-AE-722 and 711-Y01-20JI-AE- 823).
o Provide and install marble tiles as mentioned In floor plans and floor
finishes drawing.
o Provide concrete floor for electrical room with epoxy resin finish as
mentioned in floor finish drawing (711-Y01-20JI-AE-723).
o Provide and install 200x400 glazed ceramic tiles as wainscot in all wet areas
as defined in floor finish drawing nos. (711-Y01- 20JI-AE-722 and 711-Y01-
20JI-AE-823).
o Provide and install 350x600 marble tiles as wainscot in mehrab, men's
prayer hall, women prayer hall, as mentioned in finish schedule drawing no.
(711-Y01-20JI-AE-722 and 711-Y01-20JI- AE-823).
o Provide and install 350x600 granite tiles as wainscot in women entrance
area, men entrance area and corridor as mentioned in finish schedule
drawing no, (711-Y01-20JI-AE-722 and 711- Y01-20JI-AE-823).
o Provide and Install marble water jet medallion as mentioned in finish
schedule drawing no. (711-Y01-20JI-AE-722 and 711- Y01-20JI-AE-823).
o Provide and apply plaster as specified in drawings to wall as mentioned in
floor finish drawing.
o Provide and apply painting and coating complete with surface preparation
to walls and ceiling as and where required at any floor at any height.
o Provide wooden/ phenol and metal doors complete with painting and
polishing as mentioned in Door and finish schedule drawing no AE-722 &
AE-723.
o Provide and install heavy duty, powder coated, double glazed aluminum
window as shown in Floor plan and Window schedule drawing no. 711-
Y01-20JI-AE-724 and AE-725.
o Provide and install wooden mushrobias (Screens) as shown In Window
Type and schedule drawing nos. 711-Y01-20JI-AE-724 to AE-725 & 711-
Y01-20JI-AE-824 to AE-825.
o Provide and install suspended gypsum board with grooves, 600x600 acoustic
tiles and Aluminum strip suspended ceiling 100mm in width complete with
suspension system as defined in reflected ceiling drawing nos.711-Y01-20JI-
AE-705 & 711-Y01- 20JI-AE-806.
o Provide, lay and install roof finishes as specified in drawing nos. 711-YOl-
20JI-AE-709 and 710 & 711-Y01-20JI-AE-810 and 811.
o Provide and install HILAL complete with all requirements as shown in
Detail E of drawing as referenced in item 2.3.1.3.19 above.
o Provide and install 500x500x50 concrete pavers on roof as shown on
drawing nos. 711-Y01-20JI-AE-702 & 711-YOl-20JI- AE-803.
o Provide pee scuppers and down spout as mentioned in drawing no. 711-
Y01-20JI-AE-702.
o Provide, install and fix toilet accessories as mentioned in drawing nos. 711-
Y01-20JI-AE-711 to 712 & 711-Y01-20JI-AE- 812 to 813.
o Construct minaret complete with specifications as mentioned in drawing
nos. 711-Y01-20JI-AE-713 & 711-Y01-20JI-AE-814.
o Construct dome complete with all required finishing material as mentioned
in drawing nos. 711-Y01-20JI-AE-714 & 711-Y01- 20JI-AE-815.
o Provide, construct, apply and prepare all requirements of interior finishing
as specified in miscellaneous details drawing nos. 711- Y01-20JI-AE.715 to
AE-718 & 711-Y01-20JI-AE.816 to AE-819.
o Contractor shall Work according to the required RC specifications and
standards as mentioned for each finishing material in the above mentioned
drawings.
o All the finishing material for mosque for 650 persons are Similar to
finishing materials as mentioned for mosque for 450 persons, the
construction contractor is therefore, required to refer to drawing nos. 711-
Y01-20JI-AE-802 thru 711-Y01-20JI-AE-825 with respect to item 2.3.1.3.1
thru 2.3.1.3.27 applicable for mosque for 650 persons.
o Kitchen applial1ces will be required for the three mosques' guard rooms.
o Contractor IS also required to complete the construction work with
reference to applicable IBC and RC standards and RC specifications relative
to the materials mentioned for respective areas.
o Contractor shall get the approval for all materials for each mosques from
SAUDI ARAMCO and Royal Commission before procuring the said
matenalMosque-450 drawing no,711-Y01- 20J1-AE-706, Room Furnishing
schedule shows Quran Shelves, Shoe Racks, Back rest, Closet, Bed,
Amplifier rack & Equipment schedule shows Electrical fountain, hand dryer
& Refrigerator are all to be provided by contractor.
o Referring to note 4 In drawing AE-701, it indicates that all concrete
masonry walls to extend to underside of structure (for Fire walls), refer to
drawing AE-712 for non-fire wall, and just extend 200 mm over suspended
ceiling.
3.4. 3 Structural Work (Concrete: Reinforced and Pre-cast Concrete):
a. All concreting works such as slabs, columns, beams, footings and stairs among others
shall be cast-in-situ using ready-mix concrete where stated on the.
b. The PC Contractor to prepare submittal forms and submit all necessary materials,
technical submittals including but not limited to proposed suppliers, subcontractors,
method statements, mix design data, among others; for approval of SAUDI
ARAMCO/Project Management Consultant prior to installation and fabrication. Any
materials installed on the buildings without any approval Will be removed when it
does not conform to the drawings, plans and specification and other contractual
documents.
c. The PC Contractor shall prepare shop drawings for buildings based on structural
system and details shown on drawings The PC Contractor shall submit additional
shop drawings when required for SAUDI ARAMCO/Project Management Consultant
review and approval. The PC Contractor also to submit bar bending schedule prior to
start any work.
d. The PC Contractor shall supply and execute ail structural members shown on the
drawings including but not limited to foundations, beams, walls, columns and
grade/suspended slabs. This will include the reinforcement and shuttering and any
other works related to structure shown on the drawings or stated in the specifications
e. The PC Contractor will execute all the Civil and Structural related works including all
foundations, steel frames or pedestals for the mechanical and electrical works
whenever and wherever it is necessary under the Contract as shown in the Drawings
or specifications required as common practice.
f. The PC Contractor shall ensure compliance with Structural Design Drawings
including all the associated (Structural Design) Notes included In Structural Design
package.
g. Metal works for Monkey ladder shall be but not limited to G.I pipe 25mm diameter
and painted with same color with the external paint. PC Contractor to consider
standard.
3.4. 4 Mechanical Work (HVAC, Plumbing and Fire Protection System):
3.4.1.1.1 HVAC Primary Scope Of Works:
3.4.1.1.1Supply, install, test and commission the following as shown on drawings and in
accordance with technical specifications.
a. Cetralised Package system - The central HVAC system consists of packaged
type A/C units to be located on the rooftop of the Buildings where
considered. The packaged type A/C units will be connected to a ducting
system leading to designated rooms inside the Building for delivering
conditioned air to the Intended areas through air diffusers and grilles. The
A/C unit selected will be of constant air volume type, The temperature
inside the building will be controlled through wall mounted thermostats.
Central air conditioning will be distributed to the main rooms. Service
rooms such as toilets and storage will be cooled by vicinity or by providing
a return grill where required. Vertical ducting will be provided with a
dedicated chase located at first floor level to connect rooftop equipment to
the distribution horizontal ducts at ground floor level. First floor ducting
will be connected directly through the ceiling plenum of the upper floor.
The chase size will be determined to provide sufficient space for the duct
system.
b. Mini split and concealed type air conditioning equipment and accessories.
c. Refrigerant pipework including pipe fillings, supports and thermal
insulation.
d. Ceiling mounted exhaust fans for toilet & bath rooms.
e. Inline exhaust fan for kitchen.
f. Kitchen hood extract air duct work.
3.4.1.1.2The PC Contractor shall supply and construct all necessary works such as but
not limited to the following unless otherwise directed by the SAUDI
a. Produce shop drawings for approval prior to procuring the HVAC system.
b. Heating ventilating and air conditioning system shall be installed in
accordance with latest guidelines, specifications and standards and as per
manufacturer's manual and other approved submittal data.
c. All heating ventilating and air conditioning drawings shall be read In
conjunction with general notes, specifications, miscellaneous details:
including architectural, electrical, structural, piping and instrumentation
drawings.
d. All duct work and accessories shall be designed and fabricated in
accordance with the latest edition of sheet metal and air conditioning
contractor national association (SMACNA) duct construction standards.
e. Access to all HVAC equipment and accessories shall be provided.
f. All duct sizes indicated are inside dimension.
g. All rotating and sliding components of equipment shall be guarded in
accordance with OSHA requirements.
h. The PC Contractor shall be responsible for preparing shop drawings,
technical calculation data sheet, verification of heat load calculations, static
pressure calculations and verification of equipment proposed prior to
ordering the equipment.
i. Ductwork seams and joints shall be sealed with specified sealant (if
applicable).
j. All ceiling access panel shall not be less than 500 x 500 mm.
k. All dimensions must be verified, any discrepancies shown in the drawing
must be immediately reported to the engineer in charge.
l. Mini split unit condensate drain pipes shall be connected to the nearest
floor drain with proper slope according to the standards.
m. The nominated subcontractor is to identify and coordinate all openings thru
roof with architectural, structural and electrical drawings before the roof
construction.
n. All pressure drops indicated in the schedules are for reference only. The PC
Contractor is to check and calculate the pressure drops against equipment,
fittings, accessories and unit installed as per the shop drawing submitted for
approval.
o. All duct wall penetrations shall have no less than 20 gauge sheet metal
angles flashing at both sides of the wall and the space between the duct and
wall shall be filled with 48 kg/m2 density fiber glass insulation.
p. All duct roof penetration cavities shall be filled With 48 kg/m 2 density fiber
glass insulation and have no less than 20 gauge sheet metal angles flashing
secured to the roof slab.
q. The PC Contractor shall submit the sectional view drawings of areas where
anticipated congestion might occur to resolve clashes.
r. Provide supports and hangers required for proper installation of equipment.
s. Refrigerant piping shall be Installed as shown in the equipment detailed
drawings.
t. Refrigerant piping insulation shall be provided as shown in the equipment
detailed drawings.
3.4.4.2 HVAC TESTING. ADJUSTING AND BALANCING (Mechanical):
3.4.4.2.1The minimum requirements for testing, adjusting and balancing (TAB) of
heating, ventilating and air conditioning (HVAC) distribution system shall be as
follows:
a. The PC Contractor shall carry out the testing, adjusting and balancing of
the HVAC system as per SMACNA or NEBB procedural standards.
b. All necessary test equipment, instruments, materials, and labor required for
performing the entire test described in these specifications shall be provided
as a part of the work of this section.
c. The PC Contractor shall review and be thoroughly familiar with the basic
equipment layout prior to ceiling and wall installation. Prior to any closing-
in of ductwork, verify that all fittings, dampers, control devices, test devices
and valves are properly located and installed.
d. Examine each air distribution system to see that it is free from obstruction
and that the moving equipment is lubricated and functioning properly and
that the required filters are clean and installed.
e. The PC Contractor shall submit the testing, adjusting and balancing test
procedures to the SAUDI ARAMCO/Project Management Consultant for
approval prior to starting the TAB work.
f. The PC Contractor shall use test instruments that have been calibrated
within a time period recommended by the manufacturer or in the
SMACNA HVAC systems testing, adjusting and balancing manual and that
they have been checked for accuracy prior to the start of the testing,
adjusting and balancing activity.
g. Verify that all the equipment performs as specified.
h. Adjust kitchen exhaust inline fan to handle and properly distribute the
design air flow within + 10% of specified air flow.
i. Test all condensate drainage piping from air treatment and handling
equipment by plugging outlets and filling to high point of each drain.
j. The PC Contractor shall document the results of all testing on SMACNA or
NEBB TAB reports forms and submit specified copies for approval and
record.
3.4.4.3 WARRANTY:
3.4.4.4.1For product and workmanship related warranties, refer to Schedule A - General
Conditions of Contract.
3.4.4.4 PLUMBING PRIMARY SCOPE OF WORKS (Mechanical):
3.4.4.4.1Supply, install, test and commission the following as shown on the drawings and
in accordance with technical specifications.
a. Install water heaters as specified on drawings.

b. Install sanitary fixtures and brass fixtures for sanitary appliances including
drainage and water supply connections.
c. External cold water pipe work including pipe fittings and supports.
d. Internal cold water pipe work including pipe fittings and supports.
e. Internal hot water pipe work including pipe fittings, support and thermal
insulation.
f. Internal drainage pipe work including fillings, supports and accessories.
g. External drainage pipe work including fittings, supports and accessories.
h. Floor drain, floor/wall cleanouts, p-traps, grease trap, ground clean outs,
building clean-outs, vent bowels etc.
3.4.4.5 Piping - General Notes:
3.4.4.5.1 The plumbing drawings shall be read in conjunction with other related
drawings, general diagrams and miscellaneous details, notes, specifications and
bill of quantities.
3.4.4.5.2 The PC Contractor shall execute all of the work in accordance with
approved shop and Installation drawings as per the provisions of the
specifications and International plumbing code.
3.4.4.5.3 No portion of any plumbing system shall be concealed until Inspected
tested and approved.
3.4.4.5.4 Install all piping to allow thermal expansion and contraction without
injury to piping, equipment or structure.
3.4.4.5.5 Conceal all pipe installations in pipe chases, utility spaces below grade
of floors, etc. unless otherwise indicated.
3.4.4.5.6 Install all piping free of sags or bends and with ample space between
piping for proper maintenance.
3.4.4.5.7 Install piping at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal or
bent piping will not be permitted.
3.4.4.5.8 Protect all piping from entrance of dirt or other foreign materials during
the construction period. At the completion of the project, all dirt al1d foreigl1
matter in the piping shall be removed completely.
3.4.4.5.9 Piping passing through exterior building walls shall be caulked.
3.4.4.5.10 Provide drain lines from all relief valves and condensate pans and run
drain line full size to the nearest floor or equipment drain.
3.4.4.5.11 Verify existing grades, inverts and topographic conditions prior to any
trenching, excavation, or installations. In the event of existing conditions prevent
installation in accordance with contract documents, immediately notify the
3.4.4.5.12 Horizontal piping shall slope uniformly without sags or humps to
provide for complete drainage of systems and elimination of air.
3.4.4.5.13 Piping shall be cut accurately to measurements established at the site,
worked into place without springing or forcing, and shall clear ail windows,
doors and other openings. Cutting or other weakening of building structure to
facilitate piping installation is not permitted; install to permit free expansion and
contraction without damage. No pipe should be subjected to torsion or
elongation effect.
3.4.4.5.14 Provide necessary temporary connections, valves, oversize flushing
connections, etc. as required to properly clean and test systems.
3.4.4.5.15 Coordinate piping installations with structure, lighting, electrical
conduit and all other materials and equipment.
3.4.4.5.16 Any leaking joint shall be completely disassembled and replaced with
new materials.
3.4.4.5.17 All sockets and pipe ends of PVC shall be cleaned and solvent cement
applied for full circumferential cover.
3.4.4.5.18 Locate all equipment that must be serviced, operated, or maintained, in
fully accessible positions, Deviations from the drawings may be discussed with
the SAUDI ARAMCO/Project Management Consultant and proceed after
approval.
3.4.4.5.19 PC Contractor shall be responsible for all cutting, fitting, or patching of
his work which may be required to make its several parts come together properly
and fit It to receive, or be received, by work of other trades, Cutting of structural
members shall not be done without approval of SAUDI ARAMCO/Project
3.4.4.5.20 Place sleeves through all the walls, floors and ceilings during the initial
construction where it IS necessary for piping to go through when this is not
done, do all cutting and patching required for the installation of the work Any
damage caused to the building by this cutting and patching, shall be corrected at
no additional cost. No piping will be allowed to pass though structural concrete
(beams, girders, columns, suspended slabs) unless otherwise approved and
permitted by the SAUDI ARAMCO / Project Management Consultant in
writing.
3.4.4.5.21 Patching of all openings for new installations {provision for future
expansion} and all openings resulting from the removal or relocation of any
installations shall be done by craftsmen skilled in the particular trade affected,
with same materials as of adjoining openings.
3.4.4.5.22 Supports, hangers, anchors or guides shall be provided for all horizontal
and vertical piping.
3.4.4.5.23 Plumbing works herein shall be done in accordance with the provision
of RC standards and International Plumbing Codes.
3.4.4.5.24 Before performing any work, The PC Contractor shall thoroughly
examine all existing conditions, point of connections, sizes, depths, locations,
etc.
3.4.4.5.25 Drawings are diagrammatic and do not show all the offsets, bends, etc.
which may be required for proper installations of work. Such work shall be
provided with additional bends and offsets as necessary and verified at the site.
3.4.4.5.26 Locate floor drain and floor cleanout to suit floor tiles.
3.4.4.5.27 Provide PVC pipe sleeve with caulking for all pipes passing thru
concrete structures.
3.4.4.5.28 The plumbing system shall be designed in accordance with the local
Saudi codes and specifications and in the absence of a Saudi Code, in accordance
with the International Plumbing Codes (IPC - 2009).
3.4.4.5.29 Any conflict or deviation from the above mentioned standards require a
waiver from SAUDI ARAMCO/Project Management Consultant.
3.4.4.5.30 The PC Contractor shall submit shop drawings for the plumbing
systems and plumbing fixtures in compliance with SAUDI ARAMCO/Project
Management Consultant requirement.
3.4.4.5.31 Provision to access all serviceable plumbing equipment and accessories
shall be made. Chipping/demolition of concrete on walls and floors to bury or to
conceal piping/electrical system aside from those Indicated in the drawings will
need the written approval from SAUDI ARAMCO/Project Management
Consultant.
3.4.4.5.32 Each piece of equipment and all of the systems shall be adjusted to
ensure proper functioning of all controls, elimination of all noise and vibration
and left in excellent operating condition.
3.4.4.6 SOIL WASTE AND VENT PIPING SYSTEM:
3.4.4.6.1 Horizontal lines shall be supported by well secured heavy- strap
hangers, Vertical lines shall be secured strongly by hooks to the building frame
and a suitable bracket or chair shall be provided at places where they start.
3.4.4.6.2 All main vertical soil and waste stacks shall be extended full size to and
above the roof line to act as vents, except where otherwise specifically indicated.
3.4.4.6.3 Vent pipes in roof spaces shall run as close as possible to underside of
roof, with horizontal piping pitched down to stacks without forming traps.
Vertical pipes may be connected into one main vent riser above the highest
vented fixtures.
a. Where an end of circuit vent pipe for any fixtures or line of fixture is
connected to vent line serving other fixtures, the connections shall be at
least 1200 mm above the floor on which the fixtures are located to
prevent the use of any vent line as waste.
b. Horizontal waste lines receiving the discharge from two or more
fixtures shall be provided with vents before the last fixture unless
separate venting of fixtures is noted.
3.4.4.6.4 Rough-in for pipes and fixtures shall be carried along with the
building construction. Correctly located openings of proper sizes shall
be provided where required In the walls and floors for the passage of
pipes.
3.4.4.6.5 All changes in pipe sizes on soil waste and drain lines shall be
made with reducing fittings or reducers.
a. All changes in direction shall be made by the appropriate use
of forty five degrees wyes, or long sweep bends, except that
sanitary tees may be used on vertical stacks and short quarter
bends or elbows may be used in soil and waste lines where the
change In direction of floor is from the horizontal to the
vertical and on the discharge line from the water closet.
3.4.4.6.6 Ali vent pipes passing through the roof shall be flashed as
indicated on the drawing.
3.4.4.6.7 Soil and waste below grade shall be 2% minimum towards flow
for 4" diameter and below and 1% for pipes above 4" diameter
unless otherwise specified Install immediately after excavation. Lay
pipe so that entire length bears on firm soil. Excavate for hub. Do
not backfill until installation has been observed and approved by
SAUDI ARAMCO/Project Management Consultant. Verify
elevations of the sewer line at different point before Installation
Backfilling materials should be suitable selected fill materials free
from harmful objects like woods, timbers or any materials which
might be breeding grounds for termites or harmful Insects.
a. Soil and waste above grade shall be as below grade piping.
Hang each entirely to its slope. Support vertical stacks at each
floor, both horizontally and vertically.
b.Vents slope up to high point, connect multiple vents to single
vent before penetrating roof, Hang each length of vent pipe
from structure to grade.
3.4.4.6.8 All vertical piping shall be supported at each floor
level with clamps and spring hangers. The maximum spacing
for horizontal pipes of 100 mm diameter or larger shall not
exceed 2 0 meters. For pipes less than 100 mm diameter the
spacing of hangers shall be maximum of 1.50 meters on
centers.
3.4.4.6.9 Cast Iron sleeves shall be provided for pipes passing
through walls, partitions or floors and fitted Into place at time
of construction, Each sleeve shall extend through its respective
wall, floor, and shall be cut flush with each surface except
where clamping flanges are used. All adjoining parts of the
structures should be left in good conditions and finished to the
satisfaction of SAUDI ARAMCO/Project Management
Consultant.
3.4.4.6.10 All stacks shall be provided with accessible cleanouts
positioned above the flood level of the highest fixture.
3.4.4.6.11 Drainage, vent and storm systems within the interior
of all villas shall be tested by the PC Contractor and approved
by the SAUDI ARAMCO/Project Management SAUDI
ARAMCO/Project Management Consultant In accordance
with the provisions of the International Plumbing Codes.
3.4.4.6.12 Combine vent stacks with soil and waste slack before
passing through roof.
3.4.4.6.13 Vent through roof shall be extended through its
flashing and shall terminate vertically not less than 150 mm
above the roof nor less than 300 mm from any vertical surface
and terminate with vent cap.
3.4.4.6.14 Concrete encase the underground sanitary sewer and
waste pipe, if required by the common practice and to the
discretion of the SAUDI ARAMCO/Project Management
Consultant.
3.4.4.7 POTABLE WATER PIPING SYSTEM:
3.4.4.7.1 All supplies, hardware, trim traps, etc. to fixtures and equipment shall be chrome
plated If exposed to view.
3.4.4.7.2 No underground or under slab water piping within building shall be permitted
unless specifically approved by SAUDI ARAMCO/Project Management Consultant.
3.4.4.7.3 Water pipes shall not be run or laid in the same trench with building sewer or
drainage piping. The bottom of water pipe at all points shall be at least 300 mm above
the top of sewer line when crossing occur.
3.4.4.7.4 Devices installed in the potable water supply system for protection against
backflow or back siphon age shall be maintained in accessible position and installed
In the direction as specified by the manufacturer.
3.4.4.7.5 Domestic water systems shall be flushed free of all foreign material prior to
usage. Sterilization shall be performed in accordance with the AVWVA
recommendation.
3.4.4.7.6 All domestic hot and cold water piping shall run generally in the space above
false ceiling and in the pipe chases.
3.4.4.7.7 All internal hot and cold water pipes inside the walls for final termination to the
fixtures shall be copper pipe type L in accordance with ASTM B88, Cold water pipes
below ground to be wrapped by DENSO type and hot water pipe above ground shall
be wrapped by insulation.
3.4.4.7.8 The size of all PVC and copper pipes shown are nominal outside diameter.
3.4.4.7.9 Isolating valve shall be provided to each main branch and chrome plated brass
angle valves shall be provided to each fixture.
3.4.4.8 Testing and Balancing Procedure:
3.4.4.8.1The PC Contractor shall completely test all water system as part of work. The
term "water system" shall be understood and intended to mean all cold and hot water
connections and associated equipment connected to the system including the
building irrigation system.
3.4.4.8.2The testing work shall be supervised by certified personnel experienced in testing
procedure.
3.4.4.8.3All water system piping shall be tested for maximum working pressure equivalent
to 344.5 Kpa (50 PSI) air pressure or 150% of the area working pressure, valves shall
be tested for maximum working pressure equivalent to 230 Kpa air pressure as
specified by International Plumbing Code and Regulation of Saudi Building Code.
3.4.4.9 TESTING PLUMBING AND WATER SYSTEM:
3.4.4.9.1 Test, Flushing and Sterilization:
a. The plumbing system shall be tested in accordance with the
National Standard Plumbing Code Procedures.
i. Sewage systems - 3 meter head from the last highest
fixture/fitting for 24 hours duration.
ii. Hot and cold water supply - 10 bars pressure for 24 hours
duration.
3.4.4.9.2 Defective Work:
a. If inspection or test shows defects, such defective work or material
shall be replaced or repaired as necessary and inspection and test
shall be repeated. Repairs to piping shall be made with new
materials. No caulking of screwed joints or holes will be accepted.
3.4.4.9.3 Operational Test:
a. Upon completion of and prior to acceptance of the installation, the
PC Contractor shall subject the plumbing system to operating tests
to demonstrate satisfactory functional and operational efficiency
Such operating test shall cover a period of not less than 24 hours
for each system and shall include the following information In a
report with conclusion as to the adequacy of the system.
i. Time, date and duration of test.
ii. Water pressures at the most remote and the highest
fixtures.
iii. Operation of each fixture and fixture trim.
iv. Operational of each valve and faucet.
v. Temperature of each domestic hot-water supply.
vi. Operation of each floor drain by flooding with water.
vii. Operation of each vacuum breaker and backflow
preventer.
3.4.4.9.4 Sterilization of Hot & Cold Water System:
a. After pressure test have been made, the entire domestic hot and
cold water distribution system to be sterilized shall be thoroughly
flushed with water of sufficient velocity until all entrained dirt and
other foreign material have been removed, before introducing
chlorinating material. The chlorinating material shall be either
liquid chlorine conforming to AWVVA 8301 or hypochlorite
conforming to AWVVA8300 Water chlorination procedure shall be
in accordance with AWVVAM20.
3.4.4.9.5 Hot & Cold Water System Flushing:
a. After tests are completed, potable water piping shall be flushed. In
general, sufficient water shall be used to produce a minimum water
velocity of 0.76 MPS through piping being flushed. Flushing shall
be continued until discharge water shows no discoloration. System
shall be drained at low points. Strainer screens shall be removed,
cleaned and replaced in line. After flushing and cleaning, systems
shall be prepared for service by immediately filling water piping
with clean, fresh potable water Any stoppage, discoloration, or
other damage to finish, furnishings, or parts of the building, due to
the PC Contractor's failure to properly clean the piping system,
shall be repaired by tJ1ePC Contractor. When the work is
complete, the hot-water system shall be adjusted for uniform
circulation Flush valves and automatic control devices shall be
adjusted for proper operation.
3.4.4.10 WARRANTY:
For product and workmanship related warranties, refer to Schedule A:
 General Conditions of Contract.
3.4.4.11 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM PRIMARY SCOPE OF WORKS:
3.4.4.11.1 Supply, install, test and commission the following as shown on
drawings and in accordance with technical specifications:
a. Fire suppression sprinkler system.
b. Fire extinguishers.
3.4.4.11.2 The fire protection system shall comply with NFPA code and
must be approved by the local authority having jurisdiction The PC
Contractor shall be responsible for getting the required approval of the entire
fire protection system from local civil defense authority.
3.4.4.12 Inspection and Testing:
3.4.4.13.1 A thorough visual inspection of the installed system shall be
performed as per NFPA requirements for proper size, supports, location and
tie-ins.
i. Fire extinguishing systems shall comply with NFPA standards.
o Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing
fire extinguishers and mounting brackets.
o Coordinate exact location of all fire extinguishers with electrical
panel location, sizes, architectural equipments and light
switches. Submit shop drawings for SAUDI ARAMCO/Project
Management Consultant approval.
o Mounting Height -Install fire extinguishers mounted on
hangers or brackets attached to a wall so that the top of the
extinguisher is not more than 1.067 m above the floor. In no
case shall the clearance between the bottom of the fire
extinguisher and the floor be less than 100 mm.
ii. Package System - The Package system is to be balanced and operated for
a 24 hour period to confirm the system meets the design requirements
on airflow and controls temperature in respective spaces.
iii. Smoke Detector/Heat Detector:
i. The smoke detector shall be ceiling mounted, optical type or
ionization type, UL Listed, 220V, 60Hz and 9V battery back-up,
self-alarm,
ii. The heat detector shall be ceiling mounted, UL Listed, 220V, 60Hz
and 9V battery back-up, self-alarm.
3.4.4.13 Installation and Testing:
3.4.4.13.1 Materials, products and equipment furnished by the PC
Contractor shall be Installed and all work shall be performed in a first class
workman-like manner, in conformity with the best trade, practices, to
produce satisfactory results, in a safe, neat, orderly appearance and to
facilitate operating, servicing, maintaining and repairing.
3.4.4.13.2 Smoke &Heat detectors shall conform to NFPA applicable
standards.
3.4.5 Electrical Work (Electrical):
3.4.6.1 The PC Contractor shall supply and construct all necessary works such
as but not limited to:
3.4.5.1.1Complete supply, Installation, testing and commissioning of all electrical items as
per the lender documents.
3.4.5.1.2All provisions but not limited with the above item 3.4.5 shall have complete
piping works and wiring works for lighting points and wiring devices, to be prepared
for fixture installations.
3.4.5.1.3All electrical equipment and materials shall be in accordance with the NEC &
SASO standards and specifications.
3.4.5.1.4The Contractor shall provide all equipment and labor as deemed necessary for
the proper execution of the work.
3.4.5.1.5All work shall be performed in professional manner, in conformance With the
applicable Saudi codes and standards and the best electrical engineering practice.
3.4.5.1.6Work shall be performed by skilled workers appropriately equipped to produce
satisfactory results in a safe and proper manner so as to avoid undue stresses.
3.4.5.1.7It shall be the PC Contractors sole responsibility to:
a. Obtain Saudi Electric Company -Eastern Operating Area (SEC-EOA)
necessary approvals.
b. Follow strictly SEC-EGA standard and regulations.
c. Closely coordinate With SEC-EOA with regards to the utility interface.
d. Coordinate with SEC-EGA.
3.4.5.1.8 The PC Contractor shall be fully responsible for any mechanical damage upon
installation of various Items and their related accessories.
3.4.5.1.9Submit for approval before any material delivery to site complete technical
material submittal including manufacture name, country of origin, local
agent/supplier details, compliance statement, schematic/single line diagram, original
catalogue/data sheets and sample(s).
3.4.5.1.10 Submit the test certificates of the materials/electrical equipment for
SAUDI ARAMCO/Project Management consultant review upon receiving the
material/equipment on site along with an inspection.
3.4.5.1.11 Store all the critical electrical equipment in dust free controlled
temperature/atmosphere and preserve the materials according to manufacturer
instruction.
3.4.5.1.12 Submit before commencing site installation works, complete shop
drawing set for each type of villa for SAUDI ARAMCO/Project Management
Consultant review and approval.
3.4.5.1.13 Workmanship of electrical installations shall ensure aesthetical view.
3.4.5.1.14 Submit installation Inspection request for SAUDI ARAMCO/Project
Management Consultant review and approval.
3.4.5.1.15 Submit testing and commissioning method statements for all electrical
systems, Components of every system for SAUDI ARAMCO/Project Management
Consultant review and approval.
3.4.5.1.16 The PC Contractor shall carry out all site tests, for each components of
every system In accordance with the approved testing and commissioning method
statements/ procedures. Testing and commissioning activities shall commence after
clearance of all snags raised on the installations inspection.
3.4.5.1.17 All tests shall be subject to witness by SAUDI ARAMCO/Project
Management Consultant. At-least four (4) weeks prior to scheduled tests, the PC
Contractor shall submit to the SAUDI ARAMCO/Project Management Consultant
outline testing and commissioning plan. The PC Contractor shall submit
request/Invitation for test witnessing at least two (2) working days before the tests
planned date.
3.4.5.1.18 The PC Contractor shall provide all test instruments, equipment and
accessories necessary for demonstration and putting the equipment into operation
before commissioning All testing equipment shall be calibrated by approved
authorities and calibration certificates shall be submitted to SAUDI
ARAMCO/Project Management Consultant for their review and approval.
3.4.5.1.19 All installation shall be in accordance with National Electrical Code
(NEG).
3.4.6 TELECOMMUNICATION WORK:
3.4.6.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
3.4.6.1.1This Section specifies the minimum technical requirements for
supplying, installing, storing, handling, testing and commissioning of
equipment (wherever applicable), wires, cables, and connecting devices used
in DATANOICE/PTV system, SMATV system and intercom systems
within the villas.
3.4.6.1.2Where works interface with Saudi Telecommunication Company (STC),
the equipment/materials and installation shall comply with STC standards
latest revision.
3.4.6.1 SECTION INCLUDES:
3.4.6.2.1Supply and installation of all necessary hardware for cable runs such as
conduits, pull boxes, channels, ducts, support units and conduits for the
future extension.
3.4.6.3 REFERENCES:
3.4.6.3.1The referred codes and standards are intended to provide an acceptable
level of quality for materials and products.
3.4.6.3.2The latest revision of the referred codes and standards shall be used
wherever applicable.
3.4.6.3.3 Reference standards:
a. Saudi Telecom Standards.
b. National Electrical Code (NEC) standards.
c. Telecommunication Industry Association/ Electronic Industries
Association (TINEIA) standards.
3.4.6.4 SUBMITIALS:
3.4.6.4.1The PC Contractor shall submit to SAUDI ARAMCO/Project
Management Consultant the following items for review and approval before
commencing work:
a. Detailed dimensioned shop drawings.
b. Manufacturer's data sheets indicating the necessary installations
dimensions, weights and materials.
c. Operation and maintenance manuals.
d. Certificate of compliance stating that the materials used conform to
all requirements of specification.
e. Copies of catalogs of all equipment to be furnished if applicable.
3.4.6.4.2After installation and commissioning, the PC Contractor shall submit
the following:
a. As-built drawing of complete system.
b. All the test results and commissioning reports to show that all tests
specified was performed and all requirements have been met.
c. Operation and maintenance and manuals.
d. Test report.
3.4.6.5 QUALITY CONTROL:
3.4.6.6.1The PC Contractor shall be responsible for the quality of work and shall
be develop and propose programs and methods of construction and testing
such as to achieve the specified quality to the approval of SAUDI
3.4.6.6 COORDINATION:
3.4.6.6.1The PC Contractor shall be responsible for the proper coordination of
all phases of the work under this contract.
3.4.6.6.2It shall be the responsibility of the PC Contractor to coordinate the
work and equipment as specified in specification and drawings in order to
assure a complete and satisfactory installation.
3.4.6.7 MATERAIL DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE:
3.4.6.7.1 The PC Contractor shall deliver, handle and store equipment and
material units in accordance with the manufacture's requirements as well as
following requirements:
a. Ensure equipment and materials are delivered to site originally
packed, securely wrapped and labeled by manufacturer in unopened
containers. Protect materials during delivery as directed by the
manufacturer.
b. Store materials at building site strictly according to manufacturer's
Instruction.
c. Avoid damage or distortion of the materials during handling and
transportation.
d. Be responsible for damages of equipment and materials occurring
during transportation or storage of the product.
3.4.6.8 EXECUTION:
3.4.6.8.1The PC Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating the installation
and activation of the communication systems and obtaining any required
permits.
3.4.6.8.2The PC Contractor shall be responsible for providing operating and
supervisory Persona with adequate Knowledge and experience All work
shall be done in a workman like manner by competent personnel under the
supervision of personnel who have prior experience In the placing of
conduits, wires, cables and all other related accessories.
3.4.6.8.3Installation of telecom conduits/ fittings/wiring devices and termination
shall be as per the drawings.
3.4.6.8.4All system Installation and activation work shall be performed according
to the latest manufacturing technology If applicable and SAUDI
ARAMCO/Project Management Consultant rules and regulations.
3.4.6.8.5Inside of all conduits shall be thoroughly clean of any dirt, moisture or
other foreign material before pulling wire and cable.
3.4.6.8.6Install cable identification tag on each cable at cabinet and these shall be
installed in easily visible and readable from front access.
3.4.6.8.7Separation of wires shall comply With EIAfTIA-569 rules or NEC
standards for separating communication cables from potential EMI sources,
including electrical power lines.
3.4.6.9 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING:
3.4.6.9.1 The PC Contractor shall carry out all site tests in accordance
with approved test procedures to ensure that the materials and related
accessories comply With specifications and operational requirements,
All tests are subject to witnessing by SAUDI ARAMCO/Project
3.4.6.9.2 Upon completion of installation and prior to final acceptance,
each component of each system shall be tested to the complete
satisfaction of the SAUDI ARAMCO/Project Management Consultant.
3.4.6.9.3 Upon completion of all testing, the PC Contractor shall
submit certified reports in accordance with the approved test
procedures. The report for each test shall include the name of the
person in-charge of the test and the date of performance. All factory
and field tests shall be included in Operation and Maintenance Manual.
3.4.6.9.4 Care shall be taken that the test apparatus does not damage
the equipment or other related accessories during the testing.
3.4.6.9.5 All data cables shall be tested using Pent scanner for Cat 6
NEXT test or SAUDI ARAMCO/Project Management Consultant
accepted equivalent as appropriate.
Measurement shall include:
 Wire map
 Length
 Attenuation
 Next
 PSNEXT
 ACR
 Return
 Propagation
 Delay Skew
3.4.7 OA/OC Plan (General Requirements):
3.4.7.1 The PC Contractor has to establish and control the procedures of the QA/QC,
prepare and submit the quality plan that has to be followed and implemented during
and all over the work period that has to be approved by SAUDI ARAMCO/Project
3.4.7.2 All procedures as directed by SAUDI ARAMCO/Project Management Consultant
have to be strictly followed and to be coordinated with other contractors to ensure the
compatible and unified procedures are applicable to the whole project These include
but not limited to:
3.4.7.2.1 Work scheduling, monitoring and control.
3.4.7.2.2 QA/QC monitoring and record keeping,
3.4.7.2.3 Progress evaluation, billing and payments presentation.
3.4.7.2.4 Safely and loss prevention.
3.4.7.2.5
3.4.7.2.6 Reporting either regularly (daily, weekly, monthly) or upon the SAUDI
ARAMCO/Project Management Consultant request.
3.4.7.2.7 HSE Plan, Procurement Plan, Progress Measurement Plan.
3.4.7.3 The PC Contractor has to comply and implement HSE Plan during the
construction period as approved by SAUDI ARAMCO/Project Management
Consultant.
3.4.8 Reporting:
3.4.8.1 Reporting requirements are detailed in the specific Tender/Contract Appendix.
Daily reports by The PC Contractor will be required to ensure the work progress.
Weekly progress report including work schedule updates, as well as HSE and QA/QC
reports will be required from The PC Contractor, in addition to any other report
needed for Inspections & testing.
4. Project Schedule and Contract Coordination PC Contract:
4.0 1 The PC Contractor shall submit within 30 days from the date of Letter of Acceptance (LOA), a
P&C schedule for the procurement, execution and completion of the works, which shall be consistent with
the milestones set out below. The PC Contractor should submit a detailed delivery schedule as part of their
technical proposal This is to be prepared and submitted In an Employer approved version of either the
PrimaveraP3, or the MS Project Management software, and this approved scheduling system shall be
adopted for use with the project. Bidder to submit detailed level 3 schedules In P3 based on the agreed pay
items of work grouped into below milestones.
4.0 2 2Duration of Project shall start after handing over the site officially to the CONTRACTOR.
4.0 3
Areas BUA Duration Remarks

Mosque 1 1092 16 Months 18 Months from receiving official Handing over
documents from SAUDI
ARAMCO.
ARAMCO.
ARAMCO.
Total 3759 30 Months The project shall be handed over (Taking Over)
completely no later than 30 Months from the
Project Star Date as mentioned in the Face Sheet
In this Contract.
Schedule No 1. Project Phases and Schedule.
5. Permits:
5.0 1 The PC Contractor shall do all acts and things necessary, including following-up on behalf of the
SAUDI ARAMCO with the concerned public authorities, in order to obtain the required clearance
certificates and approvals from all the services providers as pre-requisites.
5.0 2 The PC Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining all permits necessary to complete the works.
The PC Contractor shall identify a suitably qualified individual with the necessary experience who
with proper approval, Introduction and coordination by SAUDI ARAMCO/Project Management
Consultant will interface with the Saudi Arabian authorities In addition, this Individual will
coordinate The PC Contractor effort in identifying permit requirements, obtaining applications,
communicating the requirements. Compiling the required design documents, submitting the
applications and following through with the authorities. The individual shall be subject to SAUDI
ARAMCO/Project Management Consultant approval. Permit application, processing and approvals
take significant time and effort to complete. The PC Contractor is responsible for planning and
allowing sufficient duration for such permits and approvals to support the project master schedule.
6. Project Closeout:
6.0 1 Cleaning Up:
6.1.1 Shaft. electrical closets, pipe and duct shafts, chases, furred spaces and similar
spaces which are generally unfinished shall be cleaned and left free from rubbish, loose
plaster, mortar drippings, extraneous Construction materials, dirt and dust.
6.1.2 Remove rubbish by means of chutes, hoists or receptacles. Do not drop or throw
rubbish or waste from one level to another within or outside the building. Dust Screens
should be provided for these chutes, hoists or receptacles. And this applies to the dump
trucks or vehicle which will carry the garbage/trash/surplus materials to their destination
or dumpsite/storage out of the project site.
6.1.3 Care shall be taken by workmen not to mark soil or otherwise deface finished
surfaces. In the event that finished surfaces become defaced, clean and restore such
surfaces to their original condition.
6.1.4 Clean up during and immediately upon completion of each trade's work.
6.1.5 Clean areas In which painting and finishing work is to be performed just prior to
the start of this work and maintain these areas in a clean condition, Cleaning Includes the
removal of rubbish, broom cleaning of floors, the removal of any plaster, mortar, dust and
other extraneous materials from finish surfaces and surfaces that will remain after the
project is complete.
6.1.6 In addition to the cleaning specified above and the more specific cleaning which
may be required in various sections of the specification, prepare the building for
occupancy by a thorough cleaning, including washing (or cleaning by other appropriate
methods) surfaces on which dirt or dust has collected and by washing glass on both sides.
Wash exterior glass using a window cleaning contractor specializing in such work, Provide
and maintain adequate runner strips of staining reinforced Kraft building paper on
finished floors for protection. Leave equipment in an undamaged, bright, clean, polished
condition, Re-cleaning will not be required after the works have been accepted unless after
operations of The PC Contractor makes re-cleaning necessary.
6.1.7 Ensure that no mud and debris is allowed to dirty the surrounding public
highway by being carried off the construction site by trucks or other vehicles Trucks to be
subject to cleaning, particularly wheels and the underside of the chassis, prior to accessing
the surrounding roads from site.
6.0 2 Removal of Plant and Temporary Works (Demobilization):
6.2.1 Upon completion of the works or when directed by the SAUDI
ARAMCO/Project Management Consultant clear away all surplus materials, plant and
temporary works including scaffolding, temporary buildings, equipment, utilities, services,
facilities, access, fencing, gates, coverings enclosures, etc., and make good to the
satisfaction of SAUDI ARAMCO/Project Management Consultant. Backfill and compact
trenches after removal of temporary drains. Break-up and remove temporary manholes,
septic tanks or, if permitted by the consultant and local authorities having jurisdiction,
disinfect and fill in solid with approved filling. Comply with all Municipality Regulations
regarding final site clearance and obtain relevant approvals and certificates.
6.0 3 Handover Materials & Documents:
6.3.1 The PC Contractor shall provide all Three (3) Original copies of operation and
maintenance instruction manuals, Three (3) Original copies of brochures, Three (3)
Original copies of catalogue cuts, and Three (3) A3 size sets of as-built drawings for each
villa as specified and required by the contract. This will include all guarantees and
warranties required by the contract including those required of manufacturers, suppliers
and subcontractors together with all spare parts, tools and maintenance equipment for use
after the expiry of the period of maintenance, also, One (1) box for full set of keys for
every each Mosque.
7. L.IST OF SPECIFICATIONS:
The codes and standards as listed on the drawings prevail. The codes listed below are the
principle ones applicable to this contract: however, this list of Codes is not intended to be
exclusive and exhaustive. Finishes as specified on the drawings prevail, where not specified
on drawings finish as specified in Scope of Work for Houses to be utilized. The latest
editions at the time of contract placement shall apply. Unless modified by requirements
specified herein, the facilities shall comply with these publications.
1. Royal Commission standards:
Chapter 1 JRC Design Criteria - General Requirements (Rev. 0)
Chapter 2 JRC Design Criteria - Environmental (Rev. 0)

Chapter 3 JRC Design Criteria - Civil (Rev. 0)
Chapter 4 JRC Design Criteria - Roads (Rev. 0)
Chapter 5 JRC Design Criteria - Water & Wastewater (Rev. 0)
Chapter 6 JRC Design Criteria - Mechanical (Rev. 0)
Chapter 7 JRC Design Criteria - Electrical (Rev. 0)
Chapter 8 JRC Design Criteria - Telecommunication (Rev. 0)
Chapter 9 JRC Design Criteria - Structural (Rev. 0)
Chapter 10 JRC Design Criteria - Landscaping (Rev. 0)
Chapter 11 JRC Design Criteria - Architectural (Rev. 0)
Chapter 12 JRC Design Criteria - Corrosion Control (Rev. 0)
Chapter 13 JRC Design Criteria - Drafting Guidelines (Rev. 0)
JRC General Design Criteria and Technical Guidelines, 3" Edition-
September 2007
JRC Royal Commission General Requirements.
2. Saudi Electric Company, Saudi Telecom Company and other relevant standards;
A. Civil:
 IBC 2009 (International Building Code).
 ASCE/SEI7 (American Society of Civil Engineers).
 ASCE 7-05 (American Society of Civil Engineers) Minimum Design
Loads for Buildings and other Structures.
 AASHTO (American Association of State Highway and
Transportation Officials).
 Ministry of Transportation (MOT).
 SBC (Saudi Building Code).
 AISC-360 (American Institute of Steel Construction).
 ACI-318 (American Concrete Institute) Building Code
Requirements for Structural Concrete.
 ACI-347 (American Concrete Institute) Recommended Practice for
Concrete Formwork.
 ACI-315-99 (American Concrete Institute) American Concrete
Institute: Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement.
 PCI (Precast/Pre-stressed Concrete Institute).
 ASTM 0-2922 Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place.
 BS8110-Code.
 PCI MNL 120-04.
 PCI MNL 126.
B. Electrical & Telecommunication:
C.
D.
 SEC (Saudi Electricity Company), NEC, SBC, NEMA PB 1.

 NECINFPA 70, SBC, IEEE std 80.
 NEMA, IEC (International Electro technical Commission).
 SEC, IEC 60076, ANSI C57.12.OO.
 SEC, IES (Illuminating Engineering Society of North America).
 STC for villas and outside plant distribution.
 SMSS SEC Material Standard Specifications.
 BICSI (SAES-T-916) will be used for service buildings.
 Marafiq Standard Latest Edition.
 IESNA Lighting Handbook.
 Saudi Electric Company (SEC) - Distribution Standards.
 SEC - Distribution Materials Specifications.
E. Plumbing & Utilities:
 Ministry of water and electricity.
 AWWA C500-80 Gate Valves for Water and Sewer Systems.
 AWWA C504-80 Rubber Seated Butter Valves.
 AWWA C550-81 Protective Coatings for Valves and Hydrants.
 AWWA C601-68 Disinfecting Potable Water Mains.
 SBC (Saudi Building Code) including IBC 2003 section 101,2
exception I.
 SASO SSA 13/1396 II Un-plasticized Plastic PVC Pipe for
Potable Water, Class 5.
 SASO SSA 14/1396 II Un-plasticized Plastic PPR Pipe for
Potable Water, Class 5.
 SASO SSA 15/1396 II Testing PVC Pipe for Potable Water
Systems.
 NFPA 1141.
 American Water Works Association (AWWA/ANSI)
Standards.
 American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ANSl/ASME)
Standards.
 American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM).
 National fire protection Association including but not limited
to NFPA 13 D and NFPA 13R.
 NFPA-10 Portable Fire Extinguisher (2010).
F. HVAC:
 ASHRAE Handbooks & Standards.
 Uniform Mechanical Code.
 Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National
Association, Inc. (SMACNA Standards).
 International Energy Conservation Code (IECC).
 American National Standards Institute (ANSI).
 American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM).
 NFPA 90A Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating
Systems.
 SMACNA 1999 SHEET METAL AND AIRCONOITIONING
CONTRACTORS NATIONAL ASSOCIATION, INC.
 NFPA 90A Air Conditioning and Ventilating System.
 National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB).
8. LIST ATTACHMENT:
8.0 1 Attachment 1 - IFC Drawings.
END OF SCHDULEB

Final 470

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

You might also like

Final 470

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Final 470

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

3Scope of Work

Review Sequence 161 Reviewer 161 Reviewer Approved by

TABLE OF CONTENTS Page

Type Style Option Built- up No. of Others

3.1. 5 PC Contractor’s Responsibilities:

3. 2 MOBILIZATION, TEMPORARY WORKS & PERMANENT WORKS: (DIVISIONI -

3.4.4.12.2 The PC Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials,

3.4.4.12.3 The fire protection system shall comply with NFPA

Areas No. of units Duration Remarks

Area 1 (Mock- up) Villas 3 10 Months 10 Months from receiving official

Area 2 127 20 Months 18 Months from receiving official

Area 3 120 26 Months 24 Months from receiving official

Area 4 241 38 Months 30 Months from receiving official

Total 491 39 Months The project shall b e handed over (Taking

Schedule No 1. Project Phases and Schedule.

Villa/ Items Guest Room 2 Diwanly a Driver Reference

7.2 Cabinet (Bedroom & Storage Cabinets):

Villa/ Items Ground First Floor Men Majlis Dining Reference

No. Title Specification Number

Review Sequence 161 Reviewer 161 Reviewer Approved by

5.2 Facility Furniture:

7. Other items (Portable office Requirements):

Review Sequence 161 Reviewer 161 Reviewer Approved by

1. Methods and Specifications for Roads and Asphalt Laying:

DIVISION 1- GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

Specification 1101 Schedule of Kitchen and Other Appliances

0101 SUMMARY OF WORK:

FINAL ACCPETANCE AS-BUILT

30.0 MOCK-UP SAMPLE:

0103 TEMPORARY FACILITIES

2.0 3 Drinking Water:

2.0 6 Client's Field Offices:

B. Temporary Site Facilities shall consist of:

1. Office facilities at site.

2. Shaded Parking Area.

Contractor shall provide the following services:

2.0 7 Fire and Safety Standards:

A. Provide / Refer to the Contract Schedules

2.0 10 Temporary Electricity, Lighting and Communications:

2.0 11 Non-Electric Utilities:

0103 TEMPORARY FACILITIES

1.0 2 Termination and Remova!

1.0 3 Project Identification and Temporary Signs:

1.0 5 Installation / General:

=== End of section ===

0104 TEMPORARY FENCING AND BARRICADES

Part 2 & 3 - Products & Execution:

1.0 3 Project Identification Sign:

A. Painted signs with painted lettering:

B. Erect at appropriate locations to provide required information.

1.0 5 Quality Assurance:

0105 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION AND SIGNS

3.0 1 Project Identification Sign:

3.0 2 Information Signs:

B. Relocate informational signs as required by progress of the work.

1.0 2 Record Document Submittals:

B. The record documents are as follows: